Skip to main content

Full text of "Angling"

See other formats


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Arciiive 

in  2007  witii  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


htfp://yvww.arcliive.brg/details/francisanglingOOfranrich 


ANGLING 


BY 


FRAKCIS    ^RANCIS, 

Author  of  '■'■  A  Booh  on  Angling,"  S^e.  ^e. 


"  I  care  not  a  jot, 
I  envy  no  lot. 
So  I  have  a  rod  and  can  fish. 


SECOND      EDITION 


LONDON:  HOEACE   COX,  346,  STRAND,  W.C. 

1883. 


ANGLING 


BY 


FRANCIS    (FRANCIS, 

Author  of  "  A  Book  on  Angling"  S^c.  ^c. 


I  care  not  a  jot, 

I  etivy  no  lot. 

So  I  have  a  rod  and  oan  fi»h. 


SECOND      EDITION. 


LONDON:  HOEACE   COX,  346,  STRAND,  W.C. 
1883. 


LONDON : 
PBINTKD  BT  HORACK  COX,  34(6,  8TBAND,  W.C. 


Jprrface  to  tJje  Seconti  iSftritton. 


In  producing  a  second  edition  of  this  work  I  have 
no  great  changes  to  announce.  I  have  endeavoured 
to  perfect  the  instructions  as  to  bottom  fishing, 
though  there  has  been  no  very  striking  improvement 
worth  note  of  late  years,  and  I  have  striven  to 
simplify  somewhat  the  rudiments  to  young  anglers 
taking  to  trout  fishing.  The  size  and  shape  of  the 
first  edition  was  somewhat  awkward  for  the  con- 
venience of  carriage,  and  that  I  have  seen  fit  to  alter 
accordingly. 

Francis  Francis. 
The  Firs,  Twickenhamy 
1883. 


iviS^GieS 


preface  to  tfje  JFtrst  (!Hliitiotu 


Eteby  book  should  have  a  raison  cTStret  and  it  might  be 
thought  by  eome  persons  superfluous  that  I  should  have 
written  another  and  a  less  comprehensive  work  after  having 
written  a  book  which  contains  so  full  an  account  of  the 
art  in  every  branch  as  "  A  Book  on  Angling,"  published 
by  Messrs.  Longman,  and  now  in  its  fourth  edition.  The 
popularity  which  that  work  has  attained  might  very  well 
satisfy  all  my  desires,  but  I  have  been  told  many  times 
that  my  "  Book  on  Angling  "  has  not  touched  a  very  large 
class  of  anglers  comprehended  in  those  who  cannot  afford 
to  pay  so  much  as  15«.  for  a  guide  to  their  favourite 
■amusement.  Owing  to  the  manner  in  which  "  A  Book  on 
Angling  "  is  got  up,  and  the  expense  incurred  in  producing 
the  coloured  plates — all  of  which  are  of  necessity  done  by 
hand — there  was  no  possibility  of  bringing  it  within  the 
means  of  the  large  body  of  anglers  whom  I  have  referred 
to,  and  I  have  been  asked  again  and  again  to  write  a 
book  of  a  somewhat  less  extensive  nature  and  without  the 
coloured  plates,  or  the  long  list  of  salmon  flies  contained 
in  my  first  work.  I  have  now  yielded  to  this  demand,  and 
I  trust  that  the  present  work  may  fulfil  the  requirements 
of  the  persons  for  whom  it  is  written. 

A  reviewer  of  my  "Book  on  Angling"  lately,  in  the 


PREFACE.  V 

course  of  what  was  upon  the  whole  a  very  favourable  and 
even  kind  review,  in  one  of  the  principal  morning  papers, 
said  that  I  was  rather  opinionated — in  saying  which  he 
stated  neither  more  nor  less  than  the  truth,  and  I  plead 
guilty  to  the  charge  ;  for,  in  writing  books  on  angling,  I 
have  endeavoured  to  write  them  as  far  as  possible  from 
my  own  experience,  and  to  avoid,  as  far  as  I  could,  giving 
a  mere  rechauffe  from  old  angling  works.  Indeed,  I  have 
striven  to  borrow  as  little  as  2)08sible  from  any  one,  merely 
giving  what  I  know  to  be  the  ordinary  methods  and 
practices  in  vogue  as  regards  the  sport  of  angling  in  these 
later  times.  I  hardly  see  how  a  person  endeavouring  to 
do  this  could  be  other  than  opinionated.  The  question 
appears  to  me  to  be,  not  whether  I  am  opinionated,  but 
whether  the  opinions  I  have  expressed  are  the  best  that 
the  angler  can  follow.  Now  I  take  upon  me  to  say  that  I 
have  endeavoured  to  give  the  best  methods  and  plans  of 
angling,  and  that,  in  doing  so,  I  never  have  hesitated — 
and  I  should  take  shame  to  myself  if  I  had — to  give  full 
credit  to  the  authors  of  those  plans  for  their  inventions, 
be  they  whom  they  may ;  and,  in  doing  so,  I  venture  even 
further  to  say,  that  I  have  often  taken  hints  from  brother 
anglers  where  their  ideas  appeared  good,  and  given  them 
the  credit  of  them,  but  with  whom  on  many  other  points 
I  have  no  sympathy  or  agreement  whatever.  Where  I 
have  been  able  to  speak  solely  from  my  own  experience, 
and  where  that  has  seemed  to  me  the  best  to  draw  from, 
I  have  not  hesitated  to  do  so.  No  doubt  it  would  have 
been  far  easier  for  me  to  have  said  Izaak  Walton  says  so 
and  so,  Salter  recommends  this,  Ronald  advises  that,  and 
"  Ephemera "  the  other.  But  angling  has  made  hirge 
strides  since  the  days  of  those  writers;  and  though  in 
many  instances  their  experience  and  advice  still  stands 


▼i  PREFACE. 

good,  yet  in  many  others  it  is  simply  obsolete  and  useless. 
In  the  present  book,  with  very  few  exceptions,  I  have 
drawn  almost  entirely  from  my  own  stores.  The  tackle 
from  my  box,  which  I  constantly  use,  and  the  flies  from 
my  books  which  I  find  the  most  killing,  I  have  simply 
taken  and  described,  and,  consequently,  in  this  book  I 
fear  I  shall  be  found  more  opinionated  than  ever ;  but  if 
any  one  will  show  me  a  better  rod,  line,  tackle,  or  fly,  than 
any  I  recommend,  and  I  find  on  trial  that  it  is  so,  I  shall 
never  be  slow  to  adopt  it,  and  to  recognise  not  only  its 
usefulness,  but  the  services  rendered  by  the  inventor  to 
the  cause  of  angling.  For  I  trust,  whenever  I  am  called 
upon  to  lay  down  the  pen,  that  no  man  will  ever  be  able 
to  say,  "  He  did  not  act  fairly  either  to  his  contemporaries 
or  to  those  he  drew  his  information  from;"  for  that  I 
hold  to  be  one  of  the  most  disgraceful  charges  which  can 
be  brought  against  an  author.  But  if  I  strive  to  behave 
fairly  to  others,  I  can  hardly  be  blamed  if  I  am  tenacious 
of  my  own  rights.  In  angling,  as  in  all  other  matters, 
one  cannot  do  better  than  stick  to  the  Church  Catechism, 
and  to  "  do  to  all  men  as  you  would  they  should  do  unto 
you  ;"  and  I  think  that  any  author  who  has  adopted  and 
striven  to  carry  out  this  motto  purely  and  simply,  may 
look  back  on  his  career  without  regret. 

Feancis  Fbancis. 
The  Firs,  Twickenham, 
1877. 


CONTENTS 


PAOB 

Preface iii 

CHAPTER  I. 
Introductory — Bottom  Fishing 1 

CHAPTER  II. 

Mid-Water  Fishing      18 

CHAPTER  III. 

Surface  or  Fly  Fishing      22 

CHAPTER  IV. 

The  Gudgeon — The  Pope  or  Ruff — The  Bleak 
— The  Roach — The  Rudd — The  Dace — The 
Chub — The  Barbel — The  Bream — The  Carp 
—The  Tench— The  Perch      25 

CHAPTER  V. 
The  Pike        63 

CHAPTER  YI. 
Trout  Fishing  with  Bait 81 


viU  CONTENTS. 


CHAPTER  VII. 

PAOB 

Fly  FisniNQ  for  Trout       94 


CHAPTER  VIII. 
Trout  Flies    110 

CHAPTER  IX. 
Grayling  Fishing 127 

CHAPTER  X. 

Salmon  Fishing     130 

CHAPTER  XI. 

Salmon  Flies 143 

CHAPTER  XII. 
On  Tackle  Making,  &c.       151 

Addenda 162 


ANGLiisra. 


CHAPTER    I. 

INTRODUCTORY— BOTTOM  FISHING. 

Who  first  invented  the  art  of  angling  it  would  be  very 
hard  to  say.  Probably  in  all  ages  of  the  world  the  neces- 
sities of  mankind  induced  them  to  practise  it  in  a  more  or 
less  rude  fashion.  When  Dame  Juliana  Bemers  wrote 
about  it,  hard  upon  four  hundred  years  ago,  to  judge  by 
her  illustrations  and  descriptions,  it  was  rude  enough  in 
all  conscience;  and  even  in  the  days  of  Walton  and 
Cotton,  more  than  a  hundred  and  fifty  years  later,  it  was 
scarcely  in  a  condition  to  fulfil  the  more  modem  require- 
ments of  the  present  century.  Since  those  days  hundreds 
of  books  on  angling  have  been  written,  and  in  the  present 
time  they  appear  to  issue  fi'om  the  press  at  the  rate  of 
about  one  per  month  or  even  more ;  and  within  the  last 
quarter  of  a  century  the  art  has  made  far  greater  strides 
towards  improvement  than  it  ever  did  in  four  times  the 
period  since  Dame  Juliana's  day.  And  I  fear  that  the 
schoolmaster  has  been  abroad,  and  the  fish  have  become 


2  ANGUNa. 

well  educated  too,  so  that  if  any  of  the  old  practitioners 
were  now  to  appear  on  the  banks  of  their  favourite  trout 
streams  they  would  find  their  skill  and  their  tackle  alike 
unequal  to  the  capture  of  those  "  trouts  of  20in."  &c., 
which  we  read  about  so  constantly  in  their  works. 

The  art  of  angling  is  divided  into  three  sections, 
"  bottom  fishing,"  or  fishing  with  a  bait  on  the  bottom ; 
mid-water  fishing,  comprehended  principally  in  spinning 
and  trolling ;  and  surface  fishing,  which  is  chiefly  prac- 
tised in  fly-fishing. 

We  will  commence  at  the  lower  round  of  the  ladder, 
and  take  bottom  fishing  first.  Bottom  fishing  is  the 
most  primitive  style,  no  doubt.  We  all  more  or  less 
began  with  bottom  fishing,  and  pitched  minnows  and 
sticklebacks  out  on  the  grass,  with  a  pin,  thread,  and 
worm  with  as  much  interest  and  delight,  and  perhaps 
a  good  deal  more  than  we  now  evince  in  the  cap- 
ture of  a  two-pound  trout,  or  even  of  a  lordly  salmon ! 
Anon  promoted  to  a  real  halfpenny  hook  and  a  withy,  the 
noble  gudgeon  or  the  festive  roachling  became  the 
sweeteners  of  our  existence.  The  withy  was  discarded 
for  a  sixpenny  two-joint  hazel  rod ;  until,  finally,  on 
some  glorious  red-letter  day — which  we  all  remember  so 
well,  and  will  to  the  last  hour  of  existence — papa — having 
heard  from  Dr.  Whackem  that  Frank  was  really  doing 
his  declensions  very  creditably  indeed  considering  his  age, 
and  had  said  his  4th  prop,  of  Euclid  without  a  mistake — 
considering  that  if  he  knew  the  value  of  two,  it  would 
be  quite  proper  that  his  eldest-bom  should  be  equal  to  one 
angle  at  least — prepared  a  surprise  for  us  ;  and  when  we 
walked  into  the  breakfast  parlour  on  the  morning  of  our 
twelfth  birthday,  there  sat  the  dear  old  man  with  that 
noble  four-and-sixpenny  four-jointed  bambooer  which  we 


BOTTOM  FISHING.  3 

had  so  long  scanned  with  anxious  infraction  of  the  tenth 
commandment  in  the  window  of  the  local  tackier,  who  was 
also  a  hair-dresser,  toj- shopper,  stationer,  newsman,  and 
tobacconist ;  and  beside  it  on  the  table  a  paper  parcel  con- 
taining a  bamboo  winder,  with  a  real  line  and  float,  and  a 

gut  hook.     Ah h  !     Times  have  passed  since  then,  and 

many  strokes  of  good  fortune  and  unexpected  luck  have 
happened,  but  few  that  gave  us  such  delight  as  that ! 
With  some  such  appliances  the  young  angler  will  pro- 
bably commence  his  career  as  a  real  angler.  With  a  bag 
of  well  scoured  worms  (after  a  wormey  week  or  so,  during 
which  worms  have  been  discovered  about  the  house  in 
unusual  places,  to  the  terror  of  the  housemaid  and  indigna- 
tion of  mamma),  he  will  make  his  way  to  brook,  river, 
or  pond,  and  try  conclusions  with  the  denizens  of  the 
waters.  At  first  he  will  fish  for  anything  that  comes 
along.  As  he  improves  he  will  go  out  with  a  set  purpose 
to  catch  some  particular  kind  of  fish,  then  he  may  be  said 
to  be  on  the  high  road  to  knowledge. 

Bottom  Fishing  may  be  practised  either  from  the  shore 
or  from  a  boat.  Whichever  the  angler  selects  to  com- 
mence from,  he  should  always  remember  the  cardinal  rule, 
"  Study  to  be  quiet."  It  is  an  old  rule,  a  very  old  rule, 
but  it  has  had  the  approval  of  all  anglers,  from  Father 
Izaak's  time  down.  Be  as  quiet  and  unobtrusive  as 
possible.  You  may  catch  many  kinds  of  fish  either  from 
the  land  or  from  a  boat ;  but  if  you  wish  to  fish  for  carp, 
say  in  still  waters,  you  will  find  it  better  to  fish  from  the 
land,  as  they  are  very  shy,  and  the  least  movement  of  the 
boat  causing  wave  or  ripple  will  suffice  to  make  them  still 
more  shy.  We  will  suppose,  therefore  that  the  angler 
commences  from  the  shore  in  still  water — say  a  pond.  To 
do  so  effectually. he  will  find  a  good  long  light  rod  of  some 

fi  2 


4  ANGLING. 

fourteen  or  fifteen  feet  desirable,  with  which  he  can  swing 
out  a  good  length  of  line.  To  this  will  be  fixed  a  winch 
or  reel  with  some  thirty  yards  of  line.  Suppose  he  is 
fishing  in  four  or  five  feet  depth  of  water,  he  will  be  able 
to  fish  some  three  or  four  and  twenty  feet  from  the  shore. 
If  he  wishes  to  cast  his  line  still  further  out  he  must  draw 
it  down  from  above  the  second  or  third  ring,  as  described 
hereafter,  in  Nottingham  angling,  and  thus  he  may  get 
out  another  eight  or  ten  feet. 

As  pond  fish,  and  indeed  all  fish  in  still  water,  bite 
very  slowly  and  nibble  a  good  deal  first,  the  float 
gives  ample  warning  of  a  bite  to  the  angler;  and  he 
may  lay  his  rod  down  on  the  bank  without  any  detri- 
ment to  his  fishing,  and  resume  it  as  soon  as  he  has 
a  bite.  For  the  more  convenient  exercise  of  this  plan  it 
is  usual  to  stick  a  forked  stick  a  yard  or  so  out  into  the 
water,  so  that  the  butt  of  the  rod  and  reel  rests  on  the 
shore,  and  the  body  of  the  rod  is  supported  above  the 
water  in  the  fork  of  the  stick.  A  light  line  of  fine  but 
strong  Derby  silk,  which  will  not  sink  to  the  bottom 
too  heavily,  and  so  entangle  in  the  weeds,  &c.,  is  best. 
The  float  may  be  as  light  as  it  possibly  can  be  consistently 
with  the  power  to  fish  comfortably — a  too  light  float  will 
sometimes  blow  about  in  the  wind,  and  will  not  swing  out 
well.  Three  or  four  shreds  of  rush  tied  on  the  line  make 
a  light  and  very  unobtrusive  float,  and  in  clear  water  that 
is  a  point  worth  studying. 

The  whole  of  the  tackle  from  some  distance  above 
the  float  to  the  hook  should  be  of  single  gut,  as  fine 
as  can  be  fished  with,  considering  the  strength  required. 
The  bait  should  always  rest  on  the  bottom,  as  pond 
fish  feed  chiefly  on  the  bottom :  the  depth,  therefore, 
between  the  float  and  the  hook    should  be   somewhat 


BOTTOM  FISHTNG.  5 

more  than  the  depth  of  the  water,  and  the  lowest  shot 
with  which  the  line  is  loaded,  to  balance  the  float,  should 
be  at  least  a  foot  above  the  hook.  There  is  another 
advantage  in  the  bait  resting  on  the  bottom,  and  that 
is,  that  is  its  natural  position,  and  it  does  not  thus 
challenge  the  suspicion  of  the  fish  ;  and  as  the  gut,  which 
is  in  immediate  connection  with  the  hook,  rests  on  the 
bottom  too,  it  is  not  seen.  That  most  cunning  of  all  fish, 
the  carp,  may  be  taken  in  this  way  when  it  would  be 
hopeless  to  fish  for  him  with  the  bait  hanging  just  off  the 
bottom,  for  he  could  then  see  the  gut  at  once,  and  also  the 
shots  that  weight  the  line,  and  probably  the  float  above  ; 
and  if  the  float  is  of  a  nice  white  and  vermilion,  or  some 
other  dazzling  rainbow  coloui*,  it  will  afford  the  old  carp  a 
capital  text  on  which  to  preach  an  instructive  sermon  to 
the  young  ones  on  scarlet  abominations  and  the  Lady  of 
Babylon. 

To  fish  in  this  way,  however,  you  must  have  a  clear 
bottom  and  free  from  weeds,  otherwise  the  bait  will  sink 
amongst  the  weeds  and  be  hidden.  If  the  pond,  there- 
fore, has  any  gravelly  places,  or  hard  clay  bottoms,  then 
if  they  are  not  clear  of  weeds,  you  should  get  some  one  to 
rake  spaces.  A  very  large  space  is  not  required — one  or 
two  spots,  some  30ft.  or  40ft.  square,  will  suffice  ;  of  course, 
the  larger  they  are  in  reason  the  better  chance  for  more 
fish,  but  if  places  like  these  be  cleaned  out  between  the 
weeds,  here  the  big  carp  and  tench  will  wallow  and  feed  ; 
and  if  before  fishing  the  angler  baits  such  spots  for  a  few 
days  with  a  good  store  of  grovmd  bait,  such  as  malt,  rice, 
pearl  barley,  boiled  potatoes,  or  worms  and  gentles,  so  as 
to  accustom  the  fish  to  feed  there,  he  will  much  increase 
his  sport.  If  he  is  not  able  to  do  this,  and  has  only  say 
one  day's  fishing  at  his  disposal,  his  best  plan  is — first  to 


6  ANQLINa. 

pick  out  two  or  three  of  the  best  of  such  spots  as  he  can 
see,  and  fix  his  forked  sticks ;  to  plumb  the  depth,  and 
keep  an  accurate  register  of  it  in  each  spot  so  as  not  to 
have  to  do  it  again  when  he  wants  to  fish,  and  then, 
throwing  in  a  few  handfuls  of  bait  at  each  place,  to  begin 
with  the  one  first  baited,  and  to  vary  from  one  to  the  other 
as  sport  may  counsel.  To  plumb  the  depth,  fix  a  leaden 
plummet  on  the  hook,  then  swing  the  plummet  out  to  the 
spot  you  want  to  fish.  Let  the  line  stand  upright  in  the 
water,  the  plummet  just  touching  the  bottom ;  mark  the 
place  where  the  surface  of  the  water  cuts  the  line,  and  fix 
the  float  accordingly,  taking  a  half  hitch  of  the  line  round 
the  quill  to  prevent  slipping.  The  best  sized  hook  for  this 
sort  of  fishing  will  be  one  of  about  No.  7  or  8,  of  the 
round  bend  series,  as  this  will  take  both  carp,  tench,  perch, 
and  even  small  roach  too. 

In  &shing  such  places  the  angler  will  always  find  that 
with  such  sharp-eyed  fish  it  is  as  well  to  have  a  tree, 
hedge,  bank,  or  bush  at  his  back,  if  he  can  get  one,  so 
that  his  body  does  not  stand  out  clear  against  the  sky 
behind  him.  It  is  quite  astonishing  what  a  difference 
this  makes.  I  have  often  seen  a  trout  take  a  fly  within 
five  or  six  yards  of  me,  I  having  the  high  bank  at  my 
back,  when,  if  I  had  been  on  the  bank  with  the  sky  at 
my  back  he  would  not  have  looked  at  my  bait,  but  would 
have  been  off  under  a  stone  or  weed  for  shelter.  A  hurdle 
propped  up  on  end  answers  very  well  for  this  purpose  if 
there  is  nothing  else  naturally  placed.  It  should,  however, 
be  put  up  a  week  before  fishing,  to  let  the  fish  get  accus- 
tomed to  it. 

And  now  we  will  suppose  the  angler — his  pitch  chosen 
and  baited,  his  depth  plumbed  beforehand,  his  rod  all 
ready — he  walks   gently   down,  puts  his  little   stool   or 


BOTTOM  FISHINa.  7 

basket  behind  some  tree  or  bush  (for  he  should  never 
sit  on  the  damp  ground),  then  he  baits  his  hook  with 
a  well  scoured  red  worm,  covering  it  completely,  and 
leaving  veiy  little  more  tail  hanging  off  the  point  than  he 
can  help  ;  he  next  slings  the  bait  out  as  far  as  he  can  into 
the  pond,  lays  the  rod  down  carefully,  resting  it  on  the 
fork,  lights  his  pipe  if  he  is  a  smoker,  or  gets  out  his  book 
if  he  is  not,  and  waits.  The  top  of  his  small  quill  projects 
a  bare  half  inch  above  the  surface.  "  Ha !  was  that  a 
motion  of  the  float  ?  "  "  Yes,  no  doubt  of  it ;  there  it 
dipped,  and  there  it  bobbed  right  under  water ! " — and 
here  the  tyro  would  seize  his  rod  and  do  something 
desperate,  when  he  would  lose  his  bite  and  scare  his  fish 
for  his  pains ;  but  the  experienced  angler  merely  puts 
down  his  book,  takes  up  the  rod  very  softly,  so  as  not  to 
disturb  the  float  in  the  least,  and  waits.  The  float  keeps 
on  shaking  and  bobbing,  now  dipping  down  well  under 
water,  and  now  darting  an  inch  or  two  one  way  or  the 
other,  and  at  length,  as  a  reward  for  his  patience,  the  float 
sinks  slowly  down,  assuming  a  horizontal  position,  and 
sails  steadily  off  six  inches  under  water.  Then  is  the 
time,  and  a  short,  jerk  of  the  angler's  rod  top  arrests  the 
thief,  who,  mighty  indignant  and  a  little  alarmed,  darts 
off  at  full  speed.  He  must  then  be  handled  and  played 
according  to  his  size,  the  angler's  object  being  to  get  him 
away  from  his  pitch,  and  to  make  as  little  disturbance  as 
possible,  so  as  not  to  alarm  the  other  fish.  A  capable 
landing  net,  with  a  good  long  light  handle  so  as  to  reach 
well  out  beyond  the  margin,  is  useful. 

It  is  desirable  to  make  as  little  noise  in  stumping  about 
the  bank  as  possible,  as  the  still  water  easily  conveys  the 
slightest  sound  or  vibration ;  and  the  angler  should  also  take 
care  as  much  as  possible  to  keep  within  the  shelter  of  his 


8  ANGLING. 

tree,  bush,  or  hurdle.  If  fishing  for  carp  exclusively, 
paste  will  be  found  a  better  bait  than  worms  for  the  hook, 
but  all  this  will  be  treated  under  the  head  of  "  carp,"  and  in 
the  proper  place.  After  taking  a  fish  or  two  the  best  plan, 
if  the  angler  observes  that  they  are  scared  at  all,  will  be 
to  throw  in  a  handful  or  two  of  bait,  and  to  go  to  the 
next  pitch,  and  so  on  to  the  next  when  the  same  occurs, 
or  back  to  the  other  as  he  may  fancy — thus  he  will  save  a 
good  deal  of  time,  and  increase  his  chance  of  sport. 

This  is  the  first  and  simplest  kind  of  fishing,  and,  as  I 
have  said,  is  usually  the  method  in  which  the  young  angler 
first  breaks  groimd  into  the  noble  art :  if  a  boat  is  used 
there  is  no  difference  in  the  method.  But  ii'  small  perch  or 
roach  are  the  aim,  then  the  bait  should  not  be  on  the 
ground,  but  an  inch  off  it,  and  the  angler  may,  if  he  has  a 
mind,  use  a  couple  of  hooks,  one  six  inches  above  the  other. 

Bottom  fishing  in  running  water  is  rather  more  difficult 
of  achievement ;  and  this  again  is  divided  into  fishing 
with  a  moving,  and  fishing  with  a  still  bait.  The  moving 
bait  is  either  allowed  to  trundle  along  the  bottom  without 
a  float,  in  which  case  the  angler  strikes  by  feel  (this  is 
described  under  worm  fishing  for  trout),  or  it  is  attached 
to  a  float  which  is  weighted,  and  the  line  plumbed,  so  that 
the  float  shall  carry  the  hook  just  off  the  bottom,  now  and 
then  perhaps  touching  it,  or  "  tripping,"  as  it  is  termed, 
and  the  float  projecting  half  an  inch  above  the  surface. 
This  travels  along  down  stream,  and  whenever  the  float 
bobs  or  sinks  under  the  water,  the  angler  (unlike  "  still " 
fishing)  strikes  at  once  with  a  short,  sharp,  upward  jerk  of 
the  wrist,  for  the  fish  bite  much  quicker  in  running  than  in 
still  water.  Little  time  is  afforded  them  to  nibble  at  and 
play  with  the  bait  as  it  floats  away  down  stream  from 
them,  if  they  do  not  secure  it  in  their  mouths  at  once. 


BOTTOM   FISHINa.  9 

So  that  when  the  angler  sees  his  float  bob  under  water  he 
may  be  pretty  sure  that  most  of  the  hook  is  inside  the 
fish's  mouth. 

In  float  fishing  in  running  water  from  the  bank  the 
angler  keeps  the  top  of  the  rod  immediately  above  the 
float,  and  so  follows  it  all  down  his  swim,  so  as  to  be 
able  to  strike  truly  and  at  once,  and  thus  he  seldom 
has  or  wants  more  than  two  or  three  feet  at  the  most  between 
his  rod-point  and  his  float.  The  rod  should  be  as  long 
as  he  can  comfortably  use,  but  it  must  be  comparatively 
light,  as  there  is  no  putting  the  rod  down  at  this  kind  of 
fishing ;  it  must  be  poised  the  whole  time ;  and  many  a 
time  has  my  arm  ached  up  to  the  shoulder  and  my  hand 
grown  numb  with  holding  one  of  these  long  cane  rods 
common  to  the  Lea.  These  rods  are  used  of  a  prodigious 
length  in  some  instances,  even  to  two  or  three  and  twenty 
feet  and  when  the  size  of  the  fish  taken  with  them  is  con- 
sidered, it  looks  as  if  the  angler  were  using  the  mast  of  a 
young  fishing  smack ;  I  shall  notice  them  in  "  roach 
fishing."  In  this  matter  the  angler  must  suit  himself  to 
his  own  convenience  and  powers.  For  ordinary  bank  fishing 
from  twelve  to  fifteen  feet  will  be  found  quite  long  enough. 
For  punt  or  boat  fishing  from  ten  to  twelve  feet  is  ample.  In 
choosing  a  swim  the  fisherman  will  be  guided  by  circum- 
stances, such  as  the  time  of  year,  the  state  of  the  water,  the 
kind  of  fish  he  wants  to  catch,  and  so  forth — matters 
which  all  materially  affect  his  choice. 

Some  fish  lie  in  much  heavier  and  swifter  streams 
than  others,  and  some  in  eddies  altogether,  while  in 
clear  water  the  calm  deep-running  waters  hold  the  fish, 
and  in  a  flood  they  are  found  in  great  eddies  close  under 
the  banks.  Experience  either  of  his  own  or  of  some 
friend  will  determine  all  this  for  him.     If,  however,  he 


10  ANGLING. 

does  not  know  the  river,  and  cannot  see  the  fish,  and 
has  no  one  to  ask,  then  he  had  better  look  along  the 
bank  and  see  where  the  grass  is  worn  from  the  long  stand- 
ing of  feet,  where  a  few  grains  of  bran  may  be  left, 
or  the  paper  that  wrapped  the  sandwich  has  been  cast 
aside,  and  then  let  him  look  narrowly  about  and  he  will 
doubtless  find  a  swim.  Failing  in  all  this  a  swim  neither 
too  deep  nor  too  shallow,  with  sheltering  weeds  not  far 
off,  or  some  place  of  refuge  very  handy  should  be  selected. 
If  he  selects  one  or  two,  and  baits  them,  as  advised  in 
still  fishing,  good !  If  he  can  bait  them  two  or  three 
nights  before,  better  still !  but  in  that  case  he  must  sleep 
like  a  Bristol  merchant,  with  one  eye  open,  or  some  rival 
may  accidentaUy  appropriate  the  result  of  his  baiting — 
than  which  few  things  in  fishing  are  more  exasperating. 
Some  of  the  puntsmen  on  the  Thames,  in  places  where 
there  is  any  strong  rivalry,  sometimes  do  this.  But  it  is  a 
low,  mean  thing  to  do,  and  only  one  degree  better  than 
picking  a  man*s  pocket ;  indeed,  as  far  as  the  honourable 
feeling  in  the  matter  goes,  it  is  worse,  and  I  never  would 
permit  such  a  thing,  or  employ  any  man  who  did  it ;  but 
the  rivalry  that  exists  among  Thames  anglers  through 
club  prizes  and  "  weighing  in  "  has  caused  a  good  deal  of 
objectionable  work  in  this  way.  The  same  care  is  requisite 
in  bank  fishing  as  in  pond  fishing — quiet  and  unobtrusive.- 
ness  are  very  essential  to  sport. 

In  bottom  fishing  from  a  punt  the  process  is  slightly 
different.  The  pitch  being  chosen,  the  punt  fixed — on  the 
Thames  this  is  done  across  the  stream;  on  the  Norfolk 
rivers  with  the  stream ;  on  the  Trent  slightly  askew — the 
depth  is  taken,  the  bait  cast  in  (this  usually  is  made  up  in 
large  balls  either  mixed  with  clay  or  without) ;  a  rod  of 
from  ten  to  twelve  feet  is  used,  and  as  much  line  as  the 


BOTTOM   FISHING.  11 

length  of  the  rod,  or  a  little  more,  is  let  off  above  the 
float.  The  float  is  then  drawn  up  close  to  the  boat,  and 
the  swim  commences,  the  angler  keeping  his  rod  as  well 
over  his  float  as  he  can.  When  the  float  has  travelled 
down  stream  as  far  as  he  can  allow  it  to  go,  he  strikes,  in 
case  any  fish  should  snap  at  it  as  it  rises  off  the  bottom  (a 
very  favourite  moment)  by  reason  of  the  tension  of  the 
line ;  then  he  draws  the  float  and  tackle  back  up  stream 
to  the  boat,  drops  it  in  again,  and  begins  another  swim. 
If  he  hook  a  good  fish  he  has  to  take  care  that  he  does 
not  get  round  the  punt  pole,  in  which  case  grief  is  usually 
the  result.  If  two  anglers  be  fishing  from  the  punt,  and 
one  hooks  a  good  fish,  it  is  as  well  that  the  other  should 
withdraw  his  line  till  the  fish  is  landed,  lest  it  should  foul 
and  tangle  the  other's  line,  and  perhaps  even  get  off ;  and 
while  the  fish  is  disturbing  the  swim  many  fish  are  not 
likely  to  bite. 

In  case  of  a  very  large  fish,  say  of  ten  pounds  and 
upwards,  if  I  am  using  very  fine  tackle,  I  always  like 
to  let  the  punt  loose,  and,  getting  below  the  fish,  take 
him  into  strange  water  if  possible,  where  he  has  no  holt 
or  hide  to  go  to,  and  where  he  does  not  know  the  country. 
For  lack  of  this  I  have  lost  many  a  noble  fish,  as  a  big  fish 
always  has  a  hide,  and  sooner  or  later  remembers  and  runs 
for  it,  when  you  may  wish  him  "  good  day."  Float  and 
tackle  must  be  suited  as  near  as  possible  to  the  weight 
and  rapidity  of  the  stream,  and  the  angler  should  never 
fish  with  it  a  shot  heavier  than  is  necessary,  as  extra 
weight  helps  to  ^frighten  the  fish,  wears  out  the  rod  top, 
and  tires  the  wrist,  for  it  must  be  remembered  that  the 
angler  strikes  many  thousands  of  times  in  the  course  of  a 
day,  and  that  which  is  little  in  itself  becomes  great  by 
repetition.     In  very  quiet,  easy  streams,  where  big  roach 


12  ANGLma. 

and  bream  still  congrejijate,  a  light  quill  or  porcupine  float, 
that  will  only  carry  about  three  or  four  No.  4  shot,  is  ample, 
and  from  this  you  may  go  through  all  grades  up  to  a  cork 
as  big  as  a  small  carrot,  or  a  large  radish,  and  a  dozen  or 
twenty  B  B  shot.  After  this  floats  are  vanity  and  are 
useless,  and  you  must  use  a  ledger. 

Stream  fishing  is,  as  I  have  said,  subdivided  into  fishing 
with  a  travelling  or  tripping  bait,  with  or  without  a  float 
(these  I  have  spoken  of)  and  also  with  a  stationary  one, 
with  or  without  a  float.  The  first  of  these  latter  is  termed 
"tight  corking,"  and  the  latter  ledgering  or  ledger  fishing. 
In  tight  corking  a  good  heavy  float  is  used,  the  line  is  well 
leaded,  and  allowed  to  rest  on  the  bottom,  and  the  float 
therefore  is  set  six  or  eight  inches  or  more  too  deep.  The 
bait  rests  on  the  bottom  kept  in  its  place  by  the  shots,  the 
float  is  held  up  so  that  it  cannot  be  carried  under  water  by 
the  stream,  and  as  soon  as  a  fish  comes  up  and  mumbles 
the  bait  the  float  gives  warning  of  it. 

If  the  angler  likes  it  better,  a  combination  of  ledger 
and  float  can  be  made,  which  is  the  acme  of  tight 
corking  and  one  of  the  most  killing  methods  employed. 
It  is  simply  to  use  a  light  ledger  lead  instead  of  fixed 
shots.  What  the  ledger  is  I  will  now  unfold.  The 
cut  of  the  tackle  may  be  seen  at  Plate  1,  Fig.  1.  A 
bullet  or  a  flat  lead  with  a  clean  round  hole  through 
it  is  the  lead — this  lies  upon  the  bottom.  The  line 
runs  through  it,  and  on  the  hook  side  of  it  at  any  space 
from  two  to  four  feet — I  like  a  good  length,  it  gives 
the  bait  more  play — a  piece  of  wood  or  a  shot  is  fixed  to 
prevent  the  bullet  or  lead  coming  down  on  the  hook. 
Thus  you  can  weigh  the  lead  two  or  three  feet  from  the 
hook  and  bait,  and  it  can  get  no  further.  Now  when  the 
line  lies  free  on  the  ground,  if  anything  touches  the  hook, 


PLATE    I. 


BOTTOM  FISHING.  13 

it  is  felt  at  the  rod  point  as  sharply  if  not  more  so  than  if 
there  were  no  lead,  because  the  line  between  the  lead  and 
rod  is  kept  tight.  When  a  fish  bites  it  is  felt  instantly, 
an  inch  or  two  of  line  is  yielded  him  to  let  him  get  the 
bait  and  hook  well  in  his  mouth,  and  at  about  the  third 
try  you  strike,  smartly  lifting  lead  and  all  in  the  stroke. 
A  light  pistol  bullet  with  a  hole  in  it  is  used  in  tight 
corking.  N.B. — This  is  a  capital  method  of  fishing  for 
carp  in  rivers.  There  is  one  other  way  of  stationary  bait 
fishing,  and  that  is  by  what  is  called  the  clay  ball.  A 
single  hook,  or  sometimes  a  small  triangle  is  used,  or  bit 
of  stick  half  ah  inch  long  tied  on  the  line  a  foot  or  eighteen 
inches  above  the  hook.  The  hook  baited  more  often  than 
not  with  six  or  seven  gentles,  a  bit  of  clay  and  bran  is 
worked  up  as  big  as  an  orange,  a  handful  of  gentles  put 
inside  it,  the  cross  bit  of  wood  in  the  line  buried  in  it,  the 
clay  worked  about  it,  the  line  wound  into  it  once  or  twice 
till  the  hook  bait  only  just  protrudes  from  the  ball  (some 
even  bury  it  in  the  ball,  and  let  the  fish  rout  it  out,  but 
this  is  quite  needless  delay),  and  the  ball  hanging  on  the 
line  is  dropped  to  the  bottom.  The  gentles  wriggle  their 
way  out  of  the  clay.  The  fish  come  up  and  pick  them  off, 
and  in  doing  so  rarely  miss  the  hook.  As  soon  as  a  bite 
is  felt — and  it  is  astonishing  how  distinctly  you  feel 
one — a  strike  sticks  the  hook  in  the  fish  and  shakes  off 
the  clay  ball.  A  cut  of  this  tackle  is  given  in  Plate  1, 
Fig.  2. 

I  have  mentioned  the  method  of  bottom  fishing  pursued 
by  Norfolk  and  Trent  anglers.  The  former  differs  little 
from  that  pursued  by  the  Thames  anglers,  save  in  the 
position  in  which  the  punt  is  moored,  which  is  lengthwise 
with  the  stream.  The  two  anglers  facing  either  bank — a 
plan  which  avoids  the  rough  boil  and  bubble  caused  by 


14  ANGLING. 

the  Thames  plan  of  mooring  across  stream — though  it  is 
quite  possible  that  this  boil  and  bubble  serves  to  hide  the 
angler  from  the  fish,  and  to  make  them  bolder  in  their 
biting — and  this  when  the  water  is  only  five  or  six  feet 
deep  is  certainly  an  advantage.  In  Norfolk,  however,  the 
swims  run  from  ten  to  sixteen  or  more  feet  in  depth,  and 
there  is  no  need  for  any  concealment  at  that  depth.  In 
other  respects,  owing  to  the  depth,  they  use  somewhat 
longer  rods,  and  heavier  tackle  than  would  be  employed 
on  the  Thames,  but  there  is  no  other  peculiarity  in  their 
method.  On  the  Trent  the  system  is  quite  different  from 
that  on  the  Thames.  They  do  not  as  a  rule  fish  short 
swims — only  the  length  of  the  rod  and  line.  If  fishing 
from  a  boat  they  take  very  long  swims.  The  bait — mostly 
worms  or  greaves — is  thrown  in  loose,  not  in  balls ;  the 
depth  plumbed,  and  the  float  set,  so  that  the  bait  may  drag 
the  ground,  and  the  swim  is  commenced.  As  the  float 
travels  onward,  line  is  constantly  paid  off  the  reel,  so  as  to 
give  as  slight  a  check  to  the  tackle  as  need  be  until  the 
bait  has  travelled  down  stream  the  requisite  distance, 
which  may  be  anything,  from  thirty  or  forty  yards  to 
double  that  distance.  Thus  the  hook  bait  is  sure  to 
travel  over  the  greater  portion  of  the  ground  bait,  which 
it  does  not  in  the  restricted  swim  so  often  used  on  the 
Thames,  in  the  which  plan  most  of  the  bait  is  eaten  far 
below  the  swim,  where  the  fish  do  not  have  a  chance  of 
seeing  the  hook,  and  indeed  may  be  thoroughly  gorged 
before  ever  they  are  attracted  within  its  range  at  all.  For 
fish  are  not  drawn  up  from  a  distance  so  quickly  as  some 
folks  suppose.  It  takes  several  nights  steady  baiting  to 
draw  fish  up  from  a  distance  to  some  new  quarters.  Of 
course,  if  they  are  on  or  about  the  spot  in  any  quantity 
already,  it  does  not  take  long  to  get  them  together. 


BOTTOM  FISHING.  15 

Thus  it  will  be  seen  that  the  Nottingham  or  Trent  plan  of 
cavering  sixty  or  even  seventy  yards  of  stream  is  ten  times 
more  captivating  than  the  old  Thames  plan,  and  it  is  now, 
for  barbel,  bream,  and  chub,  commonly  adopted  on  the 
Thames.  The  Trent  tackle  is  peculiar.  The  lines  are  of 
the  finest  Derby  silk,  so  as  to  lie  lightly  on  the  water,  and 
not  to  impede  the  quickness  of  the  strike.  The  reels  turn 
on  a  well  finished  spindle,  and  a  touch  sets  them  twirling 
with  wonderful  rapidity,*  and  though  they  are  very 
suitable  for  the  purpose  for  which  they  are  wanted,  and  in 
-the  hands  of  an  experienced  person  work  perfectly,  yet  in 
the  hands  of  a  tyro  they  are  a  stumbling  block  and  a 
snare  too.  They  overrun,  so  that  every  turn  they  are  set 
running,  the  line  gets  all  into  a  rumble  tumble  and 
tangle.  What  the  young  angler  has  to  learn  is,  while 
holding  the  rod  with  one  hand,  so  that  it  can  be  pressed 
against  the  edge  of  the  reel  at  will,  so  as  to  stop  the 
running  of  the  line  instantly,  with  the  other  hand  by 
regular  and  quick  touches  of  the  little  finger,  to  spin  the 
reel  round  so  as  to  give  off  line  freely  to  the  drag  of  the 
float,  and  at  the  same  time  to  regulate  the  pace.  This  is 
not  easy,  and  nothing  but  practice,  and  a  good  deal  of 
practice,  will  do  it. 

The  casting  of  a  float,  bait,  or  ledger,  to  a  distance 
off  the  reel,  is  not  easy  either.  It  must  be  practised, 
and  a  good  deal  practised  too,  to  accomplish  it  neatly 
and  well.  No  explanation  is  of  any  use;  after  seeing 
it  done,  and  noting  it  as  well  as   he   can,  the  aspirant 

*  Many  anglers  use  these  reels  for  a  variety  of  purposes,  and 
it  is  often  essential  that  they  should  run  yerj  freely  indeed,  and 
at  the  sUghtest  touch.  A  correspondent  in  the  Field  lately 
urged  for  this  purpose  the  necessity  of  having  the  spindle  thin 
and  very  true. 


16  ANGLma. 

must  practise — practise — practise  !  At  first  he  will  be 
dangerous  to  himself  and  everybody  near,  and  instead  of 
his  float  and  hook  landing  on  the  swim  where  he  wants  it, 
it  will  be  more  likely  to  land  in  his  arm,  or  his  ear,  or  eye, 
or  somebody  else's,  where  no  one  wants  it;  but  he  will 
soon  mend,  and  a  week  will  see  him  well  on  the  road  to 
eipertness.  It  is  quite  necessary  to  accomplish  this  well 
to  be  an  expert  bank  fisher  on  the  Trent ;  the  swim,  par- 
ticularly in  barbelling,  often  lying  out  beyond  the  reach  of 
the  rod,  and  requiring  very  neat  and  exact  casting.  To 
fish  a  swim  at  such  a  distance  is  the  acme  of  perfection  and 
skill  in  bank  fishing;  because,  having  once  baited  and 
plumbed  your  swim,  you  must  always  keep  in  the  same 
line  of  country  so  as  to  be  at  the  same  depth,  and  your  float 
must  travel  steadily  down  the  long  swim  (though  bank 
swims  are  not  nearly  as  long,  as  a  rule,  as  boat  swims), 
and  line  must  be  given  out  so  that  there  may  be  no 
lateral  pull  or  wrench  on  the  float,  whereby  it  may  be 
diverted  from  its  proper  course;  and  this  is  not  easy, 
indeed,  with  a  bad  wind  and  a  rainy  day  it  is  almost 
impossible. 

These  swims,  too,  are  often  deep,  and  in  order  to  cast  the 
tackle  a  float  called  a  slider  is  employed.  This  has  a  wire 
loop  at  top  and  bottom,  through  which  the  line  slides  freely. 
The  depth  being  plumbed,  a  bit  of  india-rubber  elastic  is 
tied  on  the  line  at  the  requisite  distance.  This  presents 
sufiEicient  obstruction  to  prevent  the  line  sliding  further  than 
is  reqiiired  through  the  small  eyes  of  the  float,  but  not 
sufficient  to  prevent  its  being  drawn  pretty  easily  through 
the  larger  eye  of  the  rod  point  and  the  rings  thereof. 
Thus,  when  the  tackle  is  lifted  out  of  the  water  the  float 
slides  down  to  the  topmost  shot  or  weight,  and  rests  there. 
When  dropped  in  the  water  it  floats  and  slides  up  the  line 


BOTTOM  FISHINa.  17 

till  the  top  eye  meets  the  rubber,  the  bait  and  shots  sink- 
ing to  the  bottom. 

This  is  the  greatest  modern  invention  in  bottom-fish- 
ing. Holes  of  any  depth,  and  at  any  (reasonable) 
distance  from  the  shore  may  be  fished  with  it,  and 
even  in  slightly  variable  depths  the  float,  with  manage- 
ment, will  do  a  good  deal  to  accommodate  itself  to  the 
various  depths.  A  cut  of  the  slider  is  shown  in  Plate  1, 
Fig.  3.  The  lighter  and  easier  method  of  fishing  from  the 
bank  on  the  Trent  is  called  "  dacing."  I  think  it  by  far 
the  pleasantest  method  of  bank  fishing.  The  rod  and 
tackle  are  lighter  than  in  the  last,  and  the  swim  is  rarely 
more  than  some  twice  the  length  of  the  rod  from  the  shore. 
If  it  is  a  yard  or  two  beyond,  and  is  not  to  be  reached  by 
the  ordinary  swing  of  the  rod — as  the  tackle  is  too  light 
to  cast  it  well  ofE  the  reel,  and  the  line  will  not  hang  loose 
or  lie  on  the  ground  without  kinking,  the  Trent  fisher 
takes  hold  of  the  line  somewhere  up  between  the  third  and 
fourth  rings,  and  enough  line  being  left  to  swing  out  the 
tackle,  as  much  line  is  drawn  off  the  reel  as  can  be  kept 
tight  by  the  left  hand  being  extended  backwards.  The 
swing  being  made,  the  line  is  let  go  by  the  left  hand,  and 
flies  out,  giving  two  or  three  yards  of  extra  length  to  the 
cast,  and  this  may  be  increased  by  taking  the  line  from 
higher  up  the  rod.  For  an  illustration  of  the  method  see 
Plate  1,  Fig.  4.  I  have  mentioned  previously  that  this 
cast  is  very  useful  in  pond  fishing  in  getting  out  more  line 
than  you  could  otherwise  cast.  It  is  useful  also  in  minnow 
spinning  for  trout. 


18  ANGLING. 


CHAPTER  II. 

MID-WATER    FISHING. 

The  second  division  of  fishing  is  that  of  mid- water  fishing, 
and  this  may  be  sub-divided  between  spinning  and  live 
baiting.  Taking  live  baiting  first  as  being  linked  with 
float  fishing ;  this  is  practised  in  two  ways,  with  a  float 
and  without  a  float ;  live  baiting  with  a  float  is  employed 
for  taking  pike,  perch,  and  sometimes  trout.  The  float 
and  weight  of  the  tackle  are  proportioned  to  the  size  of 
the  bait.  When  a  large  bait  is  used  a  heavy  weight  is 
required  to  keep  it  down  in  the  water,  as  the  tendency  of  all 
fish,  when  hooked,  is  to  strike  upwards  towards  the  surface. 
It  is  often  necessary,  when  the  fish  to  be  caught  are  very 
large,  to  use  large  dace  and  roach  of  three  and  four  to  the 
pound  as  baits  ;  and  in  this  case  the  float  is  made  of  cork, 
and  it  is  as  large  as  a  good- sized  Bergamot  pear.  In 
this  style  of  fishing,  which  is  chiefly  for  pike,  one  bait 
will  be  found  enough  ;  and  it  is  desirable  to  have  a  swivel 
between  the  float  and  the  hooks,  in  order  if  the  fish  turns 
round  much  that  he  should  not  twist  and  hang  the  line  up, 
as  often  happens  without  this ;  and  it  is  as  well  to  have 
another  swivel  to  attach  the  tackle  to  the  reel  line,  so  that 
the  reel  or  running  line  may  not  be  entangled  with  the 
tackle.     Also  it  is  desirable  that  the  running  line  should 


MID- WATER  FISHING.  19 

be  kept  as  near  the  surface  as  possible,  so  that  it  may  not 
sink  and  become  caught  in  the  weeds  below,  and  so  check 
the  free  motion  of  the  bait  or  the  run  of  the  fish.  To 
effect  this  fix  a  small  piece  of  cork  on  the  line,  a  yard  or 
two,  if  possible,  above  the  float.  The  bait  must  be  allowed 
to  swim  rather  below  mid-water  unless  the  water  is  very 
deep,  when  it  should  be  placed  nearer  to  the  bottom.  The 
object  is  to  fix  it  so  that  it  may  be  seen  best  over  the 
largest  area  of  the  bottom ;  and  of  course  the  depth  and 
colour  of  the  water  must  be  duly  considered,  as  in  thick 
water,  unless  the  bait  is  put  pretty  close  to  the  fish,  he 
will  not  see  it  at  all. 

For  float  fishing  for  perch,  or  even  trout,  a  lighter 
tackle  and  float  is  used.  That  used  for  trout  must, 
of  course,  be  suited  to  the  size  of  the  trout.  For 
perch  the  tackle  would  be  a  float  equal  to  carrying  a 
couple  of  minnows  which  should  be  set  at  such  a  depth 
that  the  lowest  minnow  shall  clear  the  bottom  by  an  inch 
or  two,  and  the  one  above,  shall  hang  so  as  to  be  about 
from  fourteen  to  eighteen  inches  above  the  bottom.  When 
I  come  to  jack  and  perch  fishing,  I  shall  give  a  closer 
account  of  how  these  tackles  are  to  be  used.  Another 
species  of  live-bait  fishing  is  by  means  of  a  paternoster. 
This  is  simply  a  gimp  or  gut  line,  according  as  it  is  used 
for  pike  or  perch,  with  a  plummet  of  lead  on  the  bottom, 
and  with  two  or  three  hooks  as  the  depth  of  water,  Ac, 
requires,  these  hooks  being  baited  with  a  small  fish — 
minnow,  gudgeon,  dace,  or  what  not.  The  plummet  is 
cast  into  the  water,  and,  sinking  to  the  bottom,  the  line  is 
held  tight,  so  that  the  least  touch  of  a  fish  can  be  felt ; 
and  as  soon  as  it  is  supposed  that  the  fish  has  the  bait  in 
his  mouth,,  the  angler  strikes  sharply.  A  plan  of  a 
paternoster  is  given  in  Plate  1,  Fig.  5.     Occasionally  a  live 

c  2 


20  ANGLING. 

bait  is  put  upon  a  single  hook,  or  a  small  triangle,  and, 
with  two  or  three  shot,  just  enough  to  sink  it  to  mid- 
stream, line  is  paid  out,  and  the  bait  allowed  to  go  where 
it  wilL     This  is  chiefly  done  in  trout  fishing. 

The  next  division  in  mid-water  fishing  is  in  the  arts  of 
spinning  and  trolling.  Spinning  is  practised  thus :  a 
small  fish  is  taken — minnow,  gudgeon,  bleak  or  dace 
chiefly,  and  is  fixed  upon  a  series  of  hooks  called  *'  the 
flight,"  80  that  the  tail  is  slightly  crooked.  These  are 
then  hung  on  to  a  tackle,  divided  in  short  lengths  by  two 
or  more  swivels,  which  is  called  the  trace.  This  is 
weighted  with  lead  to  sink  it  to  mid-water.  The  tackle  is 
then  jerked  to  a  distance  into  the  stream,  and  is  drawn  in 
to  the  shore  or  boat  by  short  draws  of  the  left  hand,  the 
right  holding  the  rod;  and  as  the  bait  comes  shooting 
along  through  the  mid- water,  the  crook  in  the  tail  causes 
it  to  revolve  rapidly,  the  swivels  permitting  it  to  do  so 
easily  without  twisting  up  the  line.  This  attracts  the  fish, 
who  dash  at  the  bait  and  are  caught  by  the  hooks. 
TroUing  or  dead  gorge  fishing  is  a  method  employed 
exclusively  for  pike ;  and  that,  too,  only  when  they  are  in 
large  weed  beds  or  places  so  obstructed  with  rubbish  that 
neither  of  the  other  methods  can  be  employed ;  a  long 
thin  plummet  of  lead  is  used  with  a  twisted  wire  running 
through  it,  to  one  end  of  which  is  a  loop,  and  the 
other  a  pair  of  hooks  opening  di  rersely.  The  loop  end  of 
the  wire  is  then  thrust  into  the  fiah*s  mouth,  down  through 
its  stomach,  and  out  at  the  tail.  The  hooks  stand  out 
pretty  close  on  each  side  of  the  mouth.  The  tail  is  tied 
on  to  the  wire  by  a  lap  or  two  of  silk,  and  the  lead,  <fcc., 
is  concealed  in  the  belly  of  the  bait.  This  is  hung  on  to  a 
tackle  by  a  swivel,  and  is  dropped  here  and  there  into 
the  holes  between  the  weeds,  and  played  up  and  down  by 


MID- WATER  FISHING.  21 

jerks  at  the  rod  point,  and  as  it  sinks,  shooting  to  the 
bottom,  is  now  and  then  seized  by  a  pike,  who  having 
been  allowed  from  five  to  ten  minutes  to  pouch  or  swallow 
the  bait  is  hooked  and  hauled  out  to  the  best  of  the 
fisher's  ability. 


22  ANGUNG. 


^  CHAPTER  III. 

SURFACE   OR  FLY  FISHING. 

Tbi8  is  the  most  skilful  and  artistic  method  of  fishing  of 
any.  It  is  divided  into  fishing  with  the  real,  and  fishing 
with  the  artificial  fly.  In  the  first  method,  a  real  fly,  as  a 
Mayfly,  shorn  fly,  bluebottle,  or  some  other  large  fly,  is 
used  ;  a  fine  hook  is  carefully  passed  through  the  thorax, 
and  the  bait  is  then  dropped  or  cast  on  the  surface  of  the 
water.  In  the  first  case  the  mode  of  working  the  fly  is 
what  is  termed  "  dibbing,"  or  "  daping."  The  angler — 
with  a  line  about  half  the  length  of  the  rod,  and  with  a 
good  long  light  rod,  a  yard  or  so  of  fine  gut,  and  a  hook 
suited  to  his  bait — notes  some  spot  where  a  fish  is  rising, 
and  going  cautiously  behind  any  bush  or  stump  that  will 
shelter  him  from  the  eyes  of  the  fish,  he  protrudes  his  rod 
gently  over  the  water,  and  allows  his  bait  to  fall  on  the 
surface  of  the  water  about  two  or  three  feet,  or  more  if 
need  be,  above  the  fish,  and  lets  the  stream  bear  it  down 
over  the  fish's  head ;  if  the  fish  rises  he  gives  him  just 
two  seconds  to  get  the  bait  or  fly  well  in  his  mouth,  then 
strikes,  not  too  hard,  and  gets  his  fish  out  with  as  little 
disturbance  as  possible.  This  method  of  fishing  is  used 
chiefly  for  trout,  though  it  is  also  employed  for  chub, 
when  a  cockchafer  or  grasshopper,  &c.,  is  used.  The 
great  thing  to  study  is  concealment  from  the  fish.     There 


SURFACE   OR  FLY  FISHING.  23 

is,  however,  another  method  of  daping,  called  "  blow-line 
fishing,"  which  is  employed  in  the  open,  away  from 
bushes.  In  this  case,  of  course,  the  angler  has  to  stand 
at  a  distance  from  the  fish.  To  this  end  a  long  rod  is 
generally  employed,  often  from  eighteen  to  twenty-two 
feet  long.  A  piece  of  line  called  the  blow  line,  and  made 
of  the  lightest  floss  silk,  and  about  twice  the  length  of 
the  rod,  is  employed ;  to  the  lower  end  is  fastened  a  link 
or  two  of  fine  gut,  and  a  light  hook.  The  fly,  usually  a 
Mayfly  (or  even  two),  is  put  on  the  hook,  the  rod  held 
upright,  the  angler  having  his  back  to  the  wind;  as 
soon  as  the  line  is  released  it  is  carried  by  the  wind  away 
from  the  angler;  and  when  well  extended  over  the 
water,  the  fisherman  lowers  the  point  of  the  rod  until 
the  flies  fall  upon  the  surface  of  the  water  some 
distance  away,  where  they  are  allowed  to  drift  naturally 
over  the  fish.  In  this  way  the  angler  can  cover  a  fish 
seventeen  or  eighteen  or  more  yards  away  from  him. 

Then  there  is  the  plan  of  casting  the  natural  fly ;  certainly 
one  of  the  most  artistic  methods  of  employing  a  natural 
bait  at  all,  and  not  easy  to  accomplish  thoroughly.  An 
ordinary  single-handed  fly  rod  and  line  is  used,  with  three 
yards  of  gut  and  a  light  hook ;  one  or  two  flies  are  put 
on,  and  standing  with  his  back  to  the  wind,  and  the  line 
between  his  left  finger  and  thumb,  just  above  the  hook, 
and  as  much  loose  line  waving  in  the  air  as  he  thinks  he 
can  cast ;  the  angler  waves  his  rod  backwards  and  forwards 
once  or  twice  to  swing  the  length  of  line  clear,  and  then, 
making  his  cast,  lets  go  the  hook  and  away  goes  the  bait 
to  its  destination  ;  it  is  allowed  to  go  down  stream  to  the 
full  length  of  the  line,  and  is  then  pulled  up  and  re-cast ; 
when  from  frequent  immersions  the  bait  is  destroyed  or 
the  line  wet  and  heavy,  a  new  bait  must  be  put  on,  or  the 


24  ANGLING. 

line  allowed  a  few  minutes  to  dry.  The  frequent  spoiling 
or  whipping-off  of  baits  is  the  great  objection  to  this 
m^od. 

rHshing  with  the  artificial  fly  is,  perhaps,  the  most 
popular  kind  of  fishing  practised  in  this  kingdom ; 
thousands  of  anglers  never  practise  any  other  kind  of 
fishing.  I  need  hardly  describe  what  an  artificial  fly  is, 
but  for  the  few  who  are  quite  uninitiated  I  may  merely 
say  that  it  is  an  imitation  of  a  fly,  made  of  various 
materials,  chiefly  silks,  fur,  and  feathers,  which  is  fixed 
on  to  a  hook.  This  is  then  cast  to  a  distance  on  the 
surface  of  the  water,  and,  being  drawn  or  carried  by  the 
stream  gently  floating  along,  is  mistaken  by  the  fish  for 
some  live  fly  or  other  insect,  and  the  fish  rises  to  take  it, 
when,  before  he  can  discover  the  cheat,  the  hook  is  twitched 
sharply  into  his  jaw,  and  he  is  translated  speedily  to 
another  element.  A  good  variety  of  fish  are  taken  by  the 
artificial  fly,  chiefly  trout  and  salmon,  and  all  the  other 
species  of  the  salmon,  &c.,  as  sea  trout,  grayling,  and 
charr ;  more  or  less  chub,  and  dace,  and  sometimes  roach, 
perch,  and  pike,  and  even  eels  and  flounders  have  been 
known  to  take  a  fly.  These  are  the  various  methods 
employed  by  the  lawful  brothers  of  the  angle,  in  their 
endeavours  to  capture  the  fish  of  the  British  Islands.  I 
proceed  now  to  deal  with  each  fish  and  its  mode  of  capture 
separately. 


THE  GUDGEON.  25 


CHAPTER  IV. 

THE  GUDGEON  {Oyprinus  Oohio), 

Setting  aside  minnows,  bull-heads,  loaches,  and  stickle- 
backs, and  such  small  game — for  I  have  known  a  treatise 
to  have  been  written  on  the  correct  method  of  capture  of 
the  last  noble  quarry,  and  if  I  remember  aright,  a  pickle 
bottle  played  a  prominent  part  in  the  process.  For  my 
eldest  son,  at  the  tender  age  of  eight,  wrote  a  treatise  on 
the  above  sport,  as  he  styled  it,  for  the  "  Information  of 
his  Young  Friends."  I  repeat,  "  setting  aside "  all 
this,  the  gudgeon  is  usually  the  first  quarry  of  the 
young  angler,  that  is  always  providing  he  lives  where 
they  are  found.  The  gudgeon  is  gregarious,  and  where 
you  catch  one  you  may  catch  others,  sometimes  in  large 
numbers  ;  indeed,  I  have  known  as  many  as  ten  dozen  of 
gudgeons  caught  at  one  pitch.  The  gudgeon  runs  to  six 
or  seven  inches  in  length,  but  seven  inches  is  a  large  one. 
The  largest  I  have  seen  are  (or  rather  were,  for  I  have 
seen  none  of  late  years)  found  in  the  river  Itchen,  in 
Hampshire.  The  bait  which  they  prefer  is  a  small  red 
worm,  or  cockspur,  as  it  is  called  in  Trentshire ;  they  will 
take  a  gentle  or  any  other  small  insect,  but  nothing  is  so 
attractive  to  them  as  a  red  woi*m.  Red  worms  may  be 
found  in  old  leaf  mould  or  vegetable  refuse,  and  it  is  a 


26  ANGLING. 

very  good  plan  to  have  a  heap  of  this  mixed  with  some 
very  rotten  old  manure,  covered  over  with  a  bit  of  carpet 
to  keep  it  moist  in  the  summer.  The  worms  will  soon 
^^preed  in  it,  and  the  angler  can  then  choose  what  he 
requires  from  time  to  time.  They  keep  well  for  a  week  or 
more,  in  a  few  bits  of  old  rag  or  rotten  net,  which  is  the 
best  thing  to  scour  and  cleanse  them  in,  provided  they  are 
kept  fairly  moist  and  in  a  cool  place. 

The  tackle  to  use  for  gudgeon  fishing  is  a  light  taper 
cork  float,  proportioned  to  the  stream,  and  a  yard  or  two  of 
tolerably  fine  gut.  Plumb  the  depth,  and  set  the  float  so  that 
the  bait  shall  just  drag  the  bottom,  the  hook  must  be  a  small 
one,  number  9,  10,  or  11 ;  the  rod,  of  course,  must  depend 
upon  whether  you  are  fishing  from  a  punt  or  from  the 
bank.  The  ordinary  rods  used  for  these  means  will  do, 
and  last,  but  not  least,  the  angler  must  have  a  large  heavy 
iron  rake,  with  a  long  stout  handle,  to  rake  the  bottom 
with.  All  else  being  ready,  the  bottom,  for  a  space  of 
some  two  or  three  square  yards,  is  vigorously  raked,  so  as 
to  disturb  the  sand  and  earthy  particles,  and  to  send  them 
down  stream  in  a  cloud.  This  attracts  the  gudgeon,  who 
expect  to  find  fresh  food  in  the  freshly  turned  up  gravel, 
and  they  flock  to  the  spot  from  some  distance  down. 
Then,  the  raking  finished,  the  angler  drops  in  his  tackle, 
and  if  the  gudgeon  are  there,  and  are  feeding,  his  float 
will  not  move  a  yard  before  it  will  bob  down  with  a  dash 
that  there  is  no  mistaking.  A  quick  short  stroke  and  a 
brief  pull  will  bring  the  little  brown  fellow  wriggling  to 
the  top,  when  a  touch  at  the  bait  to  re-settle  it  on  the  hook 
is  all  that  is  required,  for  the  same  bait  will  often  take  six 
or  seven  or  more  fish  before  it  is  worn  out.  When  the  fish 
begin  to  grow  tired  of  biting,  another  turn  of  the  rake 
may  bring  them  on  afresh  for  a  short  time,  and  even  a 


THE   POPE   OR  RUFFE.  27 

third  rake  will  sometimes,  when  they  are  plentiful,  pay 
fairly ;  but  it  is  seldom  that  two  rakings  do  not  suffice  to 
bring  to  hook  all  that  mean  to  bite.  Perch  often  come 
into  the  swim,  and  are  taken  when  gudgeon  fishing. 
Indeed,  should  the  presence  of  a  perch  be  suspected,  by 
reason  of  a  sudden  cessation  of  biting,  it  is  as  well  to  put 
on  a  larger  worm,  or  to  have  a  paternoster  with  a  minnow 
on  handy,  so  as  to  get  rid  of  Mr.  Perch,  who  sadly  disturbs 
the  equanimity  of  your  clients.  Dace,  too,  are  often 
taken  in  the  gudgeon  swim,  and  indeed  this  method  of 
fishing  is  often  used  purely  for  dace ;  in  the  same  swim 
with  the  gudgeon,  too,  is  often  captured  the  Pope. 

THE  POPE  OR  RUFFE  (Perca  cemiui). 

If  there  be  a  deepish  still  eddy  by  the  side  of  your 
gudgeon  swim,  and  a  bank  or  bough  beside  it,  there  you 
will  probably  (in  the  River  Thames,  at  least)  find  good 
store  of  popes.  Like  his  great  namesake,  the  Pope,  "  he 
leads  a  happy  life."  The  angler  does  not  often  trouble 
him,  for  he  is  of  little  value ;  and  if  caught  by  accident 
he  usually  gets  turned  back  again.  Netsmen  will  not  be 
troubled  with  him  either,  as  he  fetches  nothing  either  as  a 
live  bait  or  for  edible  purposes,  though  the  small  amount 
of  flesh  on  the  Pope  is  very  sweet  and  wholesome,  and  like 
that  of  the  gudgeon.  It  is  a  curious  little  fish,  and 
though  so  little  sought  for  does  not  seem  to  increase 
much  ;  indeed,  in  the  Thames,  I  doubt  if  it  has  not,  of 
late  years,  diminished.  It  lives  exceedingly  well  in  small 
ponds.  I  have  had  one  in  a  bait  pond  for  above  a  twelve- 
month, and  it  has  grown  considerably ;  and,  let  who  will 
starve,  he  is  always  fat  and  hearty.  Pope  are  not  common 
in  English  rivers,  and  not  a  great  deal  is  known  of  them. 


88  ANGLING. 

They  are  said  to  have  been  first  discovered  by  Dr.  Caius, 
the  founder  of  Gains  College. 

THE   BLEAK    {Gyprinus  albumus). 

This  lively  silvery  little  fish  is  the  exemplification  in 
fish  life  of  perpetual  motion,  for  he  is  never  still,  darting 
hither  and  thither,  snatching  at  any  floating  trifle  that 
seems  to  promise  food  ;  his  activity  is  incessant.  Throw 
on  the  water  a  bit  of  bread,  and,  before  it  has  floated 
fifty  yards,  if  there  be  bleak  about,  it  will  be  surrounded 
by  a  perfect  shoal  of  them,  all  struggling  and  jostling 
to  get  a  crumb  of  the  desired  morsel.  The  embouchure 
of  a  drain  is  a  favourite  hunting-ground  for  them ;  there 
they  may  be  seen  in  shoals,  darting  through  the  filth  and 
capturing  the  atoms  that  pass  down.  They  will  take 
worm,  gentle,  or  fly  freely,  either  on  the  bottom,  in  mid- 
water,  or  on  the  surface,  and  the  best  way  to  catch  them, 
perhaps,  is  by  whipping  with  a  single  gentle.  They  are 
by  no  means  bad  eating,  cooked  like  sprats,  and  formerly 
the  nacre  was  collected  from  their  scales,  and  fetched  a 
good  price  for  silvering  various  objects,  particularly 
artificial  pearls.  It  has  been  often  a  matter  of  question 
what  becomes  of  the  bleak  in  the  winter,  as  they  are 
hardly  ever  met  with  then. 

THE   ROACH    {Gyprinus  rutilus). 

The  roach  was  years  ago,  when  roach  fishers  were 
nothing  like  as  numerous  as  they  are  now,  called  "  the  river 
sheep,"  because  he  was  so  unsuspicious  and  so  easily 
caught ;  but  now  he  by  no  means  deserves  so  simple  a 
character;  where  he  is  seldom  fished  for,  he  may  be 
correspondingly   incautious,  but  a  big  roach  in  a  fairly 


THE   ROACH.  29 

fished  stream  is  a  mighty  wary  fellow ;  and  though  they 
may  abound,  you  may  tempt  them  in  vain,  and  even  when 
they  are  hungry  and  are  feeding,  and  the  water  is  coloured 
by  rain,  the  finest  tackle  is  required  to  make  a  good  take 
of  them.  The  roach  is  a  great  vegetarian,  and  feeds 
largely  on  water  plants ;  and  while  the  weeds  are  in  a 
flourishing  state  during  the  summer,  it  is  difficult  to  get 
the  larger  roach  to  come  out  and  feed  freely  on  other 
matters ;  but  when  the  winter  frosts  have  rolled  away  the 
weeds,  and  made  them  sour  and  inedible,  the  big  roach 
come  out,  and,  if  the  water  be  in  good  condition,  feed 
fairly,  and  then  is  the  roach  fisher's  paradise  ;  and  in  the 
metropolitan  and  midland  districts,  there  are  more  large 
roach  killed  in  February,  March,  and  even  part  of  April, 
than  during  any  other  month. 

As  a  rule  on  the  Thames,  and  in  waters  which  adopt 
the  Thames  rules,  roach  fishing,  with  all  other  bottom 
fishing,  is  closed  to  the  angler  on  the  15th  of  March ; 
but  throughout  March  they  are,  as  I  can  testify,  m 
the  very  prime  and  height  of  tip- top  condition;  a 
March  roach  of  a  pound,  from  a  good  gravelly  bottom, 
is,  barring  the  bones,  as  good  a  fish  as  need  be  cooked ; 
they  do  not  spawn  till  the  middle  or  latter  end  of  May,  so 
that  even  fishing  out  March,  they  have  still  six  weeks  at 
least  before  they  commence  spawning ;  which  is  more  than 
enough  protection  in  all  conscience,  particularly  as  the 
best  of  them  do  not  come  out  of  the  weeds,  as  a  rule, 
much  before  January.  There  are  thousands  of  big  roaches 
in  the  Thames  which  probably  never  see  an  angler's  line  ; 
while  in  the  weeds,  if  a  clear  space  can  be  found,  a  few 
may  be  taken  with  silk  weed,  that  is  the  long,  slimy,  silky 
looking  weed,  which  is  found  on  the  bottom.  A  lump  of 
this  being  wrapped  on  the  hook,  as  I  am  told  (for  I  never 


80  ANGLING. 

tried  it),  attracts  the  fish,  and  good  takes  have  often  been 
made  with  it.  The  best  baits  for  roach  are,  during  the 
summer,  gentles,  with  a  change  to  red  worm  or  greaves 
(in  Trentshire,  "  scratchings,*')  which  may  be  used,  but  in 
the  winter  either  paste  or  pearl  barley  carries  the  palm,  or 
a  little  bit  of  the  brown  of  a  crusty  loaf.  These  are  the 
best  baits,  but  there  are  a  great  variety  of  others  :  insects 
various,  as  ant  flies,  or  eggs,  caddis-bait,  blood  worms, 
boiled-wheat  and  barley,  green-wheat,  and  many  other 
matters.  The  best  ground  bait  for  roach  is  that  used  by 
the  great  majority  of  the  Thames  fishermen,  and  this  in 
the  summer  consists  of  bran  and  carrion  gentles  mixed  up 
with  clay  into  balls ;  and  when  the  summer  is  past  and 
carrion  gentles  cannot  be  obtained,  scalded  bread,  bran, 
and  boiled  rice,  mixed  up  either  with  clay  or  by  itself, 
forms  by  far  the  best  ground  bait.  If  no  clay  is  used,  a 
small  stone  (as  big  as  a  walnut)  should  be  inclosed  in  the 
ball  to  make  it  sink. 

Here  is  the  very  best  recipe  for  ground  bait  I  know — 
it  is  my  own.  Get  a  big  pudding  basin  and  fill  it 
two-thirds  full  of  old  crusts,  as  stale  as  you  please,  fill  up 
with  boiling  water,  and  stand  a  plate  over  it,  to  let  it  soak 
for  a  quarter  of  an  hour.  Take  a  breakfast  cup  of  broken 
rice  and  boil  that,  get  about  two-thirds  of  a  peck  of  bran, 
put  into  it  about  a  quart  of  barley  meal,  and  well  mix. 
Then  squeeze  out  most  of  the  water  from  the  soaked  bread 
and  stir  that  in,  pour  the  liquor  off  the  rice  and  stir  that 
in  also,  and  work  it  all  up  together,  adding  a  little  of  the 
rice  liquor  now  and  then  if  it  is  too  dry.  Then,  when  of 
the  right  consistency,  work  it  up  into  balls  of  the  size  of 
moderate  apples  with  a  stone  in  the  middle.  If  it  is  too 
dry  it  won't  adhere  well.  If  too  wet  it  breaks  up  in  the 
water.     It   should  be   tough   and   consistent.     This   will 


THE   EOACH.  31 

make  about  twenty  or  more  balls — enough  for  one  day's 
fishing.  It  is  the  best  ground  bait  ever  made.  Take  care 
the  materials  are  sweet  and  fresh,  and  don't  keep  it  more 
than  forty-eight  hours  or  it  will  turn  sour  and  drive  the 
fish  away.  Some  people  use  brewers*  grains,  bullocks* 
blood,  and  a  host  of  similar  matter. 

One  thing  should  always  be  observed  carefully,  viz., 
having  got  your  fish  together,  be  very  careful  not  to 
overbait  or  overfeed  them,  or  the  fish  will  soon  get 
gorged  and  refuse  the  hook.  This  is  a  great  fault 
with  many  of  the  Thames  puntsmen  :  they  will  throw 
in  ground  bait  enough  in  one  day  to  last  for  four 
if  the  fish  are  feeding,  and  many  a  promising  day  is 
thus  destroyed ;  a  little  now  and  then,  just  enough  to 
attract  attention  and  to  keep  the  fish  on  the  look  out  is  all 
that  is  needed.  The  skilful  angler  knows  that  his  object 
is  to  keep  the  fish  on  the  watch  and  eager  for  the  hook, 
not  to  fill  their  bellies  and  make  them  capricious  and 
dainty. 

There  is  a  method  of  ground  baiting  which,  in  low 
clear  water,  is  sometimes  very  effective,  and  not  only 
for  roach,  but  for  bream  and  other  fish,  and  that  is  termed 
"  blowing  the  trumpet " — a  long  tube  of  zinc  is  used  deep 
enough  to  reach  the  bottom  of  the  water.  This  is  sunk 
and  fixed  to  the  side  of  the  boat  or  punt.  The  upper  end 
has  a  bell  or  trumpet  shaped  mouth,  in  fact  it  is  a  long- 
spouted  funnel.  A  large  tub  of  mud  or  clay  and  water, 
with  bran,  &c.,  and  sometimes  blood  and  any  debris  that 
can  be  easily  got  and  will  attract  roach,  is  then  mixed  all 
up  together  until  it  becomes  a  slush.  A  pint  or  two  of 
this  from  time  to  time  is  thrown  into  the  bell  of  the  funnel 
and  emits  a  stream  of  mud  at  the  bottom  of  the  water, 
which    discolours    the    water    and    much    atti-acts    the 


82  ANGLING. 

fish.  The  angler,  of  course,  fishes  as  much  as  he  can  in 
the  clouded  stream  that  issues  from  the  fissure,  and  I  have 
heard  of  capital  takes  made  in  conjunction  with  this 
apparatus.  On  the  Trent  the  red  worm  (called  there  the 
cockspur)  is  held  to  be  the  best  bait ;  but  the  Trent  fishers, 
though  the  best  barbel  fishers  perhaps  in  the  world,  are 
not  equal  to  the  cockneys  at  the  roach.  The  bank  fisher 
for  roach  often  employs  what  is  called  a  "  Lea  "  rod,  that 
is  a  light  cane  rod  some  20ft.  or  22ft.  long  or  even  more. 
With  this  rod  no  reel  is  used,  and  only  enough  line  to 
allow  a  couple  of  feet  or  so  above  the  float.  When  the 
angler  hooks  a  good  fish  the  long  rod  enables  him  to 
follow  its  movements  about  over  a  good  deal  of  ground  ; 
and,  as  the  fish  tires  he  gradually  pulls  off  and  drops 
joint  after  joint  on  the  ground  until  only  three  or  four 
joints  are  left,  a  process  which  brings  the  fish  at  last 
within  reach  of  the  landing  net. 

In  punt  fishing,  of  course,  the  usual  lift,  or  12ft. 
light  cane  rod  is  used.  Some  people  use  a  rather 
longer  rod  in  order  to  give  an  extra  yard  or  so  of  swim, 
but  a  very  slight  increase  in  the  length  of  the  rod  tells 
most  heavily  on  the  muscles  of  the  arm  and  hand  in 
the  course  of  a  long  day's  fishing.  The  Trent  fishers 
use  a  light  12ft.  rod,  not  quite  so  stiff  as  our  punt  rods, 
with  upright  rings,  and  with  this,  which  is  called  a 
"  dacing  rod,"  and  with  a  light  Derby  twist  line  they  pull 
the  line  back  from  between  two  of  the  upper  rings  by  the 
left  hand,  and  holding  it  as  far  back  from  the  rod  as  c(5n- 
venient,  with  a  gentle  swing  and  by  releasing  the  line  so 
held  simultaneously,  they  can  cast  their  bait  and  float  out 
into  the  stream  at  any  reasonable  distance  from  the  shore ; 
the  light  line  lies  on  the  surface  of  the  water,  and  although 
there  may  be  15ft.  of  line  out  it  does  not  swell  or  hang, 


THE   EOACH.  33 

and  the  stroke  on  the  float  is  instantaneous  and  free. 
Thus  they  obviate  the  necessity  of  using  those  long  Lea 
rods,  which  are  cumbrous  in  the  extreme,  and  require  two 
hands  to  hold  them.  But  it  is  also  certain  that  they  can- 
not strike  so  accurately,  and  thus  lose  more  fish  and  bites. 
But,  whatever  rod  or  style  the  angler  adopts,  this  tackle 
must  be  of  the  lightest  and  neatest;  you  cannot  have  it 
too  fine  for  roach  fishing,  and  I  quite  agree  with  the  Rev. 
James  Martin — whose  "  Angler's  Guide,"  published  in 
1854,  contains  the  best  directions  as  regards  roach  fishing 
ever  published — that  you  cannot  be  too  nice  or  particular 
on  this  head.  Over  and  over  again  have  I  seen  single  hair 
beat  the  finest  and  most  delicately  stained  gut;  and 
though  at  one  time  I  was  rather  sceptical  on  this  point,  I 
am  now  a  complete  believer  that  the  finer  the  tackle  you 
can  conveniently  use  the  better,  and  that  nothing  goes 
down  so  well  with  shy  roach  as  single  hair.  You  must 
keep  yourself  out  of  sight,  too,  as  well  as  your  tackle. 
You  need  not  get  behind  a  tree,  but  it  is  as  well  to  have 
one  at  your  back  when  you  are  fishing  from  a  bank.  I 
have  often  noticed  the  difference  evinced  by  the  move- 
ments of  the  fish  when  the  angler  was  visible  from  the 
bank  and  when  he  could  put  himself  in  front  of  a  tree,  and 
the  difference  would  scarcely  be  credited. 

I  have  running  through  my  field  one  of  the  finest 
roach  rivers  within  fifty  miles  of  London,  and  where 
the  roach  are  unusually  fine  and  good.  I  have  fished 
at  all  times  of  the  year,  and  under  all  kinds  of  cir- 
cumstances for  years,  and  have  full  experience  of  what 
I  state.  In  coloured  water,  of  course,  less  caution  is 
necessary,  though  even  then  fine  tackle  will  tell  on  the ' 
catch,  but  in  clear  water,  unless  you  can  keep  out  of 
sight,  you  will  not  catch  a  fish,  and  at  the  best  you  will 

D 


34  ANGLING. 

not  catch  many.  The  size  of  the  hook  must  be  ref- 
lated by  the  bait  you  use.  A  somewhat  larger  hook  may 
be  used  for  paste  than  is  used  for  geutles  or  worm.  Some 
anglers  like  hooks  with  very  short  shanks,  but  I  do  not 
think  it  a  good  plan,  as  they  do  not  strike  truly,  they  ai-e 
more  apt  to  spring,  and  many  fish  are  lost  by  them.  When 
the  roach  are  biting  shyly,  a  small  hook  with  one  gentle 
will  often  do  better  than  a  larger  one  with  two. 

Boach  vary  a  good  deal  in  their  method  of  feeding.  Sonie- 
times  the  float  dabs  down  with  a  sharp  pluck.  I  do  not 
like  to  see  that,  for  either  the  fish  are  small,  and  when  the 
small  fish  are  "on"  the  big  ones  are  not,  or  they  are  rather 
more  sporting  than  feeding.  Sometimes  they  niggle  at  the 
bait,  and  the  float  goes  "  tip,  tip,  tip,"  just  dipping  to  the 
surface  with  short  sharp  jerks.  That  is  not  a  good  sign 
either,  as  you  have  to  wait  till  the  float  goes  under,  and 
▼eiy  often  it  does  not.  But  when  you  see  the  float  sink 
down  steadily  and  gravely  in  a  way  that  there  is  no  mis- 
taking, then  be  sure  that  the  big  ones  are  at  work  and  the 
fish  are  well  on  ;  and  if  there  are  plenty  of  them,  and  you 
do  not  overfeed  them,  and  no  change  comes  over  the 
weather,  happy  fellow,  you  are  in  for  a  good  day.  Then 
waste  no  time,  ground  bait  sparingly,  and  conduct  your- 
self quietly.  As  soon  as  you  have  hooked  a  good  fish  get 
him  down  out  of  the  swim  as  soon  as  you  can,  and  with  as 
little  noise  or  splashing  as  possible. 

The  best  floats  for  light  work  are  straight  porcupine 
quills.  Some  people  like  those  jointed  quill  floats ;  I 
do  not,  they  are  apt  to  get  out  of  order  and  take  in 
water  just  when  you  don't  want  them  to.  A  very 
thin  cork  case  may  be  set  upon  the  porcupine  if  a 
heavier  float  is  wanted.  The  bait  should  be  as  near  as 
possible  to  the  bottom  without  hanging.     The   running 


THE   EUDD— THE   DACE.  35 

line  should  be  as  fine  as  need  be.  I  have  seen  some 
of  these  fine  silk-dressed  lines,  which  are  perfect  if 
the  dressing  does  not,  as  it  too  often  does,  weaken  the  line 
too  much.  Keep  as  little  of  the  running  line  in  the  water 
as  possible  when  fishing,  so  that  the  strike  may  come  as 
directly  as  possible  on  the  float ;  play  your  fish  lightly  but 
firmly,  and  always  use  the  landing  net  to  a  pretty  good 
fish.  In  coloured  water  tight  corking  is  often  a  capital 
method  for  the  roach.  Beyond  aU  be  quiet  and  unobtru- 
sive, and  likewise  patient. 

THE  RUDD  {Cyprinus  eryophthalmus). 
This  fish  is  often  confounded  with  the  roach,  but  it 
differs  in  several  particulars.  The  dorsal  fin  is  further 
back  in  the  rudd,  while  the  upper  lip  is  more  prominent  in 
the  roach,  the  roach  being  over  and  the  rudd  underhung. 
It  is,  as  a  rule,  too,  thicker  and  deeper,  and  is  of  rather  a 
more  olive  colour,  and  it  grows  to  a  much  larger  size, 
roach  rarely  reaching  2^1b.,  while  rudd  sometimes  run  up 
towards  41b.  Rudd  are  sometimes  caught  in  the  Thames. 
In  Osterly  Park  and  Hatfield  they  are  abundant.  In 
Slapton  Ley  they  reach  a  large  size,  and  in  Norfolk  they 
are  plentiful.  They  take  much  the  same  baits  as  the 
roach,  and  may  be  fished  for  in  the  same  way.  They  take 
a  fly  well  in  Slapton  Ley.  They  are  very  good  table  fish 
it  is  said,  though  I  have  never  eaten  them. 

THE  DACE  (Gyprinua  leuciscus). 
This  pretty  fish  may  be  often  found  in  the  same  streams 
and  caught  in  the  same  swims  with  roach ;  nevertheless,  as 
a  rule,  they  prefer  somewhat  sharper  and  shallower 
streams,  feeding,  as  they  do,  more  upon  the  surface.  The 
dace  is  frequently  found  in  trout  streams ;  indeed,  there 

D  2 


36  ANGLING. 

are  few  trout  streams  where  they  are  not  more  or  less 
found.  In  such  places  they  are  decidedly  a  nuisance,  and  . 
it  is  desirable  that  they  should  be  kept  down  by  the  net  as 
much  as  possible,  or  in  time  they  will  interfere  with  the 
trout.  On  the  Thames  and  its  tributaries  in  suitable 
places  dace  take  the  fly  well  at  times,  and  in  a  good  day 
the  angler  may  capture  several  dozen  of  them.  They 
require  quick  striking,  however ;  indeed,  many  of  the  most 
successful  fly  fishers  for  dace  keep  on  casting  quickly,  and 
strike  every  time  whether  they  see  a  rise  or  no,  allowing 
the  fly  to  dwell  but  a  short  time  on  the  water ;  for  they 
take  and  reject  the  fly  very  quickly,  and  have  a  nasty  habit 
of  following  the  fly  without  taking  it.  It  is  a  common 
practice  to  tip  the  fly  with  a  natural  gentle  or  a  bit  of  thin 
under-rind  of  bacon,  or  even  a  scrap  of  washleather  to 
make  the  fish  take  a  better  hold.  Although  the  fly  should 
be  small,  it  is  as  well  to  have  a  pretty  good-sized  hook,  as 
ihey  contrive  to  get  off  very  often.  Any  small  bright,  red, 
black,  blue,  or  yellow  fly  does,  and  a  couple  of  turns 
of  tinsel  improves  it. 

For  float  fishing  much  the  same  plan  must  be  pursued 
as  is  used  for  roach,  though  in  the  summer  a  shallower  and 
sharper  stream  will  often  be  found  desirable.  The  dace, 
too,  has  less  liking  for  paste  and  farinaceous  baits  than  the 
roach,  preferring  first  the  red  worm,  and  next  the  gentle. 
They  bite  rather  quicker  than  the  roach,  and  require 
quicker  striking.  They  rarely  run  above  Jib.  in  the 
Thames,  though  in  some  of  its  tributaries — as  the  Colne 
and  elsewhere — they  reach  fib.,  and  sometimes  close  on 
lib.,  and  in  the  Kennet  over  lib.  The  best  take  I  ever 
had  on  the  Thames  was  thirteen  fish  that  weighed 
71b.,  and  this  was  after  my  companion  had  had  his  pick  of 
the  take.   They  were  taken  with  lob  worm  when  barbelling 


THE  CHUB.  37 

at  Eiclimond.  There  are  large  dace  in  some  of  the 
southern  rivers;  and  I  shall  never  forget  my  dismay, 
many  years  since  at  Downton,  on  the  Avon,  when  a  keeper 
promised  to  get  me  a  pailfuL  of  dace  for  jack  bait  for 
spinning,  when  he  brought  me  a  lot  with  scarcely  a  fish 
under  haK  a  pound  ;  one  would  have  needed  to  substitute 
a  punt  pole  for  a  rod  to  be  able  to  cast  and  work  them 
properly.  They  are  very  good  for  the  table  if  fried  nicely  and 
crisply,  with  a  squeeze  of  lemon  and  cayenne  over  them, 
or  marinaded.  To  do  this  they  should  be  cleaned,  then 
trimmed,  and  placed  in  layers  in  an  open  baking  dish  ;  boil 
some  vinegar,  with  salt,  mace,  and  pepper  in  it,  and  a  few 
bay  leaves,  and  pour  it  over  the  fish  ;  then  bake  for  a 
short  time,  and  in  two  days  you  will  be  able  to  eat 
them,  bones  and  all,  without  difficulty,  and  they  are 
piquant. 

THE   CHUB  {Gyprinus  cephalus). 

The  logger-headed  chub,  called  by  the  French  un  mllairif 
because  he  is  not  good  for  the  table,  though  when  up  the 
river  and  short  of  provisions  one  may  do  a  deal  worse  than 
eat  a  fresh-killed  chub.  The  chub,  I  think,  first  opened 
to  me  the  magic  realms  of  piscatory  literature  at  a  very 
early  age.  Who  does  not  recollect  that  chub  with  the  white 
spot  on  his  tail  in  Walton,  and  with  which  he  purchased 
the  milkmaid's  song  ?  Little  thought  the  modest  kindly 
old  man  how  future  ages  would  reverence  that  little  brown 
book  of  his,  and  that  what  he  then  sold  for  Is.  6d. 
might  in  course  of  time  come  to  be  sold  for  from  101.  to 
201.  sterling.  But  to  return  to  chub :  the  chub  is  a 
handsome-shaped,  gallant-looking  fish ;  and  a  basket  such 
as  I  saw  lately,  of  eight  weighing  from  21b.  to  41b.  each, 
all  caught  with  the  fly,  forms  a  very  satisfactory  after- 


38  ANGLING. 

noon's  chnbbing,  because  it  argues  many  smaller  ones 
turned  back  again  to  grow.  I  never  take,  or  at  least  keep, 
a  chub  under  lib.,  and  more  often,  if  the  fish  are  running 
well,  not  under  IJlb.  They  are  very  little  use,  though  on 
the  upper  parts  of  the  Thames  the  people  gladly  buy 
them  at  fourpence  a  pound,  coast  fish  not  often  reaching 
them. 

Chub  may  be  taken  in  various  ways — they  will  take 
either  float  or  ledger  freely,  they  take  the  fly  greedily,  and 
at  times  both  live  and  spinning  bait,  though  these  latter 
are  not  always  certain.  When  roach  fishing  in  a  punt  you 
will  often  get  hold  of  a  few  chub  quite  at  the  end  of  the 
swim ;  and  if  you  let  out  a  few  more  yards,  and  make  a 
somewhat  longer  swim,  you  will  often  pick  up  a  chub  or 
two  when  barbel  fishing,  both  with  float  and  with  ledger ; 
the  chub  are  nearly  sure  to  be  handy  to  the  swim  in  larger 
or  smaller  numbers.  Though  a  shy  fish,  there  are  few 
bolder  biting  fish  than  the  chub,  when  it  does  bite,  and 
whether  it  be  at  bait,  fly,  or  fish,  he  lets  you  know  that  he 
is  at  the  hook  unmistakably.  At  the  fly  he  makes  a  rush 
and  a  dash  which  you  cannot  fail  to  see  and  hear  too ;  and 
when  he  does  get  the  lure  within  his  big  leathern  chops 
he  holds  on,  and  is  easily  hooked,  and,  imless  he  gets  to 
weeds,  does  not  easily  get  away.  The  first  rush  or  two  of 
big  chub  is  very  fierce  and  determined,  but  he  does  not 
make  so  long  a  resistance  as  the  barbel. 

If  the  angler  desires  to  fish  specially  for  chub  with 
a  float,  the  best  way  is  to  plumb  the  hook  to  about 
two-thirds  of  the  general  depth  of  the  stream,  and  to 
fish  with  a  travelling  float  tripping  just  outside  the 
boughs  where  chub  are  supposed  to  be,  and  casting 
in  an  old  fragment  or  two  of  bait  every  now  and  then 
to  attract  the  chub^  and  draw  them  from  their  holes. 


THE  CHFB.  39 

Large  takes  of  chub  are  made  thus: — In  Nottingham, 
bullock's  brains  and  pith  are  fished  with;  the  pith  is 
simply  the  spinal  marrow,  this  is  used  for  the  hook. 
Cut  the  outer  rind  off  with  a  sharp  pointed  pair  of 
scissors,  and  wash  the  contents  carefully;  some  recom- 
mend it  to  be  scalded.  Some  not.  The  angler  can  try 
both  and  please  himself.  A  pipe  of  it  about  an  inch  long 
does  for  one  bait.  It  is  very  tender,  and  needs  some  pains 
to  fix  it  on  the  hook.  The  brains  should  be  scalded,  a  few 
fragments  being  thrown  in  from  time  to  time,  and  allowed 
to  drift  past  the  bushes  along  which  the  angler  may  be 
fishing.  It  is  a  very  taking  bait,  and  chub  are  very  fond 
of  it  in  mid-winter,  when  it  is  chiefly  used.  There  are 
many  other  baits,  as  cheese  cut  into  square  bits  of  goose- 
berry size,  rotten  cheese  and  suet  beaten  to  a  stiff  paste. 
Greaves,  and  even  worms  or  wasp  grubs,  answer  nearly  as 
well,  and  the  tail  of  the  fresh-water  crawfish  boiled  is  a 
choicely  good  bait  for  "  big  uns." 

The  chub  is  very  carnivorous,  and  will  eat  a  variety 
of  things,  and  beetles,  grasshoppers,  cockchafers,  humble 
bees,  &c.,  do  well  for  dibbing  or  daping;  or  a  very 
small  live  frog,  only  a  bit  of  the  skin  of  the  back 
being  taken  on  the  hook  so  as  to  preserve  his  life 
without  injury,  is  a  capital  lure.  Chub  holes  or  bushes 
are  generally  pretty  well  known,  and  the  angler,  in 
getting  to  ore  to  dape,  must  keep  out  of  sight,  and 
make  as  little  motion  with  his  rod  point  as  possible, 
moving  it  slowly  and  circumspectly;  for,  though  the  fish 
bites  boldly  when  not  frightened,  he  is  easily  alarmed, 
and  you  rarely  catch  more  than  two,  or  at  the  outside 
three,  chub  out  of  the  same  hole,  without  giving  the  others 
twenty  minutes'  rest  to  recover.  The  hook  used,  both  for 
float  fishing  and  dapiug,  should  be  suited  to  the  bait  and 


40  ANGLING. 

the  size  of  the  fish,  but  a  No.  6  will  usually  be  small 
enough.  In  fly-fishing  for  chub  you  may  use  artificial 
beetles,  humble  bees,  wasps,  chafers,  &c.,  &c.,  &c.  The 
flies  used  are  chiefly  palmers,*  red,  black,  and  green  of 
large  size,  with  peacock  herl,  black  or  yellow  bodies,  and 
with  a  silrer  twist  on  the  bodies ;  and,  if  a  bit  of  wash- 
leather  is  used  as  a  tail  it  is  more  attractive,  while  if  you 
can  keep  three  or  four  gentles  on  the  bend  of  the  hook  it 
adds  greatly  to  the  value  of  the  fly.  I  have  found  a  silver 
tinsel  body,  with  brown  turkey  wing,  and  a  furnace  hackle 
kill  well.  A  sandy  red  palmer  with  a  yellow  orange  body 
kills  well,  too ;  all  the  flies  should  be  of  grilse  size,  or 
even  small  salmon  size. 

A  strong  rod  is  wanted  to  fly-fish  for  chub,  as  the 
sport  is  chiefly  pursued  under  boughs,  among  stumps 
and  roots,  and  in  holes  among  rushes  where  weeds 
abound,  and  if  you  get  hold  of  a  41b.  chub,  as  you  some- 
times do,  it  wants  a  strong  rod  and  strong  tackle  to 
prevent  him  from  getting  into  the  weeds  or  roots.  I 
always  use  a  grilse  rod  and  grilse  tackle;  that  is,  a 
double-handed  rod  of  about  fifteen  or  fifteen-and-a-half 
feet,  and  No.  2  salmon  gut ;  and  I  hardly  ever  remember 
losing  a  fish  by  hanging  up  in  weeds ;  whereas,  I  have 
heard  of  persons  losing  them  by  the  dozen  with  single- 
handed  tackle,  and  they  are  always  the  largest  fish. 
Another  thing,  too,  is,  if  you  get  hung  in  a  flag  or  rush, 
you  can  break  it  without  going  in  with  the  boat  and 
spoiling  the  cast.  In  casting  under  the  boughs  it  wants  a 
capital  sculler,  one  who  is  an  adept  at  whipping  the 
boughs  himself,  and  who  knows  just  where  the  fisher 
wants  the  boat  put  without  telling.     It  does  not  require 

*  For  how  to  dress  a  palmer,  see  "  red  palmer  "  or  "  hackle  " 
in  "  Trout  Flies." 


THE   BAEBEL.  41 

any  light  casting  for  chub  ;  the  bigger  and  louder  flop  the 
fly  makes  on  the  water,  the  more  certain  it  is  to  attract 
the  notice  of  the  chub  ;  but  it  is  desirable  to  cast  as  close 
in  under  the  boughs  as  possible,  and  to  do  this  habitually 
without  getting  hung  up  requires  skill  and  judgment.  If 
you  do  get  hung  up,  always  try  mild  measures  first,  as 
persuasion  really  is  better  than  force^  and  often  saves  a 
breakage,  or  much  trouble.  Of  all  the  artificial  flies,  &c., 
I  find  nothing  do  so  well  as  the  artificial  cockchafer.  It 
will  cast  to  any  reasonable  distance,  and  is  hugely  fancied 
by  chub,  as  there  are  very  few  that  will  not  move  at  it ; 
and,  to  insure  their  taking  it,  put  about  three  or  four 
tough  gentles  on  the  end  of  the  hook  (they  will  stand 
some  whipping  before  they  wear  off),  and  this  renders  it 
almost  irresistible.  The  silver-bodied  fly,  with  turkey 
wing,  comes  next  in  my  estimation,  then  the  humble-bee, 
the  orange  palmer,  the  black  palmer,  and  so  on,  but  none 
of  them  are  the  worse  for  a  gentle  or  two  on  the  hook, 
The  ledger  is  not  a  chosen  method  of  fishing  for  chub,  but 
it  frequently  kills  the  best  when  fishing  for  barbel.  Nor 
is  either  live-bait  or  spinning  a  recognised  method,  though 
both  of  these  styles  take  them  at  times.  Chub  are  fre- 
quently taken  in  the  Thames  between  41b.  and  51b.  in 
weight,  occasionally  between  61b.  and  61b.,  and  now  and 
then  between  61b.  and  71b. ;  above  that  they  are  very  rare, 
though  they  have  been  known  in  other  waters  to  run  up 
to  91b. 

THE   BARBEL  (Gyprinus  harbatus). 

Next  to  the  roach,  perhaps,  the  barbel  is  the  most 
popular  fish  with  London  bottom  fishers ;  while  on  the 
Trent  it  takes  the  first  place.  It  is  a  handsomely  shaped 
fish,   and   well  formed  for  the  water  it  inhabits.      Its 


42  ANGLING. 

rounded,  compact  body,  pointed  head,  and  large  fins  being 
peculiarly  adapted  to  these  rapid  and  heavy  waters ;  the 
roughest  water  in  a  river  being  frequently  the  most 
favourite  haunt  of  the  big  barbel,  while  the  swifter  and 
heavier  streams  are  nearly  always  their  chosen  resort. 

Barbel  are  taken  with  the  ledger  or  with  float  tackle, 
either  while  roach  fishing  or  with  the  traveller  in  the 
Nottingham  fashion — for  which  purpose  the  slider  float  is 
chiefly  used,  as  it  accommodates  itself  to  any  slight  varia- 
tion in  the  depth  of  the  swim  better  than  any  other. 
They  are  also  taken  by  expert  fishers  with  a  light  pistol 
bullet  and  no  float,  the  bullet  being  fixed  a  yard  above 
the  hook,  and  the  tackle  and  bait  allowed  to  trundle 
naturally  along  the  bottom ;  when  a  bite  is  felt  at  the  rod 
point,  or  seen  by  the  stoppage  of  the  tackle — any  slack 
line  being  gathered  up — a  smart  backward  strike,  well 
over  the  shoulder,  usually  succeeds  in  fixing  the  hook. 

The  ledger  for  barbelling  should  always  be  as  light  as  it 
is  possible  to  hold  the  bottom  with,  a  moderate- sized  pistol 
ballet  often  being  quite  heavy  enough,  though  in  some 
heavy  streams  a  much  heavier  lead  is  needed.  There 
should  be  at  least  three  or  four  feet  of  tolerably  fine  but 
sound  gut  below  the  bullet,  so  as  to  give  the  bait  plenty  of 
play,  and  as  fine  a  running  line  should  be  used  as  is 
possible,  as  it  holds  less  water,  and  enables  a  lighter  lead 
to  be  used.  The  rod  should  not  be  too  heavy,  as  the 
lighter  it  is  in  reason  the  easier  it  is  to  feel  the  bite.  A 
rod  somewhat  bigger  than  an  ordinary  punting  roach  rod, 
but  rather  stiff er,  and  made  of  solid  wood,  is  best.  The 
hook  should  be  of  the  long-shanked,  round-bend  sort, 
and  not  larger  than  No.  4  or  5,  and  tied  on  tolerably  fine 
gut.  Do  not  strike  at  the  first  touch,  but  when  thft  tug  is 
repeated  once  or  twice,  strike  smartly  upwards.    The  best 


THE   BAEBEL.  43 

baits  for  ledgering  are,  firstly,  worms  ;  secondly,  greaves ; 
and  thirdly,  a  bunch  of  gentles,  though  some  people  occa- 
sionally catch  barbel  with  raw  beef  or  ham  ;  and  I  believe 
that  shrimps  would  make  a  capital  bait  if  the  fish  were  well 
ground-baited  with  them  once  or  twice,  so  as  to  get  used  to 
them,  and  they  are  often  easier  and  cheaper  to  get  than 
worms.  The  fishing  with  traveller  float  has  already  been 
described.  The  hook  used  should  be  a  No.  6  for  this  pur- 
pose, and  the  tackle  comparatively  fine,  and  shotted  with  a 
few  tolerably  heavy  shot.  The  rod  should  be  about  twelve 
feet  long,  moderately  stiff,  but  not  too  stiff ;  the  rings 
upright,  and  the  line  fine  Derby  twist,  while  the  float  must 
be  chosen  with  respect  to  the  weight  and  rapidity  of  the 
swim,  and  should  never  be  heavier  than  is  necessary. 

A  barbel  swim  for  traveller  fishing  is  often  from  thirty 
to  fifty  yards  long,  and  the  float  must  be  allowed  to 
travel  over  that  distance  with  as  little  check  as  possible. 
Whenever  the  float  dips  suddenly,  strike  firmly,  and 
back  over  the  shoulder;  and  if  you  hook  your  fish, 
keep  on  winding  him  up  to  the  boat  whenever  you 
can,  and,  by  the  time  he  comes  up  within  reach,  he 
is  usually  (unless  he  is  a  big  one,  or  unusually  vigorous) 
pretty  well  done.  When  the  fish  are  well  on  at  this 
style  it  is  very  pretty  fishing  indeed.  In  fishing  from 
the  bank,  the  angler  must  refer  back  to  what  I  have  said 
on  the  Nottingham  method.  The  only  difference  between 
it  and  traveller  fishing  from  the  punt  is  that  you  often 
have  to  cast  the  float  some  little  distance  out  into  the 
stream,  and  that  it  is  much  more  difficult  to  guide  it  well 
down  the  right  swim  for  any  distance,  particularly  if  it 
happens  to  be  a  windy,  rainy  day.  Indeed,  rain  is  the 
worst  enemy  you  can  have  in  traveller  fishing,  as  it  makes 
the  line  hang  in  the  rings,  and  checks  the  float  constantly, 


44  ANGLING. 

and  this  is  much  worse  in  bank  fishing  than  in  punting,  as 
it  drags  the  float  out  of  the  swim.  The  roach  tackle  and 
method  have  already  been  described,  and  barbel  often 
give  capital  sport  with  them,  particularly  when  the  big 
ones  take  a  single  hair  hook,  as  they  are  prone  to  do. 
Then  the  angler  must  prepare  for  a  long  fight,  extending 
to  one,  two,  or  even  three  or  more,  hours,  as  I  have  expe- 
rienced, and  it  generally  ends  in  the  fish  getting  away  after 
all,  as  I  have  also  experienced.  I  once  hooked  a  barbel  on 
single  hair,  and  played  him  for  three  and  a  half  hours, 
&Qd,  when  I  got  him  in,  he  only  weighed  61b. ;  hut  he  was 
hooked  in  the  back  fin,  and  though  I  was  much  disap- 
pointed in  the  size,  it  was  almost  equal  to  killing  a  fish  of 
double  the  weight  hooked  fairly ;  and  I  count  it  the 
greatest  angling  feat  I  ever  did,  as  the  stream  was  strong, 
and  at  least  half  the  struggle  was  carried  on  in  the 
darkness  of  a  November  evening,  as  the  care  required,  and 
the  delicate  handling  of  so  large  a  fish,  hooked  foul  (and 
very  badly  so  too),  in  a  sharp  stream,  with  a  single  horse- 
hair, was  by  no  means  an  easy  matter  to  administer.  My 
arm  was  stiff  for  a  day  or  two  from  the  strain.  This  hap- 
pened at  Hampton  Court,  just  below  the  weir,  in  1846.  I 
could  not  do  it  now,  I  am  sure,  though  I  have  landed 
bream  of  the  same  weight  in  my  own  stream  with  single 
hair ;  but  the  fish  are  very  different  in  their  powers,  the 
stream  is  easy,  and  you  stand  well  over  your  fish. 

The  clay  ball  already  mentioned  is  also  a  capital  method 
of  taking  the  barbel.  When  they  are  shy,  and  the  water 
is  low  and  clear,  a  small  triangle  and  a  bunch  of  gentles 
should  be  used.  Barbel  sometimes  take  the  spinning 
bait  early  in  the  spring  at  the  weirs,  when  the  angler  is 
spinning  for  trout,  but  it  is  not  a  recognised  method  of 
fishing  for  them.     Barbel  run  up  to  161b.  in  weight,  but 


THE   BAEBEL.  45 

are  not  often  taken  over  111b.  or  121b.  The  largest  I  ever 
got  was  121b.,  and  that  was  with  lampem  bait,  which  they 
are  fond  of  in  the  Thames  late  in  the  season,  when  the 
lampems  are  running.  Ground-bait  with  the  head  and 
entrails  of  the  lampems,  and  fish  with  a  bit  of  the  fish  about 
gooseberry  size.  The  ledger  is  best  for  this  work.  Barbel 
are  very  capricious,  at  any  rate  in  the  Thames  ;  some  years 
they  bite  very  badly,  and  only  a  very  few  decent  takes  are 
made.  Often  they  will  not  bite  for  weeks,  and  then  they 
come  on  well  for  a  week,  and  numbers  are  taken  every- 
where. This  more  often  than  not  happens  after  a  moderate 
flood,  when  the  water  is  clearing.  In  the  thicker  water  use 
the  ledger  ;  and  as  it  clears  try  the  traveller.  A  hundred- 
weight and  more  is  often  taken  in  a  good  swim  in  a  day, 
and  I  have  known  3cwt.  or  4cwt.  taken  out  of  a  good  swim 
in  two  or  thi*ee  days*  fishing. 

When  you  want  to  bait  a  barbel  swim,  first  be  sure  that 
the  barbel  are  there.  Then  take  care  that  no  one  sees  you, 
if  possible ;  and  the  best  way  to  be  sure  of  this  is  not  to 
bait  in  the  evening,  but  just  at  daybreak ;  chop  up  four  or 
five  himdred  lob  worms,  if  you  use  worms,  and  either 
inclose  them  in  large  balls  of  clay,  or  throw  them  in  loose 
well  up  stream  of  the  swim  you  want  to  fish,  so  that  they 
may  ground  where  you  expect  and  wish.  Repeat  this  again 
next  night,  and  a  third  if  you  think  it  desirable  ;  but  when 
you  are  going  to  fish  bait  sparingly  with  a  hundred  or  two 
only  of  worms,  just  to  keep  them  about,  but  not  to  cram 
them,  and  bait  on  this  occasion  the  night  before.  Then 
when  you  come  to  fish  next  morning — if  no  one  else  is 
fishing  your  swim — pitch  as  gently  as  possible,  throw  in  a 
few  fragments  of  worm,  and  commence.  If  you  use 
greaves  or  any  other  bait  the  same  method  must  be 
pursued. 


46  ANGLING. 

The  barbel,  though  he  is  not  given  to  make  desperate 
and  quick  rushes,  like  the  salmon  or  trout,  often  makes  a 
longer  and  more  stubborn  resistance,  and  if  he  gets  near 
the  boat  will  often  double  round  the  punt  pole.  An 
angler  with  a  good  fish  round  a  punt  pole  is  an  instructive 
sight,  and  it  not  unfrequently  causes  him  to  utter  naughty 
words.  They  are  poor  eating,  though  the  fishermen  use 
them  by  splitting  them  up,  taking  out  the  backbone,  and 
frying  them.  I  have  tried  them,  but  they  are  watery, 
bony  beasts,  and,  unless  you  belong  to  a  club  or  want  to 
show  them,  they  are  hardly  worth  bringing  home.  I 
generally  return  all  under  41b.  unless  I  have  someone  to 
give  them  to  who  wants  them ;  and  I  wish  everybody  did 
the  same,  it  would  be  better  for  sport.  Barbel  are  a 
widely  distributed  fish,  and  are  found  throughout  the  south 
of  Europe,  in  France,  Spain,  Germany,  and  Prussia,  many 
being  in  the  rivers  of  the  Crimea. 


THE   BREAM   (Cyprtnus  brama). 

The  French  say  that  "  he  who  has  bream  in  his  pond 
may  bid  his  friend  welcome."  I  was  sceptical  on  this  for 
a  long  time,  having  once  tasted  some  that  were  by  no 
means  desirable  ;  but  since  then  I  have  tried  them  from  a 
gravelly  reach  of  the  Thames,  and  found  them  very 
palatable,  and  no  doubt  with  French  cookery  they  might 
be  made  very  good  indeed.  The  bream  usually  prefers  a 
deep  hole  or  eddy  to  a  stream,  though  occasionally  they 
are  taken  in  both,  and  it  is  not  imusual  to  take  bream  and 
barbel  in  the  same  swim,  and  I  have  more  than  once  seen 
a  bream  and  a  barbel  on  two  rods  side  by  side  at  the  same 
time.  They  are  fond  of  a  deep  hole  under  a  shady  tree. 
In  the  Norfolk  rivers  and  broads,  which  are  the  great 


THE   BEEAM.  47 

head-quarters  of  bream,  they  abound  in  great  profusion, 
and  the  takes  there  are  counted  by  the  stone  instead  of 
the  pound.  Though  the  bream  in  Norfolk  rarely  exceed 
41b.  in  weight — while  in  the  Thames  they  sometimes  run 
up  to  61b.,  and  in  my  little  stream,  the  Crane,  a  tributary 
of  the  Thames,  I  have  often  taken  them  of  61b.  and  larger 
— ^in  the  Irish  lakes,  where  they  sometimes  abound  greatly, 
bream  have  been  taken  up  to  91b.  The  bream  is  a  very 
slimy  fish,  and  often  when  hooked  will  bore  head  down- 
wards, and  rub  the  line  with  his  side,  so  that  it  comes  up 
sometimes  quite  coated  with  slime  for  a  foot  above  the 
hook. 

The  same  methods  of  fishing  for  bream  as  I  have  given 
for  barbel  should  be  adopted,  viz.,  by  the  ledger,  the  roach 
float  fishing,  and  the  traveller  float.  The  hook  used  should 
be  a  size  or  so  smaller  than  that  used  for  barbel.  On 
the  Thames  they  ground  bait  with  worms  and  gentles,  and 
if  you  can  get  a  large  supply  of  brandlings  they  are  far 
the  best  even  for  ground  bait,  and  for  the  hook  nothing 
beats  brandlings.  In  Norfolk  boiled  barley  or  grains  is 
the  favourite  ground  bait,  but  I  do  not  think  they  would 
be  found  insensible  to  the  worm.  Grains  and  barley,  how- 
ever, have  the  merit  of  being  cheaper  and  much  easier  to 
get.  On  the  Thames,  at  any  rate,  the  finer  the  tackle  the 
better  it  pays,  as  the  bream  there  are  often  shy  in  biting. 
They  are  also  capricious,  like  the  barbel,  and  may  be 
caught  later  than  the  barbel,  an  open  week  in  mid- winter 
often  giving  good  sport  with  them,  which  it  rarely  does 
with  the  barbel.  I  have  caught  them  up  to  the  second 
week  in  April,  when  they  began  to  get  rough  for  the 
spawning,  as,  indeed,  do  the  roach  nearly  about  the  same 
time,  and  both  of  these  fish  might  well  be  taken  till  the 
end  of  March — March  being  one  of  the  best  months  in  the 


48  ANGLING. 

year  for  both  ;  while  the  whole  of  June,  when  they,  as  well 
as  the  barbel,  have  hardly  ever  quite  done  spawning,  and 
are  never  in  condition,  should  be  made  a  fence  month  in 
the  Thames  for  these  fish.  In  quiet  eddies  or  ponds,  the 
bream  will  sometimes  raise  the  float  when  they  bite, 
instead  of  pulling  it  down.  I  think  this  is  owing 
yery  much  to  the  shape  of  the  fish  when  it  picks  the 
bait  off  the  ground  and  resumes  its  natural  position. 

Bream  make  a  smart  run  at  the  first  start,  and  fight 
boldly  for  a  time  ;  but  the  shape  of  the  fish  is  not  cut  out 
for  a  very  prolonged  resistance,  and  as  soon  as  he  gets  the 
worst  of  it  he  turns  on  his  side,  making  but  a  clumsy 
wobble  of  it,  and  gives  in.  Much  depends,  however,  on 
the  strength  of  the  tackle ;  strong  tackle  soon  beats  him, 
but  he  will  play  very  gamely  for  some  time  on  light.  I 
&ncy  that  bream  are  rather  a  wandering  fish,  and  that 
they  are  apt  to  move  about  a  good  deal  from  spot  to  spot. 
I  have  known  them  do  so  in  my  river,  and  also  on  the 
Thames. 

THE  CARP  {Gyprinus  ca/rpio). 

There  are  all  sorts  of  suggestions  as  to  how  the  carp 
came  to  England ;  but,  like  the  birth  of  Topsy,  there  is  an 
obscurity  about  it,  and  I  **  'specs  they  grow'd,"  and  didn't 
come  at  all ;  at  any  rate  it  does  not  much  matter — what 
does,  nowadays,  when,  as  the  modem  sage  says,  "  There's 
nothing  new  and  nothing  true,  and  it  don't  matter  ?  " 
However,  there  the  carp  is — very  often  occupying  water 
that  is  fitter  and  would  be  more  worthily  and  remunera- 
tively occupied  by  his  betters.  Though  how  good  a  carp 
could  be  made,  we  modems,  I  fancy,  do  not  know,  because 
we  do  not  attempt  to  treat  them  as  our  forefathers  did; 
and  if  we  catch  one  out  of  a  muddy  pond,  we  proceed. 


THE   CAEP.  49 

without  further  delay  or  preparation,  to  eat  him,  when  we 
are  horrified  at  the  fearful  flavour  of  mud  he  gives  forth. 
Now,  I  cannot  help  doubting  that  a  fish  which  can  be  so 
pervaded  with  an  outside  flavour,  like  this,  by  association, 
must  be  a  very  delicately  organised  fish,  and  should  be 
capable  of  a  very  different  result.  One  thing  is  admitted, 
viz.,  that  150  years  or  so  ago  carp  fetched  a  higher  price 
than  salmon. 

Carp,  when  they  grow  to  a  large  size,  or  are  much  fished 
for,  soon  become  very  wary,  particularly  in  ponds.  I  am 
inclined  to  think  that  they  bite  much  better  in  rivers  ;  and 
in  rivers  with  a  gravelly  bottom,  like  the  Thames,  they  are 
far  better,  even  for  the  table.  As  they  do  not  spawn  till 
about  June,  they  are  in  season  through  March  and  April, 
and  therefore  I  have  advocated  the  increase  of  them  in  the 
Thames,  as  they  would  afford  good  sport  when  the 
ordinary  Thames  fish  are  out  of  condition.  To  fish  for 
carp,  the  angler  requires  to  be  very  quiet  and  unobtrusive, 
particularly  when  they  are  in  ponds.  Carp  grub  for  their 
bait  along  the  bottom,  and  if  the  angler  keeps  quiet  and 
out  of  sight,  he  may  often  see  them  within  reach  of  his 
rod,  routing  along  in  quiet  and  shallow  water,  with  their 
tails  or  back  fins  above  water.  I  have  often  taken  them 
when  thus  occupied  by  softly  casting  my  float  and  tackle 
out  a  yard  or  two  ahead  of  them,  in  the  direction  they  are 
travelling,  and  allowing  the  bait  to  He  on  the  bottom,  when 
I  have  frequently  managed  to  capture  the  rover.  Carp 
will  take  both  worms  and  gentles  well  at  times,  but 
farinaceous  baits  are  more  in  favour  with  the  carp  fisher- 
men of  the  present  day;  for  if  there  happens  to  be  a  lot  of 
small  roach,  perch,  or  eels  in  the  same  pond — as  there  too 
often  is — these  will,  if  worms  or  gentles  be  used  for 
ground  bait,  hasten  to  the  spot  and  eat  up  most  of  it 

E 


50  ANGLING. 

before  the  carp  can  find  it  out ;  and,  added  to  this,  when 
you  begin  to  fish,  the  first  miserable  little  eel  or  perch  you 
take  will  drive  many  of  the  best  carp  away ;  and  after  you 
have  taken  two  or  three,  there  will  hardly  be  a  carp  left. 

Carp  will  take  a  variety  of  baits,  as  worms,  gentles, 
wasp  grubs,  plain  and  sweet  paste,  boiled  green  peas,  and 
I>otatoes.  The  last  is  the  best  bait  that  can  be  used, 
particularly  with  big  carp ;  it  should  be  about  three  parts, 
or  rather  more,  boiled — rather  a  waxy  sort  being  chosen — 
and  the  best  way  of  baiting  with  it  is  to  use  a  small 
triangle  on  a  single  thread  of  gut,  with  a  small  loop  to  the 
other  end  of  it,  having  a  good  big  loop  in  the  line  to  loop 
it  on  to.  Then  take  a  baiting  needle,  and,  hitching  it  on 
to  the  loop  of  the  triangle,  draw  the  gut  through  the 
middle  of  the  potato  and  pull  the  triangle  up  so  as  just  to 
bury  the  hook  points  in  the  potato.  Then  cut  the  potato 
round  with  a  knife  neatly  till  it  is  about  the  size  of  a  good 
sized  gooseberry,  and  loop  it  on  to  the  line — the  big  loop 
allowing  the  bait  and  all  to  be  passed  through  easily.  The 
best  way  of  fishing  this  bait  is  with  a  very  light  ledger,  a 
small  pistol  bullet  being  quite  heavy  enough.  The  gut 
should  be  fineish,  but  strong  and  sound,  as  a  big  carp  is  a 
doughty  antagonist,  and  his  first  rush  is  not  to  be  sneezed 
at.  I  have  been  broken  in  it  many  a  time,  when  I  have 
been  at  all  in  difficulties  ;  and  carp,  as  they  often  run  up 
to  101b.  or  121b.  weight,  and  even  larger,  and  have  very 
powerful  fins,  want  careful  managing  at  first.  They  are, 
too,  pretty  cunning,  and  will  run  you  into  a  mass  of  weeds 
if  they  can. 

In  fishing  a  pond  in  this  fashion  it  is  best  to  attach  a 
very  light  float  to  the  line,  above  the  pistol  bullet,  allowing 
enough  line  to  permit  the  bullet  to  rest  easily  on  the 
bottom,  and  the  float  to  lie  on  the  surface.     It  is  as  well. 


THE   CAEP.  51 

if  you  have  any  plumbing  of  the  depth  to  do,  to  do  it  the 
night  before  fishing,  so  as  not  to  disturb  the  bottom. 
Two  or  three  pieces  of  rush  make  an  efficient  float  for  this 
purpose,  a  half  hitch  or  two  being  taken  at  either  end  of 
them  ;  and,  as  this  is  a  very  common  object  on  ponds,  it 
does  not  challenge  the  observation  that  a  brilliant  red, 
green,  and  white  float  does.  Casting  the  bullet  and  bait 
out  to  the  required  spot,  draw  the  float  and  bullet  gently 
along  a  little,  so  as  to  tighten  the  line  and  to  extend  the 
bait  straight  out  along  the  bottom  from  the  bullet.  You 
may  then  lay  the  rod  down  on  a  forked  stick,  as  you  will 
easily  see  by  the  float  any  nibble,  and  have  plenty  of  time 
to  recover  the  rod  before  the  bite  takes  place. 

Never  strike  while  a  carp  only  nibbles.  Wait  till  he 
drags  the  float  steadily  under,  and  appears  to  be  going 
away  with  it ;  when,  seeing  all  clear  and  in  order  about 
the  line  and  reel  for  a  rush,  you  may  hit  him  smartly,  and 
if  he  is  a  big  one  "  look  out  for  squalls  " — as  his  mouth 
is  very  tough  and  leathery,  you  may  play  him  firmly. 
Get  him  away  as  soon  as  possible  from  your  pitch,  so  as 
not  to  frighten  the  rest,  and  land  him  as  far  from  the 
pitch  as  you  can.  Then  come  back  to  the  pitch,  quietly 
throw  in  a  handful  or  two  of  ground  bait,  and  follow  up 
with  the  hook  as  before,  and  probably  in  ten  minutes  or  a 
quarter  of  an  hour,  if  the  fish  are  well  on,  you  may  see 
your  rush  float  "  niggle-niggling "  again.  The  best 
ground  bait,  of  course,  for  this  work  is  boiled  potato.  If 
fishing  a  pond,  always  bait  two,  or  even  three  spots,  if  you 
can ;  so  that,  when  the  fish  are  rather  alarmed  at  one, 
you  can  rest  it  and  go  to  another — casting  in  a  few  hand- 
fuls  of  bait  before  you  leave,  to  draw  them  back  again. 
Always  fish  from  the  shore,  too,  if  you  can,  as  carp  are  shy 
of  a  boat,  and  any  motion  of  the  water  easily  alarms  them. 

E  2 


62  ANGLING. 

In  fishing  with  the  ledger  in  a  stream  you  would  discard 
the  float,  and  fish  as  for  barbel,  by  the  feel.  In  this  case, 
when  you  feel  a  nibble,  you  must  yield  some  inches  of 
line  and  wait  for  the  tug  that  announces  a  bite.  This  is 
held  to  be,  by  experienced  carp  fishers,  the  best  and  most 
killing  method  of  cai-p  fishing,  particularly  for  big  fish. 
The  great  thing  is  to  let  the  bait  and  line  rest  on  the 
bottom  for  a  foot  or  two.  In  this  way  the  carp  sees 
neither  the  line  nor  the  hook,  as  he  cannot  fail  to  do  if  he 
is  curious  in  float  fishing  when  the  depth  is  exactly 
plumbed  and  the  bait  only  just  touches  the  bottom.  I 
have  heard  a  haricot  bean,  or  even  a  small  broad  bean  well 
boiled,  spoken  of  as  a  capital  bait,  but  I  never  tried  it. 
It  seems,  however,  a  very  likely  bait.  I  have  no  doubt, 
too,  that  a  lump  of  pearl  barley,  such  as  we  use  for  roach, 
would  be  a  good  bait,  using  half-a-dozen  corns  ;  and  it 
would  be  a  nice  bait  to  ground  bait  with. 

In  float  fishing  use  as  light  a  float  as  you  can,  and  have 
the  shots  or  sinker  as  far  from  the  hook  as  you  conveniently 
can ;  and  here,  too,  if  you  can  do  it,  I  always  find  that  if 
4in.  or  5iiL  of  the  hook  gut  rests  on  the  bottom  it  pays 
best.  A  worm  or  other  bait  only  just  touching  the  bottom, 
with  a  row  of  shot  6in.  or  Sin.  above  it,  is  very  likely  to 
challenge  the  attention  of  the  carp,  who  at  once  sees 
something  he  is  not  accustomed  to,  and  becomes  sus- 
picious. To  show  how  different  it  is  when  the  line  rests 
on  the  bottom,  I  once  took  a  71b.  carp  on  an  eel  line  with 
a  coarse  string  snood  and  worm  bait.  Carp  always  nibble 
a  good  deal  at  the  bait  before  they  take  it,  and  will  often 
nibble  off  the  tail  of  the  worm,  or  suck  off  your  paste  and 
leave  the  hook  showing  without  taking  the  hook  at  all.  In 
using  past/e  I  prefer  sweet  paste,  made  up  with  honey  or 
brown  sugar,  to  plain,  and  I  have  heard  of  paste  made  of 


THE   CARP.  53 

pound  cake  being  greatly  affected  by  the  carp.  Poor  old  Bill 
Kemp,  now  with  the  majority,  a  capital  old  carp  fisher  at 
Teddington,  used  to  put  on  a  lump  of  this  as  big  as  a 
large  gooseberry,  and  fish  it  with  ledger  tackle  ;  and  he 
used  to  take  a  great  many  fine  carp.  He  was  a  wily  old 
fellow,  and  many  a  good  day's  sport  I  had  with  him  in 
days  gone  by,  but  poor  old  Bill  went  the  way  of  all 
flesh,  though  he  left  many  good  fishermen  of  his  own 
name  behind  him,  who  still  keep  up  their  calling  at 
Teddington. 

The  rod  used  for  this  work  should  be  about  12ft.  or 
13ft.  long  for  pond  fishing,  light  and  stiff,  with  upright 
rings  somewhat  like  a  Nottingham  traveller  rod,  only  a  bit 
stiffer.  In  punting  use  the  same  as  for  bream  and  light 
barbelling  ;  the  line,  a  fine  dressed  one,  sound  and  strong, 
to  run  easy  and  stand  a  good  strain,  and  yet  not  be  too 
heavy  in  the  water.  The  gut  should  have  as  much  play 
through  the  bullet  as  the  longest  strand  of  gut  you  can 
get  will  give  it,  so  that  there  should  be  no  check  against 
the  bullet  when  the  carp  is  nibbling.  I  always  like,  if 
possible,  to  bait  a  pitch  or  a  swim  for  two  or  three  nights 
in  succession  before  I  go  to  fish  it,  so  as  to  draw  the  fish 
well  on,  as  in  ponds  particularly  it  might  take  some  time 
l^fore  the  fish  found  the  bait.  If  there  is  any  shelter  on 
the  bank,  as  a  bush  or  tree,  it  is  as  well  to  take  advantage 
of  it,  as  the  carp  is  very  quick-sighted.  If  there  be  nothing 
of  the  kind,  it  will  pay  well  to  stick  a  hurdle  up  on  end, 
supporting  it  with  a  couple  of  sticks  fixed  in  the  ground. 
You  do  not  need  to  get  behind  it ;  it  is  sufficient  if  you 
have  it  behind  you.  The  carp  will  soon  get  used  to  it ; 
but  be  careful  not  to  stump  about  or  shake  the  bank  at 
all,  or  you  will  see  some  long  waves  going  out  into  the 
depths  of  the  pond.     In  fact,  you  cannot  be  too  quiet  and 


64  ANGLING. 

unobtrusive  with  so  wary  a  fish,  for  though  you  may  at 
times  catch  a  few  fish,  particularly  small  ones,  when  dis- 
regarding these  precautions,  in  the  long  run  you  will  find 
it  well  to  observe  them. 

The  monks,  who  particularly  cultivated  the  carp  at 
many  of  their  monasteries,  had  regular  succession  ponds 
for  breeding  and  feeding  them ;  clear  pure  water,  and 
plenty  of  it,  running  over  a  sweet  gravel  bottom  being  the 
last  stage  they  went  through  before  being  tabled — bread 
and  milk  and  other  farinaceous  diet  being  used  to  fatten 
and  sweeten  them.  Carp  can  be  rendered  very  tame,  and 
will  take  their  food  from  the  hands  of  their  attendant  in 
time,  being  called  by  a  bell,  or  whistle,  or  other  signal. 
They  have  a  species  of  carp  in  Germany  caUed  the  Spiegel, 
or  Mirror  carp,  which  has  a  singular  row  of  large  brilliant 
scales  running  along  the  side ;  also  the  Leather  carp,  a  fish 
with  small  scales  and  very  like  a  tench.  They  are  both 
said  to  be  better  table  fish  than  the  ordinary  carp.  In 
this  country  the  Prussian  and  the  Crucian  carp  are  often 
found,  though  they  are  much  inferior  both  for  table  and 
angling  purposes  to  their  superior  congeners.  The  gold 
and  silver  fish  are  also  carps.  The  carp  has  been  taken 
over  201b.  in  weight  in  this  country,  but  half  that  weight 
is  a  large  one,  and  not  so  very  common.  Carp  live  to  a 
very  great  age. 

THE  TENCH  {Gyprinns  tinea). 
The  tench  is  often  found  in  the  same  ponds  and  places 
as  the  carp,  and  they  thrive  well  together.  They  spawn 
about  a  fortnight  or  three  weeks  later  than  the  carp,  as  a 
rule,  and  do  not  reach  the  same  size.  A  tench  of  41b.  is  a 
large  one,  though  I  have  seen  plenty  of  51b.  or  61b.,  and 
thev  have  been  known  to  reach  81b.  or  91b. ;  but  this  is  a 


THE   TENCH.  55 

Tery  unusual  size ;  a  21b.  or  31b.  fish  is  a  very  good  fish. 
They  are  even  more  capricious  in  their  biting  than  the 
•carp.  August  and  September  being,  perhaps,  the  best 
months  for  them.  They  prefer  worms  to  any  other  bait, 
though  sometimes  a  bunch  of  gentles  will  be  found  to 
tempt  them ;  a  red  worm,  however,  is  their  favourite  bait, 
and,  with  a  No.  7  hook  and  a  couple  of  red  worms  neatly 
strung  on,  the  angler  should  take  tench  if  they  are 
inclined  to  feed  at  all.  I  remember  formerly  to  have  read 
that  it  was  a  good  plan  to  dip  the  red  worm  in  tar,  but  I 
cannot  believe  it,  as  tar  is  usually  death  to  fish  of  all 
kinds,  and  utterly  abhorrent  to  them  ;  but  the  old  writers 
were  fond  of  strange  theories,  many  of  which  I  have 
proved  to  be  utterly  false.  I  once  spoilt  a  capital  day's 
trouting  by  keeping  my  worms  in  fennel  by  the  advice  of 
some  old  writer — perhaps  he  had  our  friend  Greville  in  his 
mind,  and  not  the  herb  of  that  name — which  did  not 
agree  with  the  fish  at  all ;  for  they  no  sooner  took  it  in 
their  mouths  than  they  spat  it  out  again  in  apparent 
disgust,  and  I  lost  scores  of  good  bites,  till  I  had  at  last 
to  hunt  for  others  in  a  pelting  rain,  when  I  did  better — 
bad  as  the  substitute  was. 

The  tackle  for  tench  should  be  a  light  float,  fineish  gut, 
and  No.  7  hook.  The  rod  and  line  should  be  similar  to 
those  noted  for  carp  fishing.  Plumb  the  depth  so  that  the 
worm  may  just  touch  or  rest  on  the  bottom,  and  ground 
bait  with  chopped  worms  and  gentles,  as  the  tench  does 
not  affect  farinaceous  food.  When  the  tench  bites,  like 
the  carp  he  nibbles  a  good  deal  before  he  takes,  and  will 
often,  after  niggling  the  float  up  and  down  for  a  minute 
or  two,  turn  away  from  it,  and  even  leave  it  altogether. 
When  he  does  this,  I  have  often  quickened  his 
appetite  by  drawing  the  worm   slowly  away  from   him. 


56  ANGLING. 

when,  thinking  he  is  going  to  lose  it,  he  will  often  rush 
at  it  and  bolt  it  at  once ;  this  would  probably  frighten  the 
carp,  but  it  frequently  has  the  opposite  effect  on  the 
tench ;  when  the  float  slowly  sinks  and  streaks  away 
towards  the  middle  of  the  pond,  you  may  strike  and  do 
your  best.  Tench  are  very  fond  of  weeds,  and  will  often 
abound  in  small  ponds  which  are  quite  full  of  them  and 
impossible  to  fish.  In  such  cases  I  have  often  had  good 
sport  by  setting  a  man  to  work  to  rake  away  a  clear  space 
of  some  twenty  or  thirty  or  more  feet  square ;  bait  this 
well  once  or  twice,  and  you  may  chance  to  get  a  good  day's 
sport  in  it ;  and  do  not  be  in  a  hurry  to  leave  off,  for  as 
long  as  you  can  see  your  float  the  tench  will  keep  on 
biting,  particularly  on  a  warm,  still  evening — and  often 
better  then  than  in  the  broad  daylight. 

Tench  are  very  slimy  fish,  and  wheTi  cooked  this  slime 
should  be  wiped  or  scraped  ofif;  but  they  are  a  much 
better  fish  for  the  table  in  an  r  dinary  way  than  carp, 
being  succulent  and  nourishing  food.  The  old  story  of 
the  tench  being  gifted  with  medicinal  properties  is,  of 
course,  pure  nonsense,  his  slime  not  being  an  equivalent 
for  "  parmacetti  "  for  any  wound  "  inward  "  or  outward. 
Both  carp  and  tench  a  a  remarkable  for  the  long  time  they 
can  live  out  of  the  water,  if  only  kept  a  little  damp ;  and 
in  cool  weather  they  may  be  transported  almost  any 
reasonable  distance  in  damp  moss.  The  stories  of  the 
endurance  of  tench  under  these  circumstances  are  endless. 
I  once  carried  one  160  miles  in  only  a  damp  cloth,  and  he 
was  quite  lively  at  the  end  of  his  journey.  The  golden 
tench,  or  gold  schley,  a  remarkable  species  of  tench  of  a 
bright  yellow  gold  colour,  was  brought  to  this  country 
years  ago  by  Mr.  Higford  Burr,  of  Aldermaston,  and  has 
bred  and  thriven  well  with  him,   and  may  be   seen  in 


THE   PERCH.  bT 

many  of  our  aquariums,  where  it  is  a  conspicuous  object. 
Like  the  carp,  tench  abound  in  many  of  the  ponds  and 
reservoirs  round  London,  capital  takes  being  often  made 
in  the  Welsh  Harp  waters  by  the  frequenters  of  the  place. 
The  largest  I  have  seen  are  in  Sir  John  Gibbons' s  water, 
near  Staines,  where  they  are  plentiful  and  very  large — 
likewise  shy. 

THE   PERCH    {Perm  fluviatilis). 

The  perch  has  been  called  a  bold  biting  fish,  and,  as  a 
rule,  I  think  he  is;  though  there  are  times  when  a  big 
perch  is  anything  but  rash  in  his  proceedings.  When 
full  fed,  towards  the  middle  or  end  of  summer,  and  king 
of  his  favourite  eddy,  he  will  inspect  with  perfect  caution 
and  care  any  bait  that  may  be  offered  him;  and  though, 
at  the  same  time,  if  ^ou  happen  upon  a  warm  comer,  you 
may  haul  out  a  dozeii^or  two  chubby  fellows  of  three  or 
four  to  the  pound,  your^Siwo-pound  perch  exercises  a  nice 
discrimination  in  the  selection  of  his  food  ;  and  though 
you  may  even  see  him  chevying  the  minnows  and  small 
fry  about  in  all  directions,  yet,  if  you  intrude  yours  in  his 
way,  his  taking  it  is  anything  but  a  certainty.  Wait  till 
the  winter,  when  there  have  been  d6*ods  and  frosts,  when 
food  has  been  short,  and  he,  in  common  with  fifty  others, 
is  sharp  set ;  then  truly  you  may  come  to  terms  with  hira,. 
and  his  biting  will  be  as  bold  as  you  can  deSire. 

There  are  various  ways  of  fishing  for  perch,  viz.,  by  the 
paternoster,  which  is  the  best  way  ;  by  float ;  by  putting 
live  bait  on  a  ledger,  in  which  way  I  have  taken  many  while 
roaching  or  gudgeoning ;  and  by  spinning  a  minnow  or 
spoon,  which  last  way  will  be  described  hereafter  more 
particularly ;  it  is  sufficient  to  say  here  that  the  bait  is 
put  on  to  a  tackle,  and  in  such  a  way  that  it  revolves 


58  ANGLING. 

rapidly  when  drawn  through  the  water,  and  many  perch 
are  thus  taken  by  trailing  with  a  long  line  behind  the  boat 
when  rowing  slowly  over  a  lake  or  against  stream  on  a 
river.  As  regards  the  paternoster,  it  consists  of  a  plummet 
or  bullet  at  the  end  of  about  5ft.  or  6ft.  of  gut;  just 
above  the  plummet  a  hook  is  fixed  on  about  5in.  or  Gin.  of 
gut ;  about  lOin.  or  a  foot  above  this  is  fixed  another,  on 
6in.  or  7in.  of  gut,  and  at  a  like  distance  above,  if  neces- 
sary, a  third.  These  hooks  are  about  No.  4  or  5  in  size 
and  short  in  the  shank.  The  gut  should  be  moderate,  but 
not  too  fine  nor  too  coarse,  but  a  shade  or  two  finer  than 
the  main  line  of  the  paternoster. 

The  paternosters  sold  at  the  shops,  with  big  shots, 
gutta-percha  cylinders,  and  hogs'  bristles,  are  simply 
rubbish.  The  best  way  to  make  one  is  to  take  2yds.  of 
gut,  loop  on  your  lead,  then  tie  a  loop  on  the  gut  about 
3in.  or  4in.  above,  into  which  loop  your  first  hook,  and 
repeat  the  process  as  directed  with  the  other  hooks,  and 
the  less  lashing  or  whipping,  shots  or  gutta-percha  about 
the  tackle  the  better,  as,  though  the  perch  is  a  bold- biting 
fish,  he  is  not  quite  a  fool.  Loop  this  on  to  the  running 
line,  and  hook  a  minnow,  or  small  gudgeon,  or  any  other 
small  fry,  on  to  each  hook,  through  the  lip,  and  you  are  all 
ready  for  action.  Some  people  like  a  worm  on  the  bottom 
hook  for  a  change ;  it  is  not  a  bad  plan,  as  it  affords  a 
choice.  K  there  are  pike  about,  it  is  a  good  plan  to  sub- 
stitute for  the  top  hook  a  small  triangle  tied  on  gimp,  and 
to  use  a  rather  larger  bait  on  it,  hooked  through  the  back 
fin.  In  this  way  you  will  avoid  losing  your  gut  hooks  and 
often  take  good  pike.  When  you  fish,  drop  the  plummet 
into  the  water  and  let  it  find  the  bottom,  and  keep  a  tight 
line,  so  as  to  feel  the  slightest  bite.     If  no  bite  comes  in 


THE  PEECH.  59 

half  a  minute  or  so,  draw  the  plummet  gently  to  the 
right  or  left  about  a  yard ;  fish  the  water  within  reach  all 
round  you ;  having  finished  that,  swing  the  plummet  a 
yard  or  two  further  away  from  you,  and  fish  that  line 
of  water  in  the  same  manner,  and  so  keep  on  casting 
further  and  further  until  you  have  fished  all  the  water  you 
want  to,  when  go  on  to  another  spot. 

In  punting  you  do  just  the  same — choosing  the  hkely 
spots,  of  which  the  eddies  are  the  best  just  off  the  edge  of 
the  stream.  When  these  are  large,  as  on  the  Thames 
after  floods  and  frost,  many  perch  will  frequently  be  found 
congregated ;  the  head  or  first  turn  or  two  of  the  eddy  and 
close  to  the  stream  will  always  be  found  the  favourite  spot, 
as  it  is  there  that  the  food  is  first  driven  in  from  the 
stream.  When  you  have  to  make  longer  casts  beyond  the 
command  of  the  rod,  you  work  the  line  back  a  foot  at  a 
time  until  the  plimimet  is  under  the  rod  point  once  more, 
when  cast  again — but  not  twice  to  the  same  spot,  unless 
you  have  a  bite  or  a  fish  there,  then  stick  to  that  spot  as 
long  as  the  fish  bite.  It  requires  a  good  puntsman,  who 
is  well  up  to  his  work,  to  manage  his  pimt  properly  and 
manipulate  the  baits.  The  best  plan  is,  if  two  anglers  are 
engaged,  for  them  to  stand  side  by  side  in  the  stern,  each 
bringing  his  fish  round  on  his  own  side  to  the  puntsman, 
who  lands  them,  takes  them  off,  and  rebaits.  In  this  way, 
with  a  friend,  I  have  often  taken  a  bushel  of  fine  perch  in 
a  day  on  the  Upper  Thames,  in  February.  When  you  feel 
a  bite  do  not  strike  at  the  first  touch,  but  when  it  is 
repeated  strike  smartly,  and  take  care  you  do  not  scratch 
and  lose  your  fish,  as,  if  you  do,  you  will  too  often  find 
that  the  story  that  a  scratched  perch  frightens  the  rest  is 
no  fable,  and  though  it  does  not  always  hold  good,  it  very 


60  ANGLING. 

often  does  ;  and  if  you  lose  two  or  three  it  is  pretty  nearly 
a  certainty. 

Where  the  water  is  not  deep  and  is  pretty  clear,  two 
hooks  will  be  enough;  but  in  coloured  water  of  six  or 
eight  feet,  I  like  three.  Perch  choose  a  quiet  eddy,  not  a 
wild  one,  and  the  big  ones  always  rest  nearest  to  the  edge 
of  the  stream,  as  the  best  feeding  place,  and  a  big  perch 
prefers  a  fat  little  gudgeon  to  a  small  minnow — he  has  an 
eye  for  size  when  hungry.  I  like  the  bottom  hook  pretty 
close  to  the  bottom,  as  the  bait  always  strikes  up  towards 
the  surface ;  and  if  the  hook  is  fixed  high  up,  it  will  not 
easily  be  seen  by  the  perch  which  happen  to  be  on  the 
bottom,  and  which  are  always  the  majority.  You  may 
take  hold  of  a  few  more  weeds,  but  that  cannot  be  helped. 
The  loss  of  a  perch  hook  or  two  is  not  of  much  con- 
sequence, and  is  nothing  to  the  loss  of  a  score  or  two  of 
perch.  When  gudgeon  fishing,  a  paternoster  laid  out 
beside  the  swim  is  often  very  effective.  The  gudgeon  con- 
gregate to  feed  on  the  larva  and  worms,  and  the  perch 
congregate  to  feed  on  the  gudgeon,  and,  if  you  are  on  the 
look-out,  you  will  feed  on  the  perch. 

The  next  best  method  is  to  fish  with  a  float  and  two 
hooks,  one  near  the  bottom  and  one  a  foot  higher,  the 
lower  baited  with  worm,  the  upper  with  minnow;  and 
there  are  times,  in  the  summer,  when  the  fish  are  shy,  that 
they  will  take  float  tackle  better  than  paternoster.  There 
is  little  to  be  told  of  this  style :  when  the  float  bobs,  which 
it  does  usually  smartly,  give  the  fish  time  and  you  cannot 
miss  him ;  a  somewhat  smaller  hook  does  for  float  tackle, 
as  you  give  more  time.  In  the  summer  the  streams  are 
the  best  place  for  perch ;  with  the  autumn  they  get  into 
the  eddies,  and  near  old  locks  and  hatches.  In  lakes,  the 
shallow  weedy-bottomed  bays  are  the  home  of  the  perch. 


THE   PEECH.  61 

Trailing  is  often  the  best  plan  here,  but  if  you  can  find  a 
clear  bottom  the  float  or  paternoster  may  do. 

Perch  take  the  spoon  well,  but  they  take  the  artificial 
bait  known  as  the  otter  better.  This  is  a  triangular  bit 
of  metal,  silvered  on  one  side,  copper  on  the  other,  and 
revolving  on  a  spindle.  There  are  numbers  of  artificial 
baits  and  minnows,  but  none  better  than  this — I  think  it 
even  beats  the  minnow,  as  it  both  shows  and  spins  better. 
I  have  taken  hundreds  of  perch  in  the  Irish  lakes  with 
them,  and  it  beats  the  spoon  two  to  one — at  least,  that  is 
my  experience.  Some  people  paint  it  red  on  one  side 
instead  of  copper,  and  attach  a  small  bunch  of  gay  feathers, 
but  I  do  not  know  that  it  much  improves  it.  I  have  no 
doubt,  also,  that  Mr.  Hearder's  plano-convex  spinner, 
which  is  contrived  on  a  somewhat  similar  principle,  would 
be  an  excellent  perch  lure,  as  it  is  for  all  kinds  of  other 
fish  that  take  spinning  baits,  both  in  fresh  and  salt 
water. 

Perch  sometimes  take  a  gentle,  but  worms  and  small 
fish  are  their  favourite  food,  and  they  will  often  take 
an  artificial  fly,  but,  save,  in  one  place,  where  it  was  often 
used,  I  never  knew  it  to  be  a  recognised  way  of  fishing  for 
them.  Perch  often  abound  so  in  ponds  that  they  never 
grow  above  half  a  pound  weight,  and  few,  perhaps,  reach 
that — overcrowding  and  want  of  food,  no  doubt,  is  the 
reason.  Perch  occasionally  reach  three  and  four  pounds 
weight,  and  even  bigger,  but  are  not  so  very  common  of 
that  size ;  a  two-pound  fish  is  a  very  handsome  fish,  and 
not  to  be  despised.  There  are  plenty  of  that  size  in  the 
Thames.  They  have  been  known  to  reach  eleven  pounds 
in  this  country ;  but  a  five  or  six  pound  fish  is  decidedly 
rare.  The  rod  for  patemostering  should  be  about  ten  or 
eleven  feet  long,  with  upright  rings,  pretty  stiff  and  strong. 


62  ANGLING. 

as  it  often  has  heavy  weights  to  stand.  A  friend  of  mine 
on  the  Kennet  once  had  three  perch  on  his  paternoster  at 
the  same  time.  He  estimated  them  at  close  on  seven 
pounds  together;  one  got  off,  but  he  landed  the  other  two. 
The  line,  too,  should  be  moderately  strong — eight-plait 
dressed  silk. 


THE   PIKE.  63 


CHAPTER  V. 

THE  PIKE  (Esox  lucius.) 

The  pike  has  a  widish  range,  being  found  all  over  Europe, 
and  having  two  or  three  representatives  in  America.  In 
this  country  we  have  all  sorts  of  stories  extant  of  the 
enormous  size  at  which  they  have  been  taken ;  but  some- 
where about  seventy  pounds  seems  to  be  the  outside  that 
we  may  take  it  has  really  been  captured,  and  an  angler 
may  count  himself  fortunate  if  in  the  course  of  his  life 
he  ever  get  on  equal  terms  with  one  half  th^t  size. 
Twenty-pounds  pike  are  now  sufficiently  common — much 
more  so  than  they  were  formerly ;  but  every  pound  above 
twenty-five  adds  more  and  more  to  their  rarity;  while 
thirty  or  over  are  by  no  means  common.  The  Lillieshall 
pike  story  has  many  of  the  elements  of  fable  about  it,  and 
all  the  elements  of  gross  exaggeration  ;  while  the  Manheim 
pike  reached  much  of  his  length  by  supplementary  verte- 
brse  which  never  belonged  to  him.  Pike  may  be  caught, 
1st,  by  spinning  ;  2ndly,  by  live  bait ;  3rdly,  by  trolling — 
these  being  the  three  chief  ways  of  taking  him.  The 
most  sportsmanlike,  as  well  as  the  most  attractive  and 
lively,  is  undoubtedly  by  spinning. 

The  art  of  spinning  consists  of  placing  a  fish  bait  on  a 
set  of  hooks  in  such  a  manner  that  when  the  bait  is  drawn 
through  the  water  it  revolves  rapidly,  and  to  this  end  the 


M  ANGLma. 

body  is  either  bent,  or  the  tail  crooked,  so  as  to  give  a  son 
of  Archimedian  screw  principle  to  the  whole  apparatus. 
The  tackle  used  is  of  two  parts — the  trace  or  line  to 
facilitate  the  spinning,  and  the  flight  of  hooks  on  which 
the  bait  is  to  be  hung.  The  trace  consists  of  two  lengths 
(each  about  two  feet  long)  of  gimp,  twisted  gut,  or  single 
>jut,  with  a  swivel  at  either  end,  and  one  between  the  two 
lengths.  Just  above  the  second  swivel  (from  the  bait)  the 
lead  or  sinker  should  be  attached.  This  is  sometimes  a 
chain  of  shot,  &c.,  Ac.,  but  there  is  nothing  so  good  as  a 
pipe  lead  threaded  on  a  bit  of  copper  wire,  as  this  can  be 
put  on  or  taken  off  the  trace  at  any  moment,  and  heavier 
or  lighter  lead  substituted  ;  and  if  the  lead  be  made  rather 
flat  on  one  side,  and  pot-bellied  on  the  other,  as  shown  in 
the  lead  appended  to  the  tackle  in  Fig.  6,  Plate  1,  it  will 
prevent  the  tackle  from  twisting  above  the  second  swivel, 
and  so  prevent  hanking  or  snarling  of  the  line,  which  is 
sometimes  veiy  troublesome  to  the  spinner. 

The  flight  of  hooks  is  a  matter  which  has  caused  great 
consideration.  They  must  allow  the  bait  to  spin  well,  and 
they  must  be  placed  so  as  to  take  the  best  hold  of  the 
fish ;  and  they  should  be  as  little  visible  as  possible  to  the 
squeamish  pike ;  for  pike  often  are  mighty  squeamish, 
and  will  follow  a  bait  for  yards  without  taking  it  if  they 
see  anything  suspicious  about  it.  Now,  the  old-fashioned 
three-triangle  tackle  with  a  sliding  lip  and  a  reversed  tail 
hook  is  that  which  obtains  the  most  general  favour ;  at 
Plate  1,  Pigs.  5  and  7,  this  may  be  seen  plain  and  baited. 
The  tail  triangle  should  be  inserted  in  the  middle  of  the 
tail,  the  tail  drawn  up  into  a  crook,  and  the  reversed 
hook  inserted  to  keep  it  so.  The  next  triangle  should  be 
inserted  somewhere  under  the  end  of  the  dorsal  fin,  and 
the  third  at  the  shoulder ;  two  or  three  turns  of  the  tackle 


THE   PIKE.  65 

are  taken  round  the  shank  of  the  sliding  lip  hook,  so  as 
to  bring  it  to  the  right  place  and  prevent  the  hook  from 
slipping,  and  it  is  then  hooked  through  the  lips  of  the 
bait  (through  the  lower  lip  first),  and  the  bait  is  armed. 
The  great  object  is  to  let  all  the  hooks  lie  evenly,  easily, 
and  in  a  line,  for  if  the  line  in  which  they  lie  be  crooked, 
or  the  space  between  each  hook  and  triangle  be  not  justly 
apportioned,  the  bait  will  not  spin  properly,  and  the  hooks 
must  be  re-adjusted  till  it  does.  If  the  young  fisherman 
can  get  half-an-hour's  counsel  from  an  old  Thames  punts- 
man,  he  will  learn  more  from  seeing  it  done  than  he  will 
by  reading  about  it  to  any  extent. 

At  Plate  2,  Figs.  1  and  2,  will  be  seen  plans  of  two  other 
tackles.  No.  1  is  Mr.  Pennel's,  and  No.  2  is  mine.  The 
method  of  baiting  the  last  is  shown  at  Fig.  3.  I  give  the 
preference  by  far  to  my  own  plan,  as  it  spins  a  bait 
admirably,  particularly  with  small  and  moderate  sized 
baits  ;  and  when  once  the  bait  does  spin  well  it  prevents 
it  from  ever  getting  out  of  spinning,  and  it  preserves  the 
bait  for  double  or  treble  as  long  as  any  other  tackle  does, 
and  when  baits  are  scarce  that  is  no  slight  consideration. 
I  have  fished  a  whole  day  for  large  Thames  trout  with  two 
baits,  and  they  never  got  out  of  gear  till  they  got  a  tug 
from  a  fish.  The  tackle  has  this  further  advantage,  that 
it  shows  less  than  any  other,  and  the  chief  triangle  stands 
out  so  well  that  it  cannot  easily  miss  the  fish.  For  large 
trout  or  moderate  sized  pike  baits,  to  my  mind,  it  is  better 
than  any  other.  I  once  killed  ten  pike  at  Lord  Craven's 
with  it,  which  averaged  131b.  each,  and  I  did  not  lose  a 
fish.  When  I  need  to  use  larger  baits,  I  prefer  Mr.  Wood's 
adaptation  of  the  Chapman  spinner,  as  more  satisfactory 
in  every  way.  I  shall  refer  to  this  presently.  However, 
everybody  does  not  hold  my  opinion,  so  I  have  given  plans 

F 


66  ANGLTNO. 

of  the  other  tackles.  There  are  many  other  arrangements 
of  hooks,  but  these  are  much  the  best.* 

The  directions  given  for  putting  a  bait  on  refer  to  fish 
such  as  the  dace,  gudgeon,  or  any  small  fish  of  such  like 
rounded  shape ;  with  a  bleak  or  roach  the  method  slightly 
differs.  The  body  of  the  fish  must  be  set  on  the  hooks, 
not  straight,  with  a  mere  crook  to  the  tail,  but  in  some- 
thing of  a  bow  like  the  outline  of  the  bowl  of  a  spoon. 
(See  Plate  2,  Fig.  3.)  The  Nottingham  spinners  get  a  very 
good  spin  out  of  a  roach  by  means  of  only  two  good-sized 
triangles  and  a  lip  hook.  They  hook  the  lowest  into  the 
back,  behind  the  dorsal  fin,  give  the  body  a  slight  bend, 
then  hook  the  second  into  the  shoulder  of  the  bait,  pass 
the  thread  of  gimp  through  the  gills,  and  out  of  the 
mouth,  fix  the  lip  hook,  and  the  bait  spins  well. 

Of  all  the  artificial  aids  to  spinning  there  is  only  one 
which  I  think  worth  notice,  and  that  is  the  Chapman 
spinner;  and  until  Mr.  Wood  devised  his  method  of 
arming  it,  which  overcomes  the  objections  to  it,  I  had  but 
a  small  opinion  of  that.  The  Chapman  spinner  is  a  piece 
of  brass  wire  with  a  lead  cast  on  to  it,  and  a  pair  of 
Archimedian  fans  at  the  head,  and  two  sets  of  triangle 
hooks  hanging  from  either  side,  but  in  the  original 
Chapman  these  were  fixed,  as  was  the  gimp  with  which  it 
was  attached,  to  the  trace.  The  wire  and  lead  were  thrust 
down  the  throat  and  into  the  belly  of  the  bait,  the  upper 
hooked  in  either  side.  The  result  was  that  after  some 
little  use  the  hooks  worked  loose,  and  the  mouth  of  the 
bait — originally  close  up  to  the  fan  of  the  apparatus — 

*  Mr.  Wood  has  also  brought  out  a  new  arrangement  of 
hooks,  which  he  sets  great  store  by  as  losing  very  few  fish.  It 
is  rather  complicated,  so  I  do  not  attempt  to  give  a  cut  of  it 
here.     It  is  an  excellent  tackle,  however. 


THE  PIKE.  67 

dropped  away  from  it,  and  there  was  a  gap  between  the 
head  of  the  bait  and  the  f an ;  and  as  the  lead  and  wire 
got  play,  the  whole  thing  worked  more  and  more  loose, 
and  the  spinning  became  affected,  besides  the  fan  being 
half  an  inch  or  more  apart  from  the  head.  Mr.  Wood's 
improvement  was  to  make  a  loop  of  the  gimp  on  which 
the  two  sets  of  hooks  were  fastened,  which  slid  through 
the  eye  of  the  wire,  as  shown  in  Plate  2,  Fig.  4 ;  thus  when 
the  spinner  was  baited,  the  loop  sliding  always  kept  the 
mouth  of  the  bait  close  to  the  fan.  This  is  now  a  capital 
method,  as  it  preserves  the  baits  wonderfully  well,  so  that 
you  may  often  catch  two  or  three  fish  with  one  bait.  All 
you  have  to  do  is  to  graduate  your  fans  to  the  size  of  your 
bait,  increasing  the  size  of  them  as  you  use  a  larger  bait. 
T  also  flatten  the  lead  and  widen  it  as  much  as  as  I  can  to 
prevent  any  turning  round  in  the  belly  of  the  bait. 

Having  now  described  the  tackle  and  the  method  of 
baiting  it,  I  proceed  to  the  rod  and  line,  and  then  to  the 
modtis  operandi.  The  rod  used  by  the  London  fishers, 
who  are  perhaps  the  best  pike  fishers  in  the  world,  is  a  rod 
about  12ft.  or  13ft.  long  (though  of  late  years  they  have 
taken  to  using  a  shorter  one  than  that),  pretty  stout  but 
springy,  being  capable  of  standing  plenty  of  wear  and 
tear,  and  a  good  pull,  with  upright  rings  to  let  the  line 
pass  easily  and  tops  of  two  stiffnesses  and  lengths,  one  to 
take  heavier  baits  and  larger  fish,  and,  therefore,  shorter 
and  stiffer  than  the  other,  which  is  for  ordinary  work. 
Many  anglers  like  these  rods  to  be  made  of  strong  bamboo, 
as  being  somewhat  lighter  in  a  long  day's  work  ;  I,  how- 
ever, much  prefer  solid  wood,  either  of  hickory  or  green- 
heart,  as  the  weight,  not  falling  on  any  one  set  of  muscles, 
and  being  a  good  deal  thrown  on  the  thigh  or  hip  while 
spinning,  is  of  no  consequence  :  while,  I  think,  solid  wood 

P  2 


68  ANGLING. 

stands  long  and  heavy  work  better  than  bamboo,  and  if 
you  chance  upon  a  heavy  fish  of  from  121b.  to  201b.,  or 
even  more  (as  one  may  sometimes),  you  feel  more  at  home 
and  more  safe  with  him.  I  think,  too,  that  a  solid  rod,  if 
properly  made,  has  a  better  spring  and  casts  a  better  bait 
than  cane.  The  rod  should  have  a  large  button  on  the 
end  of  the  butt  to  rest  against  the  hip  comfortably ;  those 
of  rubber  are  best,  as  they  do  not  slip.  The  line  should  be 
of  eight-plait  dressed  silk,  not  too  coarse  or  thick,  as  it 
does  not  run  so  freely  through  the  rings,  and  not  too  fine, 
or  it  will  not  stand  the  work,  and  is  apt  pot  only  to  wear 
out  speedily  but  to  tangle  and  kink  when  it  gets  wet. 
This  kinking  in  pike  spinning  is  sometimes  a  great 
nuisance.  It  comes  from  the  swivels  not  working  properly, 
and  the  spinning  being  continued  up  the  running  line; 
and  the  best  way  to  prevent  it  is  to  have  most  of  your 
swivels  helow  the  lead,  and  to  use  a  Field  lead,  the  balance 
of  which,  being  all  on  one  side,  prevents  all  the  line  above 
it  from  turning  round  or  spinning.  Always  after  using 
your  lines — and  this  applies  to  all  lines — before  putting 
them  away,  unreel  them  and  wind  them  round  the  back 
of  a  chair  to  dry  thoroughly,  or  they  will  very  soon  rot. 
In  choosing  a  line  pick  out  one  that  is  not  too  hard  in  the 
dressing,  or  you  may  find  the  dressing  crack  at  intervals 
in  using,  and  your  line  become  a  sort  of  chain,  in  links  as 
it  were,  with  soft  places  every  foot  or  two.  Neither  should 
it  be  damp  or  sticky,  or  in  a  very  short  time  you  will  find 
the  dressing  wear  off.  Choose  one  that  feels  dry  and  firm 
in  the  grasp,  but  not  wiry,  and  always  give  it  a  trial  by  a 
strongish  tug  before  purchasing,  as  these  dressed  lines, 
owing  to  some  bad  material  either  in  the  substance  or  the 
dressing,  are  not  unfrequently  rendered  utterly  rotten  by 
the  dressing.     Some  people  when  they  have  worn  off  the 


THE   PIKE.  69 

dressing  have  their  lines  re-dressed,  but  they  are  very 
seldom  worth  it.  Choose  a  line  about  50yds.  or  60yds. 
long,  so  that  when  one  end  begins  to  wear  you  can  turn 
it  end  for  end  and  use  the  other.  When  both  are  worn, 
if  the  line  has  been  a  good  one  and  has  been  fairly  treated, 
it  does  not  owe  you  much,  and  you  had  better,  for  your 
own  comfort  and  satisfaction,  buy  another ;  a  winch  with 
a  light  check  action  is  the  best.  Many  people  nowadays 
prefer  to  cast  from  the  reel  in  the  Nottingham  style.  To 
those  who  do  I  have  nothing  to  say.  It  has  some 
advantages,  but  I  do  not  think  you  can  cast  as  long  a  line 
with  it,  as  of  course  there  must  be  more  friction. 

We  now  come  to  the  modus  operandi.  Having  run  your 
line  through  the  rings,  fastened  on  the  trace  and  hooks 
and  baited  the  latter,  raise  the  rod  with  the  butt  resting 
against  your  thigh  or  hip,  the  bait  hanging  down  to  about 
half  the  length  of  the  rod.  Di*aw  off  the  reel  as  much 
line  as  you  think  you  can  cast,  and  let  it  lie  at  your  feet 
(usually  on  the  left  side)  in  loose  coils,  but  so  that  there 
may  be  no  catch  or  tangle.  Then  holding  the  line  to  the 
rod,  with  the  right  hand  above  the  reel  and  grasping  the 
rod  with  the  left  below  the  reel,  wave  the  rod  backwards 
to  give  the  bait  a  swing,  and  having  done  so  reverse  the 
motion  and  wave  it  forwards  more  smartly,  giving  it  a 
heave  at  the  same  time  towards  the  point  you  want  your 
bait  to  reach,  and  release  the  line  held  tight  to  the  rod  by 
the  right  hand  at  the  same  moment.  The  bait  will  fly 
towards  the  spot  you  aim  at,  carrying  the  line  which  was 
on  the  ground  beside  you  out  through  the  rings  to  its 
fullest  extent,  and,  if  you  have  managed  it  properly,  will 
fall  into  the  water  with  a  slight  splash  twenty,  thirty,  or 
forty  yards  away ;  then  giving  the  bait  a  moment  or  two 
to  sink,  according  to  the  depth  of  the  water  you  are  fishing, 


70  ANGLING. 

lower  the  point  of  the  rod  till  it  is  about  parallel  with  the 
surface  of  the  water.  The  butt  of  the  rod  should  be  rested 
on  the  hip  or  thigh,  and  then  with  the  left  hand  draw  the 
line  home  through  the  rings  about  a  yard  at  a  time,  and 
let  it  fall  at  your  side,  raising  and  plying  the  rod  at  every 
pull  to  make  the  bait  shoot  and  dart  in  the  water ;  and  if 
this  be  done  properly  it  should  come  spinning  and  darting 
along  in  a  way  very  attractive  to  the  pike,  who,  if  inclined 
to  feed,  will  often  dash  at  it  and  single  it  out  among  a 
crowd  of  baits.  When  the  pike  seizes  it,  you  will  feel  a 
check  or  a  drag,  more  or  less  pronounced,  at  the  rod  top. 
Strike  directly  and  smartly,  and  then  hold  him  hard  for  a 
minute  or  two  if  you  can,  so  as  to  be  sure  the  hooks  work 
home  over  the  barbs  ;  for  a  pike's  mouth  is  very  hard  and 
gristly,  and  if  two  or  three  hooks  chance  to  stick  in,  it 
requires  much  force  to  make  them  penetrate  over  the 
barbs ;  and  if  they  do  not  so  penetrate,  the  first  time  the 
pike  opens  his  mouth  and  shakes  his  head,  away  come  the 
hooks  and  you  lose  your  fish.  When  this  happens  cast 
again  directly  without  losing  a  second  if  your  bait  is  still 
on,  no  matter  whether  it  spins  or  no,  and  it  is  not  more 
than  about  three  to  one  that  he  will  not  seize  it  again 
directly.  K,  however,  you  give  him  time  while  you  are 
adjusting  the  bait,  Ac,  reflection  will  probably  make 
him  wary. 

There  are  all  sorts  of  theories  as  regards  striking,  but 
none  of  them  are  infallible,  and  none  can  always  be  carried 
out  so  as  to  have  the  desired  effect.  The  alteration  in  the 
position  of  the  fish  makes  all  the  difference,  and,  as  there 
are  about  fifteen  or  twenty  various  points  of  the  compass 
whence  a  fish  may  come  at  the  bait,  and  every  one  alters 
the  position,  and  consequently  the  result  of  the  strike, 
perhaps  one  way  is  as  good  as  another;  so  strike  as  is 


THE   PIKE.  71 

most  convenient  to  yourself,  strike  hard,  and  hold  on,  and 
with  all  that  and  every  improvement  in  tackle,  nothing 
will  prevent  you  losing  fish  at  times.  If  fish  are  taking 
well,  the  hooks  are  large,  and  the  tackle  sound,  and  you 
hit  'em  hard,  you  will  lose  very  few ;  if  the  reverse  obtains 
you  may  lose  a  good  many. 

As  to  how  to  play  him,  do  your  best,  hang  on  to 
him,  and  give  no  line  unless  you  can't  help  it ;  a  slack 
line  is  the  abomination  of  desolation,  and  usually  pro- 
duces desolation.  Beyond  all,  if  you  can,  keep  your 
fish  deep  in  the  water,  and  as  far  as  you  are  able — 
and  that  is  not  very  far — don't  have  any  of  that  ill- 
judged  tumbling  or  shaking  on  the  top  of  the  water. 
When  a  pike  grins  and  flies  and  barks  at  you,  like  Mr. 
Briggs's,  on  the  surface,  it  is  dangerous  ;  drop  the  rod 
point  and  drown  the  line  as  much  as  you  can,  and  don't, 
whatever  you  do,  pull  at  him ;  let  him  have  his  head  free, 
or  it  is  about  ten  to  one  you  pull  the  hooks  out  with  his 
assistance.  The  shakers  are  the  worst  sect  among  pike,  and 
the  jumpers  are  next ;  particularly  big  ones  will  often  go 
to  weed.  They  rush  head  first  into  a  bank  as  big  as  a 
horse  or  perhaps  an  elephant,  and  grip  fast  hold  of  a  big 
bunch  with  their  teeth,  and  leave  you  to  pull  at  the  weed. 
It  is  about  a  hundred  to  one  here  that  they  do  you.  All 
the  best  pike  I  ever  hooked,  say  a  dozen  perhaps,  got  off 
in  that  way.*  I  imagine  that  with  the  help  of  the  weed 
they  chew  the  hooks  into  it,  and  out  of  thenif  for  you 
always  find  weed  on  the  hooks  after  one  of  these  feats, 


*  Except  one,  and  that  was  a  thirty-pounder,  lost  by  the 
blundering  and  fright  combined  of  the  boatman,  after  he  was 
dead  beat  and  lying  along  the  side  of  the  boat,  perfectly  supine. 
Ay  di  me !  That  was  a  moment  when  my  language  was  ornate 
and  varied,  I  fear. 


72  ANGLING. 

showing  that  they  have  had  it  in  their  mouths.  "  What 
are  tou  to  do  in  such  a  case  ?  "  Well,  as  I  couldn't  tell 
then,  I  can't  tell  now ;  if  a  twenty-five  or  thirty  pound  pike 
wiU  go  into  weed  you  may  break  your  rod  over  him,  or  your 
line,  or  both ;  but  you  won't  prevent  him.  In  fact,  there 
is  no  *'  statute  in  that  case  made  or  provided,"  and  as  the 
Yankees  say,  "  you  must  just  do  your  darndest,  I 
calc'late ; "  whatever  that  may  be. 

Be  careful  in  landing  your  fish;  get  him  in  the  net 
as  soon  as  you  can,  but  do  it  carefully  and  cleanly, 
no  bungling  or  dashing,  but  a  big  steady  scoop  and 
a  lift  up,  and  take  care  he  does  not  jump  out  or  tumble 
out  and  leave  the  hooks  in  the  net.  I  had  that  happen 
once  to  an  eight-pound  fish,  and  my  poor  old  friend 
Frank  Matthews,  the  actor,  caught  the  same  fish  a 
quarter  of  an  hour  after,  and  his  head  is  grinning  at  me 
now  from  the  opposite  wall  in  tnemoriam,  and  that  was 
thirty -two  years  ago.  Dear  me!  My  phiz  has  altered  more 
than  yours,  I  expect,  old  acquaintance,  for  I  can't  get 
Coopered*  like  you  were. 

When  you  land  your  fish,  unless  you  want  to  put 
him  in  the  well  or  keep  him  alive,  knock  him  on  the 
head  at  once  before  he  tangles  your  tackle  into  twenty 
heaps  in  the  net,  or  breaks  it  in  his  floimces.  Then  ex- 
tract the  hooks  carefully,  and  mind  your  fingers.  A  pair 
of  stout  tweezers  and  Rolfe's  pike  gag  are  useful  here ;  in 
default  of  the  latter,  stick  a  bung  in  his  mouth  to  keep  it 
safely  open  during  the  extraction.  A  disgorger  (see 
Plate  2,  Fig.  5)  to  push  out  the  hooks  is  also  useful.  Look 
the  tackle  over  very  carefully  to  see  that  there  are  no  breaks 


*  AUnding  to  my  old  acquaintance,  Mr.  Cooper,  the  fish 
stnfFer,  who  "  set  him  up  " — now,  alas !  gone  from  amongst  us, 
but  eucceeded  worthily  by  his  son. — ^F.  F. 


THE   PIKE.  73 

or  injury,  and  then  re-bait,  and  at  it  again.  Take  'em  while 
they're  in  the  humour,  as  that  doesn't  happen  all  day 
long  with  pike,  but  often  only  for  an  hour  or  so,  when  all 
your  work  must  be  done.  In  the  chief  season  for  pike 
fishing,  viz.,  from  November  to  February,  inclusive,  the 
best  time  runs  from  eleven  to  three  in  the  day.  You  may, 
of  course,  catch  fish  before  and  after  that,  but  that  is  when 
the  cream  rises,  so  mind  you  skim  it  carefully.  In  spinning, 
fish  the  water  nearest  to  you  first,  and  then  lengthen  the 
casts,  and  having  fished  over  all  the  water  within  reach, 
move  on. 

The  rate  at  which  you  spin  will  be  a  good  deal 
determined  by  the  depth  of  the  water.  In  deeper  water 
you  must  spin  more  slowly  than  in  shallow,  so  as  to  give 
the  fish  more  time  both  to  see  and  to  secure  the  bait ;  and 
the  lead,  of  course,  must  be  suited  to  the  depth  of  the 
water.  It  will  often  happen  that  you  have  water  to  fish 
over  where  the  weeds  often  approach  very  near  the  surface, 
and  when,  consequently,  you  need  to  spin  as  near  it  as 
possible  over  the  top  of  the  weeds.  In  this  event,  of  course, 
you  use  no  lead  at  all,  the  weight  of  the  bait  and  line 
being  quite  enough :  and  you  must  also  get  the  draw  on 
the  line  as  soon  as  possible,  before  even  the  bait  makes  to 
the  weeds,  or  you  will  certainly  have  to  make  a  fresh  cast. 
Pike — big  pike,  especially — only  feed  at  intervals  of  a  day 
or  two,  or  even  longer,  when  they  take  a  big  meal,  and  then, 
like  boa-constrictors,  take  time  to  digest  it ;  the  angler 
should  remember  this ;  it  may  sometimes  save  him  from 
disappointment  when  going  for  some  special  "  big  *un." 

All  sorts  of  artificial  spinning  baits  are  used  for  pike. 
Spoons,  otters,  phantoms,  gutta-percha  fish  of  all  sorts, 
glass  baits,  plano-convexes,  and  kill-devils:  their  name 
is  legion.     A  good-sized  spoon  is  often  as  good  as  any. 


74  ANGLING. 

All  or  any  of  them  may  be  had  at  most  of  the  fishing- 
tackle  makers,  and  the  angler  can  take  his  choice.  After 
spinning,  the  next  method  of  taking  pike  is  that  called 
trolling,  with  a  dead  gorge  bait.  The  dead  gorge  hook  is 
composed  of  a  piece  of  twisted  brass  wire,  with  an  eye  at 
one  end  and  a  pair  of  hooks  at  the  other ;  and  from  the 
hooks  to  some  distance  up  the  wire  there  is  cast  on  to  the 
apparatus  a  long  plummet  of  lead  (see  Plate  2,  Fig.  7).  To 
the  eye  of  the  wire  is  fastened  ten  inches  or  so  of  gimp. 
When  this  hook  is  to  be  baited,  a  baiting  needle  is  used 
(Fig.  6),  the  loop  of  the  gimp  l)eing  slipped  into  the  eye 
of  the  needle,  as  shown  in  the  cut.  A  gudgeon,  dace,  or 
other  small  fish,  suitable  to  the  size  of  the  hook,  is  then 
selected,  the  point  of  the  needle  inserted  into  the  mouth  of 
the  bait,  passed  down  along  the  backbone  of  the  fish,  and 
out  at  the  tail.  The  gimp  is  then  pulled  through,  the 
apparatus  following  it  until  the  lead  is  buried  in  the  body 
of  the  bait,  the  hooks  remaining  outside  on  either  side  of 
the  mouth.  The  tail  is  then  lashed  round  with  a  piece  of 
thread  so  as  to  secure  it  from  slipping  down  (Plate  2, 
Fig.  8),  the  needle  is  then  disengaged,  and  the  bait  looped 
on  to  the  trace,  which  is  usually  about  a  yard  of  gimp, 
with  one  biggish  swivel  attached.  The  trace  having  been 
previously  knotted  to  the  reel  or  running  line,  all  is  now 
ready  for  action,  the  same  rod  and  line  as  is  used  for 
spiuning  sufficing. 

This  tackle  is  more  often  used  in  weedy  places  than  not, 
as  it  does  not  catch  in  the  weeds  like  a  spinning  tackle. 
Drop  the  bait  into  the  water  to  the  full  extent  of  the  rod, 
letting  it  go  almost  to  the  bottom,  which  it  will  do  with  a 
shoot,  then  pull  it  up  with  short  irregular  jerks  to  the 
surface,  making  it  rise  and  fall,  and  shoot  hither  and 
thither,  which  it  will  do  ;  and  having  fished  all  the  water 


THE   PIKE.  75 

within  reach,  pitch  it  a  yard  or  two  further  out,  and  so  on 
till  you  have  tested  thoroughly  all  the  water  within  your 
reach.  When  you  get  a  bite — you  will  feel  a  sudden 
snatch — drop  the  line  and  the  point  of  the  rod  instantly^ 
and  let  the  fish  do  what  he  pleases  and  go  where  he  likes 
with  the  bait,  giving  out  line  freely  to  him,  for  if  you 
check  him  he  will  probably  spit  out  the  bait  and  you  will 
lose  your  run.  When  the  fish  has  taken  the  bait  he  will 
require  from  seven  to  eight  minutes  to  swallow  or  pouch 
it,  and  you  must  let  him  have  that  space  of  time  accord- 
ingly as  you  think  him  large  or  small,  as  the  large  one 
will  probably  get  your  bait  down  sooner  than  a  small  one, 
but  you  must  beware  of  striking  too  soon  ;  one  thing  is 
sure,  that  if  you  do  not  at  first  you  will  soon  learn  to  by 
losing  your  fish.  When  the  time  is  up  raise  your  rod 
point'  smartly  and  hold  on  as  well  as  you  can,  as  being 
probably  in  the  midst  of  a  lot  of  weeds  the  less  line  you 
give  the  better. 

Sometimes  when  a  fish  takes  he  will  not  go  two  yards 
from  the  spot,  but  will  lie  still  and  pouch  at  his  ease  ; 
sometimes,  however,  he  will  go  away  twenty  yards  or 
more,  and  in  the  midst  of  pouching  even  will  move  off 
again,  hauling  your  line  through  masses  of  weeds,  which 
is  not  pleasant,  but  has  to  be  endured.  Then  you  must 
do  your  best  not  to  check  him,  nor  if  you  can  help  it  to 
get  entangled  in  the  weeds.  No  advice  can  be  given  on 
this  head.  You  must  just  do  the  best  you  can,  and  be 
guided  by  circumstances.  If  after  the  fish  has  been  only 
five  or  six  minutes  pouching  he  begins  to  move  off,  he  has 
probably  already  swallowed  the  bait  and  you  may  chance 
striking  him  if  you  like  to  risk  it,  and  often  will  land  your 
fish  ;  but  now  and  then  you  will  lose  him,  which,  when  he 
moves  like  that,  you  may  aiblins  do  whether  you  strike  or 


76  ANGLING. 

no.  The  most  aggravating  part  of  the  process  is  when 
you  have  waited  patiently  for  the  regulation  ten  minutes 
— «very  minute  seeming  ten  at  least — to  strike  and  find 
that  your  fish  has  left  you  probably  some  eight  minutes 
and  a  half  or  so.  Indeed  the  waiting  is  a  great  trial,  and 
it  ia  not  a  method  of  pike  fishing  I  hanker  after,  though 
in  very  weedy  places  it  is  not  only  the  best  but  often  the 
only  method  possible.  The  worst  of  it  is  that  you  must 
kill  all  the  fish  you  hook  whether  they  are  big  or  little ; 
and  you  often  thus  are  obliged  to  kill  small  undersized  fish, 
which  is  very  objectionable. 

The  last  method  of  pike  fishing,  and  perhaps  the  most 
killing  of  all,  is  angling  with  the  live  bait.  This  may  be 
done  with  the  paternoster,  as  already  described.  For  this 
one  or  at  most  two  hooks  are  held  to  be  sufficient.  The 
lowest  hook  should  be  about  a  foot  above  the  plummet, 
and  the  upper  according  to  the  depth  of  the  water,  from 
one  foot  to  eighteen  inches  above  it.  Some  persons  use  a 
stoutish  single  hook  for  this  purpose,  a  size  or  so  larger 
than  that  used  for  perch,  and  of  course  tied  on  gimp,  the 
trace  or  tackle  to  which  the  hooks  are  fastened  being  of 
three-ply  twisted  gut  or  gimp.  I  like  the  former,  as  being 
less  visible.  As  regards  the  hooks,  however,  instead  of 
single  hooks  I  prefer  moderate-sized  triangles,  as,  the 
pike's  mouth  being  rough  and  gristly,  one  hook  is  apt  to 
give  out  where  two  hold  firmly. 

One  of  the  best  double  triangle  tackles  for  live  baiting, 
whether  with  paternoster  or  float,  is  that  invented  by 
Mr.  Alfred  Jardine,  one  of  our  most  successful  pike 
fishers.  He  uses  two  triangles,  one  to  fix  on  the  lip, 
and  the  other  in  the  dorsal  fin.  These  triangles  are 
composed  of  two  large  hooks,  and  one  small  one,  the 
small  one  projecting  about  half  way   down  the  shanks 


THE   PIKE.  17 

of  tLe  others.  The  small  ones  are  used  for  hooking' 
the  bait  on,  and  Mr.  Jardine  says  that  they  interfere 
less  with  the  motions  of  the  bait,  and  keep  him  alive 
longer  than  any  other.  In  float  fishing  he  puts  the  upper 
triangle  in  at  the  lip,  and  the  lower  or  end  one  in  at  the 
dorsal  fin.  In  paternostering  he  reverses  them,  and  puts 
the  upper  triangle  through  the  root  of  the  dorsal  fin, 
and  the  end  one  through  the  root  of  the  pectoral  fin. 
There  is  a  space  of  nearly  two  inches  of  gimp  bare  between 
the  triangles.  This  does  for  moderate-sized  baits.  The 
bait  should  be  either  a  small  gudgeon,  roach,  or  dace. 
They  must  not  be  too  large,  as  the  object  is  to  get  the  pike 
to  take  as  much  of  the  bait  into  his  mouth  at  a  gulp  a& 
possible.  In  small  baits  with  single  hooks  or  triangles  it 
is  best  to  hook  them  on  through  the  lip,  as  they  live  longer 
and  are  more  lively  so ;  but  in  baits  a  size  or  do  larger 
you  should  hook  them  on  through  the  root  of  the  back  fin. 

The  method  of  using  a  paternoster  for  pike  is  just  the 
same  as  that  used  in  perch  fishing,  only  it  is  best 
when  you  get  a  bite  to  give  the  pike  a  little  more  time 
before  striking  if  possible ;  and  when  you  do  strike  him 
take  care  never  to  slacken  line  more  than  you  can  help. 
When  pike  come  into  your  swim  while  barbel  or  roach  fish- 
ing, you  may  often  put  a  bait  on  the  ledger  hook  with 
effect;  but  it  is  as  well  to  put  a  gimp  hook  on  before 
doing  so. 

The  most  common  method  of  fishing  with  the  live 
bait,  however,  is  to  use  a  float  and  a  single  bait.  This 
float  should  be  a  big-bellied  one,  made  of  cork,  and 
shaped  like  an  q^'^.  They  are  made  from  the  size  of  a 
bantam's  egg  for  small  baits  up  to  a  common  hen's  egg 
for  large  ones,  and  the  tackle  must  be  leaded  sufficiently 
to  keep  the  bait  down  into  the  water  ;  and,  to  prevent  its. 


78  ANGLING. 

coming  up  to  the  top,  a  small  pistol  bullet  generally 
suffices  for  this  purpose,  or  an  ordinary  spinning  lead, 
equal  to  the  work,  is  better  still,  as  less  liable  to  catch  in 
weeds ;  this  being  threaded  on  the  tackle  about  a  foot 
above  the  bait,  is  either  plugged  or  compressed  at  the 
ends,  80  as  to  secure  it  on  the  line,  and  keep  it  in  its  place. 
If  painted  green  it  is  less  remarkable  in  clear  water.  The 
tackle  used  is  either  that  known  as  live  snap  tackle  or  live 
gorge  tackle.  The  first  is  arranged  so  that  the  hooks  may 
hang  beside  and  about  the  middle  of  the  belly  of  the  bait, 
so  that  when  the  pike  seizes  the  bait — which  he  usually 
does  crosswise — the  head  and  tail  of  the  bait  lying  to 
either  aide  of  his  jaws,  the  belly  and  the  attendant  hooks 
are  inside  his  mouth,  and  you  can  then  strike  at  once  as 
Boon  as  your  float  goes  well  down  without  further  delay, 
and  about  seyen  times  in  ten  you  will  hook  your  fish. 
In  the  other  three  it  will  mostly  happen  that  the  hooks 
are  outside  his  mouth,  or  that  in  seizing  them  he  has  so 
disarranged  them  that  they  do  not  take  a  fair  hold. 

There  are  various  snap  tackles.  The  best  of  them  is 
Mr.  Jardine's,  already  described.  The  best  single  triangle 
snap  tackle  is  shown  in  Figs.  I  and  2,  Plate  3,  the  tackle 
is  shown  unbaited  and  baited.  In  this  one  the  single  hook 
is  fixed,  but  some  persons  prefer  a  single  hook  that  slides 
on  a  single  eye  like  the  lip  hook  in  spinning  tackle.  The 
distance,  then,  being  judged,  two  or  three  turns  of  the 
gimp  are  made  round  the  shank  to  fix  it.  The  hook  is  put 
through  the  lips  of  the  bait,  and  the  triangle  is  hitched  up 
with  a  slight  hold  behind  the  dorsal  fin.  This  method  is 
thought  to  keep  the  bait  alive  longer.  Those  who  prefer 
it  can  adopt  it ;  but  if  the  fish  wiU  take  the  snap  tackle  at 
aill  I  find  the  other  quite  effective  enough.  All  that  you 
want  to  bear  in  mind  is  not  to  use  any  more  roughness,  nor 


THE   PIKE.  79 

to  make  longer  throws,  than  is  necessary,  so  that  the  bait 
may  not  be  knocked  about  too  much. 

In  the  Thames,  and  other  waters  like  it,  where  the  fish 
are  much  fished  for,  they  get  oftentimes  veiT  shy,  and  the 
appearance  of  so  many  large  hooks  about  the  bait  will 
often  deter  pike  from  taking  it — in  this  case  the  method  of 
fishing  with  live  gorge  tackle  is  employed.  I  give  illustra- 
tions at  Fig.  3,  Plate  3,  of  this  tackle,  baited  and  unbaited. 
To  bait  it  you  take  a  baiting  needle,  and  slipping  the  loop 
of  the  gimp  into  the  eye,  insert  the  point  of  the  needle 
into  the  skin  at  the  shoulder,  and,  pushing  the  needle 
along  under  the  skin,  bring  it  out  near  the  tail ;  and  then 
drawing  the  gimp  down  until  the  pair  of  hooks  are 
arrested  by  the  skin,  take  off  the  needle  and  loop  the  gimp 
on  to  the  trace.  With  this  tackle  you  can  make  longer 
throws  without  losing  your  bait  than  you  can  with  the  snap 
hooks.  When  your  float  goes  down  you  must  give  the 
pike  time  to  pouch ;  and  wherever  he  goes  you  must  let 
off  line  so  as  not  to  check  him  in  his  run  in  the  least,  or 
he  will  leave  the  bait.  Indeed  he  will  often  do  so  whether 
checked  or  no,  and  not  unfrequently  with  snap  tackle  will 
cut  the  bait  off,  and  leave  your  hook  or  line  fast  in  a  weed, 
which  is  trying  to  the  feelings.  When  he  has  pouched, 
which  will  be  in  from  five  to  eight  or  ten  minutes,  strike, 
and  get  out  your  fish  as  well  as  you  can. 

I  confess  that  I  am  not  much  enamoured  of  this  style  of 
fishing  and  seldom  adopt  it,  as  the  hooks  are  always  down 
the  fish's  throat  when  you  hook  him,  and  you  must  kill 
every  fish  you  hook,  and  many  pound  and  pound  and  a  half 
fish  fall  victims  to  it,  which  caught  on  snap  tackle  you 
would  return  to  the  water.  Still  it  is  a  method  largely 
adopted,  particularly  on  the  Thames,  and  I  am  compelled 
to  notice  it. 


80  ANGLING. 

The  trace  for  live  baitiDg  should  be  either  of  gimp  or 
treble  gut,  and  should  have  a  swivel  at  each  end  of  the 
tackle.  The  lower  one,  to  which  the  hook  link  is 
appended,  should  be  a  hook  swivel,  so  that  the  loop  may 
easily  be  taken  off  or  put  on.  On  therunning  or  reel  line, 
about  a  yard  or  so  above  the  float  should  be  fastened  a  bit 
of  cork  to  prevent  the  line  from  sinking  and  entangling 
with  the  tackle  or  bait.  The  float  should  be  set  so  that 
the  bait  may  be  a  foot  or  two  from  the  bottom.  Of  course 
the  presence  or  absence  of  weeds  will  in  some  measure 
regulate  this  matter.  In  live  baiting  it  is  very  desirable 
that  your  bait  should  be  lively  and  work  well ;  when  it 
gets  dull  and  dead  in  its  motions  take  it  off  and  put  on 
another.  If  it  be  a  dace  or  gudgeon  kill  it,  and  lay  it 
aside  for  spinning,  for  which  it  will  do  as  well  as  the  best. 

When  fish  cannot  be  got  for  bait,  frogs  and  other  things 
are  sometimes  used.  To  bait  a  frog  you  want  a  largeish 
long-shanked  hook,  and,  putting  the  hook  through  the 
under  lip,  draw  it  down  till  the  bend  reaches  the  hind  leg, 
when  tie  the  bend  on  to  the  frog's  thigh  with  a  bit  of  silk. 

Artificial  frogs,  mice,  rats,  &c.,  are  sometimes  used  in 
default  of  better  baits.  The  head  and  tail  of  an  eel,  too, 
is  used  in  some  places  for  a  rough  method  of  spinning, 
but  no  one  would  use  these  means  who  could  procure  fish ; 
even  the  artificial  fly  is  sometimes  employed  for  pike, 
though  perhaps  an  artificial  bird  would  be  the  proper 
name — a  huge  two  hooked  thing,  with  the  eyes  of  a  pair 
of  peacock  feathers  for  wings,  and  a  big  fur  body  well 
tinselled,  is  the  proper  lure ;  and  when  the  fish  will  take 
it  fairly  it  is  by  no  means  an  unpleasant  method  of  fishing. 
Cast  it  and  work  it  like  a  salmon  fly,  of  which  more 
anon. 


TEOUT  FISHINa  WITH  BAIT.  81 


CHAPTEE  VI. 

TROUT  FISHING  WITH  BAIT. 

THE   TEOUT  (Salmo  fario). 

The  trout  is  very  widely  distributed,  Africa  being  the  only 
quarter  of  the  globe  where  it  is  not  found,  and  as  a  fish 
for  table  or  for  sporting  purposes  it  is  second  only  to  the 
salmon.  Indeed,  it  is  a  question  whether  on  the  whole, 
taking  into  consideration  the  means  employed,  the  trout 
does  not  furnish  as  much  or  more  sport  than  the  salmon  ; 
if  nicety  and  skill  are  any  measure  of  sport  it  certainly 
furnishes  far  more. 

Every  means  yet  named  of  fishing  for  other  fish  can  be 
employed  against  the  trout — bottom  fishing  with  bait  of 
all  kinds;  middle  fishing,  both  with  spinning  and  live 
bait ;  and  surface  fishing,  both  with  natural  and  artificial 
fly.  In  bait  fishing,  the  worm,  of  course,  takes  the  chief 
place,  and  there  are  two  ways  of  worm  fishing,  one  by 
dropping  the  worm  into  the  stream,  and  letting  it  travel 
along  the  bottom  while  you  follow  it ;  the  other  by  casting 
up  and  letting  the  bait  come  down  towards  you.  The  first 
method  is  more  generally  adopted  in  thick  water  after 
rain.  The  tackle  used  is  generally  a  yard  or  so  of  gut — 
a  No.  4,  5,  or  6  round  bend  hook,  with  a  No.  2  shot,  about 
a  foot  above  the  hook,  to  be  increased  to  two  if  the  stream 
requires  it.  The  worm  used  in  this  fishing  is  usually  a 
small  lob  or  dew  worm — being  nice  and  tough  it  stands 

G 


82  ANGLING. 

some  knocking  about,  and,  having  to  travel  along  the 
bottom  and  meet  all  sorts  of  obstruction,  it  requires  that 
the  worm  should  be  big  enough  to  thoroughly  cover  all 
the  hook,  and  to  leave  a  bit  of  the  tail  beyond  the  point. 
The  angler,  in  a  large  stream,  has  nothing  to  do  after 
baiting  his  tackle  but  to  drop  it  into  the  stream  he  has 
selected,  to  let  it  find  the  bottom,  and  travel  along  by  the 
weight  of  the  stream  unchecked.  If  the  line  stops 
suddenly,  or  he  feels  a  slight  pluck  at  the  line,  he  probably 
has  a  bite.  He  must  not  strike  directly,  or  the  trout, 
having  only  just  seized  the  worm,  will  not  have  the  point 
of  the  hook  within  his  mouth,  and  the  strike  would  be 
abortive ;  but  give  him  a  little  line,  and  let  him  have  a 
gulp  or  two,  and  you  can  then  strike  smartly.  If  at  the 
bite  you  feel  a  smart  "  tug,  tug,"  at  the  rod  point,  in  all 
probability  the  fish  will  feel  it  too,  and  will  drop  the  worm, 
and  will  not  come  again. 

If  the  fish  are  capricious,  you  will  probably  lose  a  good 
many  bites  in  a  day ;  for  this  kind  of  fishing  is  by  no 
means  the  certainty  that  some  people  who  know  nothing 
about  it  consider  it  to  be,  and  you  lose  as  many  or  more 
fish  in  bites  at  the  worm  than  you  do  in  rises  at  the  fly. 
When  you  have  had  a  bite  and  missed  your  fish,  you  will 
probably  have  to  put  on  a  fresh  worm,  as  the  bait  will  be 
more  or  less  torn,  which  trout  do  not  much  like,  a  fresh 
lively  bait  always  having  the  call  over  a  stale  one.  Some- 
times when  the  line  stops  it  has  taken  hold  of  a  twig  or 
root ;  in  that  case,  if  you  strike,  you  will  probably  get  so 
fast  hold  that  a  breakage  will  be  needed.  The  slightest 
tightness  of  the  line  will  tell  you  at  once  whether  it  is  a 
fish  or  no,  but  this  "feeling"  a  fish  is  a  very  delicate 
ticklish  operation,  and  the  fish  is  very  apt  to  reject  the 
bait  when  he  feels  there   is   something   attached  to  it. 


TROUT  FISHHSra  with   bait.  83 

This  style  of  fishing  is  much  practised  in  small  brooks, 
and  you  may  often  pull  out  lots  of  little  speckled  fellows 
from  brooks  not  a  yard  wide  in  places ;  the  small  pools 
caused  by  falls  and  rapids  being  certain  finds,  and  it 
requires  a  good  deal  of  skill  to  guide  the  line  under 
banks,  and  past  stones,  and  close  by  every  sheltering 
tussock,  bush,  or  fern,  where  a  trout  may  make  his  home ; 
and  to  my  mind  it  is  a  very  pretty  amusement,  which  does 
not  require  much  preparation  or  tackle — and  a  scramble  up 
a  mountain  beck  after  a  day's  rain  is  frequently  a  most 
delightful  expedition.  The  most  deadly  way  perhaps  of 
worm  fishing  is  that  pursued  with  the  Stewart  tackle — so 
called  because  it  was  first  written  about  by  my  late 
lamented  friend  the  author  of  "  The  Practical  Angler," 
who  was  in  his  day  one  of  the  best  all-round  trout  fishers 
in  Scotland.  Instead  of  one  hook  of  a  larger  size,  you  use 
three  small  ones,  tied  on  at  short  intervals  above  one 
another.  I  append  a 'sketch  of  the  tackle.  Fig.  4,  Plate  3 ; 
the  sketch  will  relieve  me  of  any  necessity  for  explaining 
the  method  of  baiting,  the  head  of  the  worm  is  stuck  on 
the  top  hook,  and  a  turn  being  taken  round  each  hook, 
the  tail  comes  on  to  the  lowest ;  the  size  of  the  worm 
must  be  suited  to  the  hooks.  In  fine  work,  a  good  sized 
brandling  suffices.  The  advantage  of  this  tackle  is  that 
you  can  strike  the  instant  the  fish  seizes  the  bait,  and  you 
rarely  miss  your  fish. 

In  fishing  up  stream  with  worm,  which  is  by  far  the 
most  skilful  and  killing  method,  you  more  often  than  not 
are  obliged  to  wade.  The  tackle  used  in  clear  water  is  of 
the  finest ;  a  long  light  rod,  a  very  little  stiff er  than  a 
two-handed  fly  rod  for  trout,  is  useful.  The  hooks  may 
either  be  Stewart's  tackle,  or  a  moderate  sized  single  round 
bend.     The  brandling  is  the  worm  more  generally  used. 

o  2 


84  ANGLING. 

Ton  enter  the  stream,  making  as  little  disturbance  as 
possible,  and,  letting  out  as  much  line  as  you  can  con- 
veniently cast,  throw  the  bait  as  you  would  a  fly,  straight 
up  stream,  and  let  it  travel  down  towards  you,  raising  the 
point  of  the  rod  so  as  to  feel  the  line  as  it  comes  home. 
When  the  bait  has  come  within  reasonable  distance,  pull 
it  out  with  a  smart,  steady  drag  (no  jerking)  over  your 
shoulder,  as  you  would  a  fly,  only  make  the  sweep  behind 
less  direct  and  more  circular,  so  as  to  avoid  damaging  the 
worm  by  flicking  or  sudden  checking  of  it.  A  good  worm 
fisher  can  thus  cast  about  twice  the  length  of  his  rod,  and 
his  worm  usually  touches  the  surface  of  the  water  behind 
him  at  nearly  every  cast.  It  is  not  easy  to  get  well  into 
this  cast  so  as  to  avoid  damage  to  the  bait;  when  once  it 
is  learnt,  however,  it  is  simple  enough ;  but,  whenever  you 
see  the  line  stop  in  its  downward  course  towards  you,  you 
must  strike,  as  the  bait  is  often  taken  in  this  kind  of 
fishing  while  still  in  mid  water.  If  you  have  to  wade, 
make  as  little  splash  or  wave  as  possible,  taking  a  step  at 
every  cast,  and  pitching  the  bait  up  into  every  run  and 
channel  that  seems  likely  to  hold  a  trout.  Very  large 
bags  are  often  made  in  this  way  of  fishing.  As  to  whether 
worm  fishing,  or  for  the  matter  of  that  any  other  kind  of 
fishing,  is  sportsmanlike  or  not,  I  don't  enter  upon  it,^as 
these  things  are  governed  chiefly  by  feeling,  and  the 
custom  of  the  country,  and  there  is  a  time-honoured  old 
motto,  which  says,  "  What  is  one  man's  meat  is  another 
man's  poison."     So  much  for  worm  fishing. 

Beetlb,  cbab,  or  cbeepeb  fishino  is  conducted  in 
precisely  the  same  way  as  this  last.  The  crab  or  creeper 
is  the  larva  of  the  stone  fly,  and  is  found  in  many  sandy, 
gravelly  rivers,  up  to  about  the  middle  of  May.  Having 
collected  a  sufficient  stock  of  them  for  your  fishing,  put 


TEOUT   FISHING  WITH  BAIT.  85 

them  in  a  tin  box  with  wet  weeds  to  keep  them  moist.  I 
generally  use  a  fragment  of  bristle  on  the  shank  of  the 
hook,  leaving  a  quarter  of  an  inch  or  so  pointing  upwards 
and  outwards  a  little,  so  that  when  the  creeper  (which  is 
very  soft  and  easily  damaged)  is  drawn  up  on  to  the 
shank  of  the  hook,  it  prevents  it  from  slipping  down  on  to 
the  bend,  and  keeps  it  in  its  place.  Use  a  7  or  8  hook 
on  fine  gut,  put  the  point  in  at  the  thorax,  and  bring  it 
out  at  the  tail,  draw  the  creeper  upon  the  shank,  which 
should  be  just  long  enough  down  to  the  bend  to  hold  it. 
Use  one  or  two  shot  on  the  line  as  the  streams  may  require, 
and  cast  and  work  it  just  as  you  would  a  worm  casting  up 
stream.  It  is  a  troublesome  bait  to  fish,  it  being  so  often 
necessary  to  renew  it,  owing  to  its  softness,  but  it  is  very 
deadly  at  times.  Always  strike  when  the  line  stops,  no 
matter  what  causes  it,  your  bait  will  be  spoilt,  so  you  may 
as  well  take  the  benefit  of  the  doubt.  The  moderate 
streams  are  best  for  the  creeper,  and  even  pools  ought  not 
to  be  neglected.  In  every  other  respect  what  has  been 
said  of  worm  fishing  applies  here. 

DiBBiNG  or  DAPiNG  (called  also  shade  pishing)  for 
trout  resembles  the  same  operation  for  chub,  only  you  run 
more  on  flies  than  you  do  on  insects,  beetles,  &c.,  for  bait. 
A  big  fat  greendrake  or  a  couple  of  big  alders,  or  even 
bluebottles  being  selected  in  preference — the  hook  being 
smaller.  The  method  is  precisely  the  same  as  is  given  for 
chub.  It  is  a  very  deadly  way  of  fishing  when  pursued 
skilfully,  many  big  fish  which  cannot  be  got  at  in  any 
other  way  being  captured  by  it.  It  is  needless  to  say  that 
the  angler  must  approach  the  bank  with  every  possible 
caution,  and  when  he  hooks  his  fish  he  will  often  have  to 
hang  on  to  him,  as  his  whereabouts  will  probably  be  rooty. 
Often,  too,  he  will  not  be  able  to  see  the  rise  at  his  flies, 


86  ANGLING. 

but  will  have  to  trust  to  his  ear  or  to  the  sight  of  some 
slight  dimple  on  the  water  caused  by  the  rise  or  the 
slightest  motion  of  the  line — for  it  need  hardly  be 
remarked  that  if  the  angler  can  see  the  rise  of  the  trout 
the  trout  can  see  him. 

Eddt  fishing,  with  a  small  quill  float  and  a  wasp 
grub,  or  a  couple  of  gentles,  caddis,  or  meal  worm,  or  any 
other  grub,  is  often  practised  with  great  success  when  the 
water  is  thick,  a  few  fragments  of  bait  being  now  and  then 
cast  in  to  attract  the  fish. 

SiNKiNQ  AND  DRAWING,  by  tying  a  pair  of  wings  on  the 
head  of  a  hook,  baiting  the  hook  with  a  gentle  or  a  caddis 
or  two  or  some  other  grub,  biting  a  shot  on  the  line,  and  then 
casting  it  like  a  fly  up  stream,  and  raising  and  falling  the 
point  of  the  rod  as  the  bait  comes  down,  so  as  to  make  it 
rise  and  fall  in  the  water,  is  another  deadly  method  of 
fishing.  I  never  practice  any  of  these  methods  myself, 
for  I  think  the  trout  deserves  fairer  treatment,  but  as 
others  do,  and  think  no  scorn  of  it,  I  am  bound  at  the 
least  to  mention  them,  though  I  do  not  enter  at  length  on 
them.     Lastly  comes 

Spinning  fob  teout. — Pursued  in  large  rivers  like  the 
Thames  the  method  followed  differs  very  little  from  that 
practised  in  pike  fishing,  save  that  you  use  a  smaller  and 
lighter  tackle,  employ  gut  instead  of  gimp,  and  fish  the 
sharp  turbulent  streams  instead  of  the  dead  reaches  or 
quiet  eddies.  In  the  days  when  trout  fishing  was  worth 
following  in  the  Thames,  it  was  a  pretty  sight  to  see  an 
adept  spin  a  weir — how,  standing  on  the  weir  beam,  with 
a  fierce  stream,  ready  to  swallow  him  up  at  the  least  false 
step,  at  his  feet,  with  scarcely  an  effort  he  pitched  his  bait 
hither  and  thither,  and  worked  it  by  some  twist  of  the 
wrist  and  knowledge  of  the  eddies  into  and  out  of  every 


TEOUT  FISHING   WITH  BAIT.  87 

hole  and  comer  likely  to  hold  a  trout,  gathering  up  the 
line  like  a  weaver  working  his  shuttle  with  one  hand,  and 
working  the  rod  with  the  other ;  it  was  almost  as  masterly 
a  performance,  when  contrasted  with  the  splashings  and 
dashings  of  the  ordinary  bungler,  as  one  could  well  see  in 
all  the  range  of  angling.  But  though  the  Thames  will 
always  be  the  head  school  for  learning  the  art  of  spinning, 
I  doubt  if  the  present  generation  come  up  in  point  of 
neatness  and  skill  to  the  old  masters — The  Tags,  the 
Wisdoms,  the  Purdeys,  and  Eosewells,  now,  alas!  have 
passed  away. 

The  greatest  requisite  for  success  in  Thames  trout 
fishing  is  everlasting  and  unswerving  patience,  combined 
with  a  smartish  turn  of  luck — and,  unfortunately,  the 
latter  will  often  beat  the  former  out  of  the  field.  How 
often  have  I  seen  a  Thames  trout  of  which  I  knew  every 
spot  and  scale,  with  whom  I  had  the  most  intimate 
acquaintance,  and  whose  society  I  had  cultivated  for 
months  with  the  nicest  and  most  insidious  art,  go  and 
throw  himself  away  on  some  coarse  jack  fisher  with  a 
gimp  hook  and  a  6in.  gudgeon.  Some  chance  barbeller 
coming  in  for  a  rechauffe  of  someone  else's  sport ;  or  some 
poaching  brat  with  a  foul  unscoured  worm,  a  whipcord 
line,  and  a  float  like  a  peg  top,  who  never  saw  him  before 
in  their  lives.  No ;  I  cannot  say  that  I  am  now  at  all 
given  to  Thames  trout  fishing.  I  worked  at  it  hard  for 
years ;  few  professionals  could  do  the  trick  more  neatly, 
yet  my  fortune  was  filthy.  I  got  worn  out  upon  it.  Now 
I  never  go  out  for  Thames  trout.  The  game  is  not  worth 
the  candle.  Perseverance,  and  patience,  and  luck,  then, 
are  the  best  ingredients,  but  it  is  also  good  to  have  the 
first  go  over  them  in  the  morning  before  the  boats  and 
punts  are  on  the  move,  and  many  a  good  trout  has  been 


88  ANGLING. 

taken  when  the  sun  begins  to  air  the  water.  If  you  hook 
a  trout  keep  a  hold  on  him,  but  don't  be  too  rough; 
remember  that  the  stream  is  sharp,  the  fish  heavy,  and  the 
hooks  (mostly)  small ;  and  beware  of  pulling  at  him  when 
he  is  head  to  you  down  stream,  as  that  is  how  six  trout 
in  ten  are  lost.  If  you  are  fishing  in  open  water  keep 
below  him  if  you  can.  If  you  are  fishing  a  weir,  always, 
if  possible,  have  your  boat  below  it,  and  having  hooked  the 
fish  drop  into  your  boat  and  hand  your  rod  down,  and,  if 
yea  can,  get  your  fish  out  of  the  rough  water.  One  never 
knows  what  there  may  be  in  the  eddies  of  a  weir,  but 
weirs  under  the  new  management  are  not  so  much  in 
favour  with  trout  as  of  old.  The  old  weirs  always  had  a 
plank  apron  at  the  foot,  under  which  the  fish  rooted  and 
burrowed  for  often  yards  in  extent.  They  were  splendid 
trout  lodgings.  These  are  all  done  away  with,  and 
concrete  and  stone,  which  would  not  give  a  hiding  place  to 
a  minnow,  stand  in  place  of  them.  This,  with  the  filling 
of  deep  holes,  the  pulling  out  of  old  stumps,  the  abolition 
of  old  campshots,  and  the  destruction  of  spawning  beds  by 
dredging,  has  much  injured  the  Thames  generally  as  a 
big-trout  river.  The  houses  and  homes  and  the  nurseries 
are  gone,  and  the  fish  with  them.  You  may  keep  on 
breeding  trout  by  the  thousand,  but  you  will  have  no  more 
good  trout  in  your  water  than  you  have  homes  for. 

My  tackle,  sho¥m  at  Fig.  2,  Plate  2,  is,  I  consider,  the 
very  best  invention  for  Thames  trout,  as  it  spins  a  small 
dace  beautifully,  keeps  him  in  condition  for  a  long  time, 
and  is  very  unobtrusive  to  the  view ;  and  if  the  big  tail 
hook  does  chance  to  get  on,  good  bye  to  Trouty  ;  unless 
there  is  a  flaw  in  the  gut  he  will  have  to  come  ashore.  As 
I  have  already  said,  the  directions  I  have  given  for  pike 
spinning  answer  here. 


TEOUT  FISHING  WITH  BAIT.  89 

In  spinning  for  small  trout  with  a  minnow  a  different 
"kind  of  tackle  is  used.  The  rod  is  lighter,  and  capable  of 
being  swung  and  used  with  one  hand.  The  spring  should 
be  something  between  that  of  a  bait  rod  and  a  fly  rod. 
The  rings  upright,  of  course,  as  is  the  case  with  all 
spinning  rods  ;  the  line  the  finest  dressed  silk  ;  the  trace 
of  moderate  trout  gut,  and  two  or  three  swivels,  and  the 
tackle  suited  to  the  size  of  the  minnows  you  are  likely  to  use. 
This  does  not  vary  much,  and  a  very  little  manipulation 
is  required  to  accommodate  the  bait  to  the  tackle.  Some 
people  like  one  kind  of  tackle,  and  some  another — some 
like  small  hooks  and  some  large.  The  old  three  triangle 
pattern  is  not  unfrequently  used  ;  but  this  again  is  often 
modified  by  using  pairs  instead  of  triangles,  leaving  only 
a  single  hook  projecting.  I  do  not  care  about  these  tackles, 
but  incline  to  the  larger  hooked  species.  The  earliest 
of  these  was  one  large  round  bend  long  shanked  hook, 
which  was  passed  in  at  the  mouth  of  the  minnow,  and  so 
on  down  along  the  spine  till  it  was  brought  out  at  the  tail, 
the  tail  being  crooked  on  the  bend  of  the  hook;  but  above 
the  shank  of  the  hook  there  was  a  small  hook,  used  as  the 
lip  hook,  to  hold  the  minnow  up  on  the  big  hook,  and  this 
being  passed  through  the  lips  of  the  minnow,  the  tackle 
was  baited;  but  I  found  that  this  arrangement  often 
allowed  fish  to  run  and  take  hold  of  the  bait  lightly 
between  these  two  hooks,  and  to  escape  being  hooked  at 
the  strike,  and  so  a  large  percentage  of  runs  were  lost 
unless  the  fish  were  very  hungry.  I  therefore  added  a 
small  triangle  on  a  thread  of  gut,  to  be  inserted  midway 
(as  shown  in  Fig.  5,  Plate  3). 

For  many  years  I  used  this  tackle  and  no  other,  and 
found  it  in  streams  all  I  could  wish ;  but  when  I  came  to 
fish  on  the  Scotch  lakes  I  often  found  that  my  minnow 


90  ANGLING. 

would  get  out  of  spinning,  and  that  I  either  had  to  be  con- 
stantly hauling  in  some  forty  or  fifty  yards  of  line  to  see 
how  it  worked,  or  I  had  to  chance  its  wobbling,  when  per- 
haps for  half  an  hour  no  fish  would  look  at  it,  until  it  wns 
corrected.  Thereupon  I  set  my  wits  to  work.  I  had  by 
me  a  fan  made  of  German  silver,  which  was  sent  to  me  by 
some  tackle  maker,  and  which  worked  on  the  gut,  and  slid 
up  and  down  so  as  to  jam  tightly  when  pressed  down  on 
the  head  of  the  hook.  I  made  me  a  tackle  somewhat  like 
the  one  last  depicted,  only  the  big  hook  was  a  bit  smaller 
and  shorter  in  the  shank.  The  hooks  being  baited,  the  tail 
is  not  crooked,  but  the  big  hook  comes  out  about  two- 
thirds  down,  as  shown  in  Plate  3,  Fig.  6,  and  then  the  fan 
is  pushed  on  down  to  the  shank  of  the  lip  hook,  and 
jammed  tight  there.  This  form  of  tackle  not  only  spins 
beautifully,  but  it  always  spins  and  never  gets  out  of 
order.  For  trailing,  in  lake  fishing,  no  tackle  can  beat 
this. 

Now  suppose  that  your  rod  is  ready,  and  your  tackle 
baited,  the  ordinary  plan  in  a  largish  stream  is  to  wade,  if 
you  cannot  command  the  stream  without,  and  to  cast  down 
stream  towards  either  bank  of  the  river,  drawing  across 
stream,  in  a  bend  round  towards  the  opposite  side,  and 
then  repeating  the  cast  in  the  opposite  direction  ;  look  at 
Fig.  7,  Plate  3,  thus  a  man  standing  at  "  a "  casts  first 
towards  "  b,"  and  draws  round  the  dotted  line  to  about 
"  d,'*  then  he  casts  towards  "  e,"  and  draws  round  towards 
"  f."  Some  persons,  particularly  if  fishing  with  an  arti- 
ficial minnow,  which  cannot  be  deranged,  cast  over  head, 
fly-fashion,  as  they  can  cast  more  line  that  way  ;  but  with 
the  natural  bait  this  is  apt  to  derange  it,  and  spoil  its 
spinning.  The  casts,  therefore,  are  chiefly  made  under- 
hand.     These,  from  the  nature  of  things,  in  the  ordinary 


TEOUT   FISHING  WITH  BAIT.  91 

way  cannot  fail  to  be  rather  short.  You  cannot,  when 
walking  on  rough  banks,  or  wading,  have  loose  line  hang- 
ing about ;  but  you  may  get  a  much  increased  length 
of  cast  by  employing  the  Nottingham  mode  of  casting 
a  light  dace  float,  already  explained  and  depicted  at  Fig.  4, 
Plate  1.  By  this  means  any  reasonable  length  likely  to  be 
needed  can  be  commanded.  Some  anglers  prefer  to  spin 
upstream  and  draw  down;  but  the  bait  must  spin  very 
well  to  do  much  execution  at  it  ;  still,  I  have  seen 
fish  killed  in  very  clear  water  thus,  which  would  hardly 
have  come  to  bag  fishing  down.  The  method  of  casting, 
&c.,  is  precisely  the  same  as  that  for  down  fishing,  the  draw 
being,  of  course,  somewhat  more  rapid. 

The  necks  of  the  sharp  streams  in  rough,  rapid,  or  even 
white  water  are  the  best  spots  to  spin  for  trout.  In  open 
and  moderate  water  the  trout  soon  learn  to  grow  shy  of 
the  minnow,  and  constantly  come  provokingly  short  at  it. 
When  you  see  a  trout  come  at  the  minnow,  and  follow  it, 
don't  be  flurried,  but  spin  steadily  on,  or  any  sudden  stop 
or  change  will  probably  frighten  the  fish  altogether : 
whereas,  just  as  the  bait  enters  the  bend,  and  as  it  rises 
towards  the  surface  at  the  end  of  a  draw,  he  is  very  likely 
to  make  a  dash  at  it — or  if  he  declines  that  cast  he 
may  take  it  the  next ;  strike  smartly  but  not  too  heavily, 
when  you  feel  a  touchy  and  not  before — indeed  feeling 
should  supersede  seeing  in  this  matter,  and  the  less  you 
see  the  better.  I  once  saw  a  seven  pound  trout  come  at 
my  bait  at  Sunbury  ;  I  saw  his  great  white  mouth  open, 
and  the  bait  disappear,  and  I  struck.  I  felt  nothing  at 
all,  the  bait  uninjured  came  one  way,  and  the  trout  of 
course  went  another.  If  I  had  not  seen  that  fish,  I  most 
likely  would  have  waited  till  I  felt  him,  when  I  should 
have  hooked  him.     But  to  this  day  I  never  can  make  out 


ti  ANGLING. 

how  it  was  I  did  not  hook,  or  even  touch  him,  when  I  saw 
a  bait  with  ten  or  eleven  hooks  on  it  disappear  apparently 
into  his  cavernous  mouth.  When  you  have  hooked  your 
fish,  take  care  that  you  do  not  let  him  have  any  slack  line  ; 
this  advice,  though  good  for  all  kinds  of  fishing,  is  extra 
good  in  spinning. 

YHien  the  water  is  rising  after  rain  is  always  the  best 
chance  for  the  spinner  for  small  trout.  The  fish  are  all 
then  on  the  look  out  for  stray  food,  and  will  snap  at  the 
minnow  freely.  Minnows  are  often  diflScult  to  get  fresh  at 
the  time  they  are  wanted,  and  if  you  have  no  tank  or 
corfe  to  keep  them  in,  the  only  way  left  is  to  preserve 
them.  Some  persons  salt  them  ;  but,  though  I  hold  the 
opinion  that  fish  like  the  taste  of  salt,  it  destroys  the 
colour  of  the  bait,  and  makes  it  so  soft  that  it  will  hardly 
stay  on  the  hooks  at  times.  The  best  way  is  to  get  a 
pickle  bottle,  fill  it  with  minnows,  and  then  pour  in  spirit 
up  to  the  bung.  It  will  not  require  very  much,  and  the 
very  best  spirit  you  can  employ  is  pure  spirits  of  wine. 
It  keeps  the  bait  bright  and  well  coloured,  toughens  it, 
and  has  comparatively  little  smell  to  it,  which  is  not 
always  the  case  with  some  spirits.  I  have  seen  them  kept 
in  good  spirits  of  wine  in  fine  order  for  a  twelvemonth  and 
more.  Be  sure  you  do  get  pure  spirits  of  wine,  for  if  you 
get  methylated  the  smell  is  most  objectionable  to  the  fish. 
I  have  heard  that  a  bottle  of  glycerine  does  equally  well, 
but  I  have  never  tried  it.  If  it  does  as  well  it  would  do 
much  better.  To  carry  a  few  minnows  out  with  you  alive, 
a  soda  wat^r  bottle  with  a  quill  through  the  cork  is  a  very 
good  plan,  you  may  easily  accommodate  and  keep  a  score 
or  more  thus,  now  and  then  changing  the  water.  Always 
kill  your  minnow  and  see  that  it  is  quite  dead  before 
putting  it  on  the  hooks ;  take  care  of  this,  not  only  to 


TKOUT  FISHINa  WITH  BAIT.  9a 

avoid  needless  cruelty,  but  as  long  as  there  is  any  life  in 
the  bait  it  wiU  probably  interfere  with  its  spinning.  If 
you  throw  the  minnow  smartly  on  the  hard  ground  death 
is  instantaneous. 

Some  one  of  the  various  methods  of  using  a  live  bait 
for  pike  and  perch  may  be  applied  to  a  trout.  A  pater- 
noster or  a  float — which  latter  should  be  a  fragment  of 
cork  sufficient  to  carry  the  bait.  Not  more  than  one  hook 
should  be  used,  and  this  set  a  little  below  midwater  (a 
small  triangle  perhaps  is  better  than  a  single  hook).  Hook 
the  bait  through  the  lip,  as  it  lives  longer  and  is  more 
lively  thus.  Minnows,  smaU  gudgeons,  or  dace  are  the 
best  live  baits. 


94  ANGLING. 


CHAPTER  VII. 
FLY   FISHING    FOR   TROUT. 

Ply  Fishing. — I  now  come  to  not  only  the  most 
sportsmanlike,  but  the  most  delightful  method  of  trout 
fishing.  One  not  only  endeared  by  a  thousand  delightful 
memories,  but  by  the  devotion  of  many  of  our  wisest  and 
best  men  for  ages  past ;  and,  next  to  my  thanks  for 
existence,  health,  and  daily  bread,  I  thank  God  for  the 
good  gift  of  fly  fishing.  If  the  fishes  are  to  be  killed  for 
our  use,  there  is  no  way  in  which  they  are  put  to  so  little 
pain  as  in  fly  fishing.  No  minnow  is  dashed  on  the 
ground,  no  worm  impaled  upon  a  hook.  The  fish  rises, 
takes  your  fly  as  though  it  were  his  ordinary  food ;  the 
hook  fixes  in  the  hard  gristly  jaw,  where  there  is  little  or 
no  sensation.  After  a  few  struggles  he  is  hauled  on 
shore,  and  a  tap  on  the  head  terminates  his  life ;  and  so 
slight  is  the  pain  or  alarm  that  he  feels  from  the  hook,  that 
I  have  over  and  over  again  caught  a  trout  with  the  fly  still 
in  his  mouth  which  he  has  broken  off  in  his  struggles  an 
an  hour  or  even  half-an-hour  previously.  I  have  seen 
fish  that  have  thus  broken  off  swim  away  with  my  fly  in 
their  mouths  and  begins  to  rise  at  the  natural  fly  again 
almost  directly.*     What  becomes  of  the  "  agonies   and 

♦  Strangelv  enoaeh,  since  this  was  in  the  printer's  hands,  I 
have  twice  taken  a  fish  which  broke  away  with  my  fly  not  five 
minntes  before,  and  canght  the  same  fish  with  the  same  fly  in 
his  month,  and  on  both  occasions  retrieved  mv  lost  fly.  The  fish 
were  l^lb.  fish,  and  were  both  caught  in  the  Test,  at  Stock- 
bridge,  in  the  third  week  of  April.  The  one  took  two  olive  dans, 
the  other  two  grannoms.  There  is  no  doubt  at  all  that  if  there 
is  any  question  of  pain,  the  fish  really  suffer  more  in  a  net. 


FLY.FISHINa  FOR  TEOUT.  95 

pangs,"  &c.,  &c.,  which  humanitarians  are  so  fond  of  in- 
venting ;  and  in  all  reverence  I  would  ask,  if  the  hook 
were  so  cruel  in  its  application,  would  Our  Lord  have 
ordered  Peter  to  cast  a  hook  into  the  sea  in  order  to  catch 
a  fish,  and  take  the  tribute  money  therefrom.  It  would 
have  been  as  easy  for  Him  to  tell  the  fish  to  come  to  the 
bank  and  deliver  up  the  coin.  I  have  put  this  point  to 
many  soft-hearted  persons,  and  I  have  never  known  one 
who  could  answer  it  yet.  Then  I  am  told  I  do  it  for 
sport  solely,  and  not  for  any  necessity.  This  is  not 
altogether  true.  I  like  trout  myself,  and  so  do  many  of 
my  friends.'  The  trout  are  meant  to  be  eaten.  The  sport 
appears  to  me  harmless,  cheerful,  healthy;  and  why 
should  I  not  catch  my  own  or  my  friend's  breakfast  or 
dinner  if  it  suits  me  to  do  so,  and  I  find  a  great  advan- 
tage (as  I  do)  by  doing  so  ?  Not  that  fly  fishing  requires 
any  support  or  extenuation  from  me. 

Fly  fishing  for  trout  is  carried  on  either  with  a  single  or 
double-handed  rod,  by  far  the  larger  number  of  its 
votaries  using  the  former.  The  single-handed  rod  is 
usually  a  rod  of  from  nine  to  twelve  feet  in  length ;  it 
may  even  be  a  few  inches  longer  or  shorter  in  exceptional 
cases,  a  good  medium  rod  being  from  ten  to  eleven  feet. 
They  are  made  of  various  woods,  hickory,  greenheart,  and 
split  bamboo  being  the  chief. 

The  lighter  a  rod  is,  combined  with'  sufficient  power  for 
its  need,  and  the  better  balanced  it  is  in  the  hand,  the  less 
it  tires  the  arm  that  wields  it,  and  though  a  rod  will  only 
weigh  from  eight  to  fourteen  ounces,  yet  even  that  weight, 
with  the  leverage  exercised  by  the  line  in  a  long  day's 
fishing,  makes  the  muscles  of  the  hand  and  arm  very  glad 
of  a  rest  or  change.  Q-reenheart,  as  the  heaviest  wood, 
might  be  supposed  to  give  the  heaviest  rod,  but  the  wood 


96  ANGLING. 

is  60  close  in  the  grain,  and  so  hard,  that  it  requires  less 
bulk  to  produce  the  same  result.  Perhaps  the  lightest 
rods  of  all  are  the  split  bamboo,  which  are  made  of  lengths 
of  bamboo  glued  together,  and  bound  every  two  inches. 
But  though  light  to  the  hand  they  are  heavy  to  the  pocket, 
and  when  anglers  can  get  a  fairly  good  rod  which  auswers  all 
their  needs  for  25«.,  few  of  them  will  give  61.  or  8^  for  one, 
however  superior  the  workmanship.  There  is  a  new  wood, 
called  washaba,  which  has  come  up  lately  :  it  is  a  very  good 
wood,  and  almost  equal  or  a  little  inferior  to  hickory. 

When  buying  a  rod,  the  intending  purchaser  should 
always  put  the  reel  on,  as  it  greatly  alters  the  balance  of 
the  rod,  and  if  he  could  thread  the  line  and  try  a  cast  or 
two  he  would  do  better  stili 

Having  selected  a  rod,  the  next  thing  is  to  choose  a  line. 
Some  people  like  dressed  silk ;  I,  however,  prefer  plaited 
or  twisted  horsehair  and  hemp,  nicely  tapered,  and  not 
too  long  in  the  taper;  as  half  the  lines  are.  But  the 
great  thing  in  choosing  the  line  is  to  choose  one  which  the 
rod  will  carry  to  the  best  advantage  without  straining. 
Too  light  a  line  is  a  perfect  nuisance  in  windy  weather, 
you  cannot  get  it  through  the  wind  a  bit,  and  even  without 
wind  it  does  not  cast  properly ;  while  if  it  is  too  heavy  it 
falls  with  a  splash,  and  strains  every  splice  and  joint  in 
the  rod.  It  requires  some  knowledge  and  familiarity  with 
a  variety  of  fly  rods  to  be  able  to  pick  out  a  suitable  line 
for  one ;  and  if  the  angler  is  not  equal  to  it,  he  had  better 
go  to  a  respectable  tackle  maker  and  let  him  choose  it. 
The  winch  should  be  a  plain  check  winch,  just  strong 
enough  in  the  check  to  prevent  the  line  over-iTinning,  but 
not  so  strong  as  to  make  it  hard  to  run  out  when  a  fish 
happens  to  pull  on  it — one  capable  of  holding  thirty  or 
forty  yards  of  line  is  large  enough. 


FLY  FISHING   FOE  TROUT.  97 

Having  suited  himself  with  rod,  line,  and  winch,  and 
passed  the  line  through  the  rings,  the  angler  must  tie  or 
loop  on  to  the  reel  or  running  line,  a  collar  of  single  gut, 
moderately  stout  at  the  upper  end,  and  fining  down  to  the 
end  to  which  the  artificial  fly  is  to  be  fixed.  Some  people 
have  a  loop  in  the  line  here,  and,  having  another  on  the 
fly  link,  loop  the  fly  on,  but  this  makes  a  thick  place  with 
double  lashings  or  knots  some  two  inches  long  about  eight 
or  nine  inches  above  the  fly,  and  in  fime  water  becomes 
very  visible.  I  always  knot  the  fly  link  on  to  the  collar, 
or  casting  line,  as  it  is  usually  called,  just  as  though  it 
were  a  part  of  the  line  itself. 

Sometimes  the  angler  uses  a  dropper,  or  even  two  or 
three.  These  are  flies  tied  on  to  the  casting  line  at 
intervals  of  eighteen  inches  or  two  feet.  I  seldom  use 
more  than  one  dropper  under  any  'circumstances,  as  I  find 
I  can  kill  quite  as  many  fish  with  two  as  I  can  with  three 
or  four  flies,  and  more  than  two  are  apt  to  tangle  or  catch 
in  weeds  or  twigs.  When  I  use  a  dropper  I  pick  out  a 
good  sound  knot  about  two  feet  or  two  and  a  half  above 
the  tail  fly  or  stretcher,  and  having  reduced  the  gut  on  the 
dropper  fly  to  about  five  inches  in  length,  and  tied  a  knot 
firmly  at  the  extreme  end,  so  that  the  gut  shall  not  slip,  I 
tie  or  knot  the  fly  on  just  above  the  knot  in  the  casting 
line — one  tie  is  usually  enough,  but  two  make  it  very 
secure — and,  drawing  the  tie  home  above  the  knot,  the 
tackle  will  usually  stand  any  fair  strain  that  is  put  on  the 
dropper. 

Now,  having  suited  himself  with  tackle  and  flies,  the 
angler  should  draw  ojff  rather  more  running  line  than  the 
length  of  the  rod,  and,  waving  the  rod  back  smartly  over 
his  right  shoulder,  having  given  the  line  time  to  extend 
itself  to  the  fullest  in  the  air  behind  him,  he  should  wave 

H 


98  ANGLma. 

the  rod  forward  somewhat  more  smartly,  with  a  cutting  or 
flogging  action,  towards  the  spot  where  he  wishes  his  fly 
to  fall,  and,  if  he  has  followed  my  counsel  accurately,  the 
line  will  fall  straightly  upon  the  water  in  the  direction 
desired.  When  he  has  brought  the  rod  forwards  so  that 
it  stands  at  about  an  angle  of  forty-five  degrees,  he  should 
check  it-,  and  as  the  line  falls,  lower  it  gently  another 
twenty  or  thirty  degrees,  so  as  to  allow  the  fly  to  fall 
softly  on  the  surface,  and  to  travel  lightly  and  unchecked 
down  the  stream.  In  making  the  forward  impulse  of  the 
rod,  after  having  sent  the  line  back  behind  him,  the  angler 
should  be  careful  to  give  the  line  time  to  fully  extend 
itself.  If  he  does  not  he  will  probably  hear  a  crack  like 
the  faint  flick  of  a  whip,  only  sharper,  and  if  he  then 
looks  at  his  gut  he  will  find  that  he  has  cracked  his  fly  off. 
In  order  to  avoid  this  as  much  as  possible,  it  is  desirable 
not  to  throw  the  line  straight  back,  and  then  straight 
forward,  but,  when  the  line  has  extended,  to  make  a 
slight  sweep  or  curve  with  the  rod  point  so  that  the  fly 
may  also  travel  in  a  curve  instead  of  a  sharp  angle. 
Some  anglers  make  this  curve  away  from  the  face  or 
shoulder,  others  towards  it,  I  prefer  making  it  away  from 
the  face,  as  the  more  upright  the  rod  is  when  you  with- 
draw the  line  from  the  water  the  better  and  quicker  it 
comes  off  it. 

Windy  weather,  particularly  if  the  wind  is  in  your 
favour,  greatly  facilitates  the  flicking  off  of  flies,  as  it 
prevents  the  line  from  thoroughly  extending  itself  behind 
before  the  cast  is  made.  In  such  a  wind  special  care 
should  be  taken  if  the  angler  does  not  want  to  lose  his  fly. 
The  outline  of  a  long  jargonelle  pear  starting  from  the 
stem  round  over  the  eye  and  so  back  to  the  stem  again, 
will  give  some  notion  of  the  sort  of  curve  the  rod  point 


FLY  FISHING  FOR  TROUT.  99 

should  travel  over,  particularly  in  windy  weather  with  a 
wind  in  your  favour. 

Some  people  in  fly-fishing  like  a  ripple,  and  the  wind 
this  or  that  way.  This  may  be  very  well  in  a  lake,  or  in 
a  mill  head,  or  any  similar  still,  quiet  water,  but  on 
streamy  water,  if  the  day  is  cloudy,  I  can  do  very  well 
without  any  wind  at  all — my  experience  of  fly-fishing 
being  that  nineteen-twentieths  of  your  successes  depend 
upon  how  you  put  your  fly  to  the  fish,  and  you  cannot 
have  full  command  over  your  fly,  and  put  it  where  you 
please,  if  you  have  much  wind  in  any  direction.  I  do  not 
at  all  object  to  a  good  rough  upstream  wind  in  a  still  mill 
head,  but  in  such  cases  you  do  not  fish  the  rises  or  the 
fish,  you  fish  the  water,  probably,  with  a  wet  fly,  and 
chance  what  may  come  of  it,  and  sometimes  a  good  deal 
comes  of  it,  but  that  is  a  very  different  thing  from  putting 
your  fly  neatly  over  a  rising  fish  and  inducing  him  to 
mistake  it  for  the  brother  of  the  one  he  has  just  swallowed. 
That  is  the  acme  of  fly  fishing.  But  I  am  teaching  my 
pupils  to  run  before  they  can  walk,  and  I  must  return  on 
my  steps. 

Having  thoroughly  mastered  the  length  of  line  he  first 
put  out,  so  as  to  be  able  to  throw  it  in  any  direction  he 
desires  stmightly  and  truly,  the  angler  may  let  out  more 
and  more  line  until  he  reaches  the  outside  of  his  capability, 
which,  with  a  ten  foot  or  eleven  foot  rod,  will  be  something 
more  or  less  under  twenty  yards.  Say  fifty  feet,  and  that 
is  from  four  and  a  half  to  five  times  the  length  of  the  rod, 
which  will  perhaps  be  as  much  as  he  ever  will  master. 
But  throwing  a  line  is  one  thing,  and  having  full  command 
of  it  after  you  have  thrown  it,  is  quite  another.  How 
often,  when  I  have  hurled  out  a  tremendous  line,  have  I 
seen  my  fish    come  up   fairly,  only  to  be   scratched  or 

H  2 


100  ANGLINa. 

boggled! — moral,  the  angler  should  only  cast  so  much 
line  as  he  has  perfect  command  over — not  a  foot  more. 
Such  line  as  he  can  raise  off  the  water  cleanly,  smartly, 
and  without  drag  or  effort,  he  will  probably  be  able  to 
command  a  fish  well  with  in  the  water ;  but  when  it  comes 
to  tearing  the  line  out  of  the  water  by  the  roots,  as  it 
were,  the  length  of  line  out  is  unmanageable  and  bad. 
When  a  fish  rises,  much  depends  upon  the  position  the 
angler  occupies  with  respect  to  the  fish,  as  to  how  he  must 
strike.  If  the  fish  be  below  him,  down  stream,  the  line 
will  probably  be  fully  extended,  and  will  weigh  on  the 
rod  top.  At  such  a  time  a  very  slight  twitch  indeed  of 
the  rod  top  is  enough  to  fasten  the  fly.  A  heavy  tug  will 
probably  result  in  a  break,  and  the  fish  will  go  off  with 
the  fly  in  his  mouth.  When  the  fish  is  upstream,  and  the 
line  coming  home,  it  is  sure  to  be  more  or  less  in  a  bag, 
and  the  angler  must  strike  more  or  less  smartly  to  over- 
come  the  slack  line.  Experience  and  practice  alone  can 
tell  him  how  hard  he  ought  to  strike,  and  often  when  he 
knows  this  full  well  his  hand  will  not  second  his  desire ; 
but  on  a  sudden  and  unexpected  rise  he  will  hit  too  hard 
— the  more  particularly  so  if  he  is  addicted  to  salmon 
fishing,  and  the  various  methods  used  for  coarse  fish,  when 
the  tackle  is  much  less  fine,  and  the  striking  usually  much 
harder. 

To  be  a  perfect  trout  fisher,  to  my  mind,  a  man  should 
follow  no  other  branch  of  fishing.  It  spoils  his  hand  if 
he  does.  I  myself,  from  the  practice  of  striking  so  hard 
in  both  salmon,  pike,  and  other  fishing,  used  to  lose 
numbers  of  fish  and  flies  in  the  course  of  the  season ;  and 
what  made  it  the  more  vexing  was  that  they  were  nearly 
always  the  best  and  heaviest  fish.  At  Winchester  they 
used  to  have  a  sort  of  proverb   about  me.     "Why,  he 


FLY  FISHma  FOR  TEOUT.  101 

loses  more  fish  than  any  man  in  Winchester,  John,"  said 
a  severe  critic  one  day  to  old  John  Hammond,  that  most 
artful  old  provider  of  fishing  requisites.  "  What  did  you 
say,  sir?"  said  John,  putting  his  hand  up  to  his  ear — 
for  he  very  often  couldn't  hear  anything  he  did  not  want 
to.  The  criticism  was  repeated.  "  Ah,"  said  the  sly  old 
being,  with  a  couple  of  nods  of  the  head,  and  two  taps  on 
the  lid  of  his  snuff-box,  "  but  then  he  hooks  more ! " 
After  which  a  very  bad  fit  of  deafness  came  over  him 
for  a  minute  or  two,  till  a  little  boy  came  in  for  a  "  'apeny 
hook  and  a  withy,"  and  turned  the  conversation.  Since 
that  time,  however,  I  have  done  less  coarse  fishing, 
devoting  my  attention  to  the  grayling  when  the  time  for 
coarse  fish  comes  on,  and  the  result  has  been  most  striking 
— I  now  lose  less  fish  than  many  of  the  single- hand  rod 
men.  When  you  are  given  to  too  heavy  striking,  the  best 
provision  you  can  adopt  is  to  lighten  your  rod  and  tackle ; 
have  a  lighter  or  more  flexible  rod,  and  a  lighter  line. 

Between  the  extremes  up  and  down  stream  there  are  all 
sorts  of  graduations.  When  the  line  is  extended  straight 
across  the  stream,  and  the  fish  takes  it  broadside  on,  it  is 
nearly  as  bad  as  when  he  is  straight  down,  and  requires 
quite  as  light  a  touch.  When  the  fish  are  small,  as  in 
some  lochs  and  burns,  you  require  much  sharper  and 
quicker  striking  than  is  the  rule  in  our  heavier  southern 
rivers  ;  but  experience  must  teach  the  angler  all  this,  and 
will  do  so  better  than  all  the  precepts  in  existence. 

Having  struck  your  fish,  keep  his  head  as  tight  as  you 
can  without  being  too  rough,  and  don't  let  him  get  into 
weeds  if  ymi  can  help  itt  for  there  are  times  when  neither 
you  nor  any  one  else  can  help  it.  For  any  fish  from  three 
pounds  weight  up  for  the  first  five  minutes  or  so  will  take 
you  just  where  he  pleases,  let  you  be  ever  so  clever ;  for 


102  ANGLING. 

jou  won't  hook  him  without  pretty  fine  tackle,  and  you  can't 
pitch  him  over  your  head  with  that.  Still,  you  will  often 
be  able  to  get  a  fish  out  of  a  dangerous  locality  by  prompt 
measures,  which  you  would  lose  without ;  for  I  generally 
regard  a  fish  hung  up  on  weeds  as  about  two-thirds  gone, 
for  you  don't  save  one  in  three.  I  don't  know  how  it  is, 
but  I  believe  they  hang  on  to  the  weed  with  their  mouths, 
and  let  you  pull  against  the  weed  if  you  do  pull,  and  if 
you  don't  in  time  the  weed  gets  round  the  line,  and  there 
you  are !  Polling  out  or  cutting  out  is  very  risky  work. 
Yet  ^ue  vouUz  vous?  K  the  fish  are  much  given  to 
"  weeding  "  a  long  light  fir  pole  with  a  hook  knife  on  it, 
kept  somewhere  within  50  or  100  yards  off  you,  would  no 
doubt  enable  you  to  cut  the  weed  off  close  to  the  roots,  for 
less  than  that  is  dangerous,  as  you  might  cut  the  line. 
The  only  thing  to  do  with  the  rod  is  to  go  down 
stream,  put  a  steady  but  not  heavy  strain  on  iii  the 
same  direction  the  weed  lies.  The  fish  may  (if  he  does 
not  get  free)  get  tired  and  let  go,  or  the  weed  clear 
itself.  The  chance  is  not  much  of  a  one,  still  it  is  the 
only  one. 

When  a  fish  is  first  hooked,  if  he  be  in  a  weedy  place, 
get  a  strong  pull  at  him  at  once  before  he  knows  where  he 
is  or  what  you  are  about,  and  lug  him  out  of  it.  If  you 
leave  him  there,  he  will  be  sure  to  go  into  the  weeds 
sooner  or  later,  so  you  may  as  well  try  conclusions  with 
him  at  once.  I  have  often  lugged  a  pound  fish  over  a  bed 
of  weeds  a  yard  wide,  and,  more,  by  taking  the  initiative. 
Where  a  fish  bores  determinedly  in  a  weed,  root  or  hole, 
you  must  try  and  slant  his  head  another  way,  and  if  that 
does  not  do  just  hold  on  and  let  him  do  his  worst.  You 
may  as  well  lose  him  at  first  as  at  last  after  half  an  hour's 
roking  and  poking,  loss  of  time,  and  aggravation. 


FLY  FISHING  FOE  TEOUT.  103 

Don't  puU  hard  at  a  trout  when  he  is  down  stream, 
more  particularly  if  he  lies  head  up  towards  you.  It  is  a 
dangerous  thing  to  do.  If  you  can,  always  keep  below  your 
j&sh,  and  coax  him  down.  In  the  first  place  he  won't  dis- 
turb the  water  so  much,  and  in  the  next  it  is  the  safest  way 
to  deal  with  a  fish,  and  the  quickest  method  of  tiring  him. 

When  you  are  going  to  land  your  fish,  don't  be  in 
a  hurry  nor  in  a  flurry  ;  bring  the  fish  steadily  round 
within  reach,  let  the  netsman  stand  with  the  net  under 
water,  so  that  the  fish  may,  almost,  as  it  were,  be  led  into 
it  and  until  the  fish  is  almost  within  the  ring  the  less 
obtrusive  or  active  the  netsman  is  the  better.  When  he 
sees  the  fish  within  his  power  a  steady  upward  sweep  will 
do  the  business.  More  fish  are  lost  by  dashing  at  them, 
and  more  aggravation  also  caused  thus  than  by  almost 
any  other  means.  The  Irishman  who  having  dashed  at  a 
salmon  with  the  gaff,  and  scratched  him,  after  his  master 
had  with  incalculable  patience  and  skill  humoured  the  fish 
in  out  of  most  dangerous  ground,  and  when  another 
minute's  patience  would  have  safely  secured  the  fish,  and 
who  stood  exclaiming  with  pride  and  delight,  "Begorra,  I 
hot  him  that  toime ! "  may  or  may  not  be  a  satisfactory 
picture,  but  the  feelings  of  the  master  who  sees  his  fish  go 
clean  the  other  side  of  that  particular  rock,  which  the  less 
said  about  the  better — is  a  picture  also,  which  likewise 
perhaps  the  less  is  said  about  the  better.  If  you  have  a  man 
who  is  a  bungler,  take  the  net  and  land  your  fish  yourself, 
and  when  you  get  him  home  at  night,  you  may  call  him 
"Cassio"  if  you  please,  and  you  may  even  "love  him 
well,"  but  be  sure  that  "  he  never  more  be  officer  of 
thine."  Having  got  your  fish  on  shore,  your  operation  is 
complete,  knock  the  fish  on  the  head,  and  put  him  in  the 
basket,  never  let  the  poor  wretch  die  of  slow  suffocation — 


104  ANGLING. 

even  as  a  matter  of  economy — for  it  spoils  the  fish,  and  he 
won't  keep  nearly  as  long. 

If  I  have  advised  the  angler  to  be  as  unobtrusive  as  pos- 
sible when  fishing  for  other  fish,  this  caution  is  needed  ten 
times  more  in  fishing  for  so  wary  a  creature  as  a  trout — 
even  small  trout  soon  get  to  know  their  way  about  when 
they  have  tasted  steel ;  but  a  good  fish,  and  particularly  a 
veteran,  is  I  do  believe,  next  to  a  red  deer,  one  of  the 
wariest,  downiest,  artfuUest  things  within  civilised  crea- 
tion. Where  they  are  very  little  fished  for  of  course  they 
are  unsuspicious,  but  they  very  soon  learn  to  know  when 
they  are  fished  for.  They  soon  get  accustomed  to  the  sight 
of  people  walking  along  the  banks  if  there  be  a  footpath 
near,  but  they  know  a  fly  or  the  wave  of  a  rod  with  very 
little  practice.  When  fish  are  as  wary  as  they  are  in  some 
of  the  Hampshire  waters,  you  can't  be  too  circumspect ; 
and  at  times  it  is  almost  desirable,  if  you  want  to  catch 
fish,  to  swarm  along  on  your  stomach  as  you  do  in  deer 
stalking  ;  when  the  water  is  at  all  open,  you  must  go  down 
on  your  knee,  or  get  the  stump  of  a  tree  or  a  bank  at  your 
back,  which  will  often  serve  you  well  with  the  wariest 
tr6at. 

There  is  an  old  controversial  matter  among  fly-fishers, 
whether  you  should  fish  up  or  down  stream,  and,  like 
everythmg  else  in  fishing,  it  depends  on  circumstances. 
For  example,  at  night  you  would  almost  always  fish  down, 
because,  having  to  trust  very  much  to  feeling,  you  want  a 
tight  line ;  again,  if  you  are  fishing  with  the  dry  fly,  and 
the  wind  is  dead  down  stream,  you  can't  fish  up,  particu- 
larly if  you  are  fishing  the  floating  drake  or  dry  May  fly  ; 
but  even  when  you  are  obliged  under  these  circumstances 
to  cast  down  stream,  you  don't  drag  your  fly  up  against  it 
— only  when  fishing  at  night,  or  in  very  small  streams 


FLY   FISHING  FOR  TROUT.  105 

where  the  trout  are  small  and  unsophisticated,  would  you 
do  this.  No!  though  you  cast  down  you  let  your  fly 
travel  down  with  the  stream  as  far  as  you  can,  just  as  you 
do  when  fishing  or  casting  up  stream  ;  you  merely  cast 
rather  short,  and,  letting  the  fly  fall  in  the  water,  with  the 
rod  pretty  upright,  so  as  to  have  a  good  supply  of  line  in 
hand,  lower  the  rod  slowly  until  you  can  let  no  more,  and 
under  these  circumstances  this  very  often  (if  you  can  keep 
well  out  of  sight)  answers  as  well  or  better  than  fishing  up 
to  fish,  because  the  fly,  and  not  the  line,  comes  over  his 
nose  first.  This  is  called  drifting,  and  by  the  practice  of 
it  I  have  caught  many  good  trout  on  bright  days  and 
stillish  water,  but  it  requires  much  care  and  caution,  not 
to  say  usage,  to  do  it  well ;  but  the  great  bulk  of  the 
casting  is  made  rather  across,  than  either  up  or  down. 
You  see  a  fish  rise,  and  you  cast  across  and  above  him, 
and  let  the  fly  travel  down  so  as  to  come  over  his  nose,  but 
to  let  as  little  of  the  Une  do  so  as  possible.  The  first  and 
last  object  of  the  fly  fisher  is  to  show  as  much  of  his  fly  to 
the  fish  as  possible,  and  as  little  of  anything  else.  Let 
that  be  his  constant  and  unvarying  study  if  he  desires  to 
catch  fish,  for  it  is  the  backbone  of  fly  fishing.  In  fishing 
with  the  wet  fly  in  the  early  months,  you  fish  down  stream 
if  the  wind  is  adverse,  but  you  cast  across  and  let  the  fly 
sweep  round  ;  at  such  times,  however,  you  do  not  wait  to 
see  rises  but  fish  the  water  on  the  chance  of  one. 

Always  pay  particular  attention  to  the  fish  which  you 
see  rising  under  the  banks  ;  and  don't  be  deluded  into  the 
notion  that  because  you  see  a  fish  make  no  more  break  on 
the  water  than  a  minnow  would,  that  he  is  a  minnow,  for 
he  is  quite  as  likely  to  be  a  three  pounder.  It  is  strange 
how  quietly  a  big  fish  will  often  take  fly  after  fly,  close  to 
a  bank,  with  only  just  his  upper  lip  put  to  the  surface  to 


106  ANGLING. 

suck  in  the  victim;  you  think  him  "  trash,"  and  make  a  care- 
less bungling  cast,  and — "  whoosh !  "  Who  would  have 
thought  it  ?     Off  he  goes,  with  a  furrow  like  a  four-oar. 

Fish  taking  under  banks,  whether  in  your  own  side  or 
opposite,  always  take  much  better  than  fish  rising  in  the 
open  stream ;  they  are  close  at  home,  and  have  shelter  at 
hand,  and  have  more  confidence.  It  requires  great  nicety 
of  casting  often  times  to  get  fish  out  from  under  your  own 
or  an  opposite  bank  ;  they  lay  there  almost  touching,  and 
rising  within  an  inch  of  the  bank,  and  you  must  cast 
within  an  inch  of  the  bank  too.  It  is  of  no  use  to  cast 
six  or  eight  inches  or  more  this  or  that  side  of  it— dozens 
of  flies  pass  along  out  there  which  the  trout  never  notices 
— for  he  knows  that  enough  will  pass  within  an  inch  above 
his  nose  to  afford  him  a  good  full  meal  without  any  need 
of  his  swimming  a  foot  for  it ;  and,  if  you  want  to  rise 
him,  vour  fly  must  come  over  him  too.  In  a  fish  of  this 
kind,  too,  it  is  not  safe  to  drop  your  fly  within  much  less 
than  a  yard  of  him,  about  four  feet  above  him  is  perhaps 
the  proper  thing ;  and  if  it  comes  fairly  to  him,  and  no 
twig  or  spine  of  grass,  or  bunch  of  weed  outside,  catches 
the  line  and  causes  the  fly  to  do  queer  things,  and  the  fly 
happens  to  appear  to  be  of  the  same  sort  that  his  worship 
is  devouring,  or  there  is  nothing  objectionable  about  it, 
you  will  see  that  magic  dimple  as  your  line  is  passing  the 
spot,  and  find  that  you  have  an  interest  in  that  perform- 
ance if  you  tighten  the  line. 

I  need  not  say  to  the  angler  cast  lightly  and  don't 
splash,  for  if  he  does,  he  will  very  soon  fiind  out  the  im- 
portance of  these  instructions  for  himself;  nor  need  I 
further  add  that  it  will  be  conducive  to  sport  to  present 
your  fly  to  the  trout  as  like  a  fly  as  possible,  either  alive 
or  dead — it  matters  very  little,  perhaps,  which. 


FLY  FISHING  FOR  TROUT.  107 

I  won't  enter  on  the  argument*  as  to  why  one  should 
imitate  nature  in  his  flies  as  closely  as  possible.  If  any 
one  wishes  to  learn  why  this  should  be  done,  they  can  find 
it  set  out  at  length  in  my  "  Book  on  Angling ;"  but  I 
have  no  space  for  that,  or  many  other  matters  here.  I 
recommend  the  angler  to  imitate  nature,  myself.  If  the 
angler  is  content  to  take  his  advice  and  instruction  from 
me,  well  and  good,  if  not,  let  him  go  elsewhere.  Acci- 
dental flies  and  general  flies,  no  doubt,  catch  fish,  and 
often  abundantly  at  times,  but  there  are  dozens  of  times, 
when  the  fish  are  feeding  on  some  particular  fly,  and  when, 
if  you  happen  to  have  a  good  imitation  of  that  fly,  you 
can  fill  your  basket ;  and,  if  you  have  not,  a  bare  fish  or 
two  will  be  all  your  take,  and  often  you  will  not  catch  even 
that.  Only  last  season  I  fished  down  about  three-quarters 
of  a  mile  of  water,  trying  two  or  three  duns — I  got  four 
or  five  rises,  and  caught  one  fish.  I  came  back  to  the  top 
(the  fish  were  rising  incessantly  all  the  time  I  fished),  I 
changed  the  fly  for  an  exact  imitation  of  the  one  on  the 
water,  and,  going  over  the  same  water  a  second  time,  I  got 
over  thirty  good  rises,  and  hooked  seven  or  eight  brace  of 
fish.  Of  course  the  first  time  you  go  over  a  water  in  the 
day  is  by  far  the  most  favourable  time,  if  the  fish  are  rising. 

Now,  there  are  two  ways  of  fishing  your  fly,  the  one, 
and  the  most  common  one,  is  with  the  wet  fly ;  the  other,  and 
the  more  scientific,  is  with  the  dry.  The  wet  fly  is  cast 
upon  the  water  time  after  time,  and  usually  sinks,  more  or 
less,  beneath  the  surface,  and  it  can  only  be  taken  for  a 
drowned  fly  or  some  other  water  insect.  In  this  case  you 
will  often  not  see  the  rise  of  the  fish,  and  you  must  have 
one  eye  on  the  line,  and  when  you  see  it  check  or  stop, 
strike  instantly.  There  are  waters  in  many  parts  of  the 
country,  however,  where,  after  about  the  middle  of  May, 


108  ANGLING. 

unless  you  happen  on  a  very  rough  and  wet  day,  the  fish 
will  not  take  a  wet  fly.  They  get  suspicious  and  well  edu- 
cated. The  weather  is  fine  and  moderate,  and  they  really 
see  very  few  drowned  flies  about,  and,  consequently,  they 
look  pretty  closely  at  one  when  it  comes  along,  and  their 
quick  sight  soon  detects  the  peculiar  blue  curly  barbed 
tail  which  the  drowned  fly  possesses.  At  such  times  they 
feed  freely  on  the  live  insect  sitting  up  and  floating  on  the 
8ar6u»  of  the  water,  and  you  have,  therefore,  to  imitate 
that  as  closely  as  possible,  and  by  whipping  the  fly  back- 
ward and  forward  four  or  five  times  (or  more  if  needed) 
between  each  cast,  all  the  wet  is  shaken  out,  and  the  line 
and  fly  are  so  far  dried  that  they  float  on  the  surface  for 
some  distance,  until  the  draft  of  the  stream  submerges 
and  wets  them  again. 

In  casting  the  dry  fly,  send  the  line  as  straight  as 
possible  and  without  any  waves  or  curls  on  the  water,  and 
allow  it  to  float  down  over  the  head  of  the  fish  as  like  the 
natural  fly  as  possible,  and  without  any  pull  or  guidance. 

If  you  pull  it  at  all,  the  line  will  make  a  streak  on  the 
surface,  and  will  certainly  frighten  the  /ish.  In  fishing 
the  wet  fly,  it  is  often  a  good  plan,  in  deep  waters  or  holes, 
to  let  the  fly  sink  as  deep  as  you  can ;  you  may  even 
facilitate  its  sinking  by  biting  a  shot  on  the  line  at  the 
head  of  the  fly  ;  and  by  jerking  it  through  the  water  with 
short  jerks  it  will  often  tempt  the  fish  which  are  not 
feeding  on  the  top,  as  they  will  mistake  it  for  some  larva. 
Therefore,  the  code  of  regulations  as  regards  wet,  dry, 
and  sunk  flies,  comes  pretty  much  to  this :  in  the  early 
part  of  the  season,  or  on  rough  and  rainy  days,  you  may 
fish  with  the  wet  fly ;  but  in  the  latter  portion,  and  fine 
weather,  use  the  dry.  In  hatch  holes,  deep  mill  heads  or 
tails,  or  such   places,  where  the  fish  are  big,  and  feed 


FLY  FISHma  FOR  TEOUT.  109 

more  on  minnows,  shrimp,  and  larva  than  flies,  sink  your  fly. 
As  general  directions,  these  will  be  found  pretty  reliable. 
Though  I  do  not  like  night  ^shing,  and  indeed  would 
never  allow  it  on  any  good  water,  yet  you  go  at  times  to 
places  where  it  is  practised,  and  where  your  only  chance 
of  catching  a  good  fish  is  at  night.  Fish  by  sight  if  you 
can,  that  is,  if  the  light  shines  enough  on  the  water  to 
detect  the  circles  made  by  the  rise  ;  but  if  you  cannot  see, 
then  you  must  fish  down,  and,  keeping  a  tight  line,  fish  by 
feeling  the  rise,  and  you  cannot  be  too  quick  in  your 
strike  when  you  do  feel  a  touch,  as  the  trout  reject  the 
fly  as  quickly  as  they  take  it ;  but  it  is  pokey  work  at  the 
best.  You  fish  with  a  short  line  and  a  stout ;  you  cannot 
see  where  your  fish  is  going,  and  you  hang  on  and  get  him 
out  anyhow.  There  is  no  nicety  in  throwing,  and  if  you 
happen  to  be  wading,  and  you  do  not  make  any  disturb- 
ance, the  fish  will  rise  within  a  yard  of  you. 


110  ANGUNG. 


CHAPTER    VIII. 
TROUT  FLIES. 

And  now  we  must  say  a  word  or  two  as  to  that  important 
subject,  flies.  The  best  flies  to  use  are  imitations  of  those 
which  are  bom  in  the  water ;  for,  though  trout  will  often 
take  land  flies,  and  indeed  almost  any  insect  you  can 
throw  on  the  water,  yet  it  is  on  the  water-flies  which  he 
chiefly  depends  for  his  sustenance,  and  these  are  the  flies 
which,  for  the  most  part,  fill  the  following  list : 

LIST  OF  FLIES  FOR  EACH  MONTH. 

March. — The  blue  dun,  hare's  ear,  the  March  brown, 
the  coch-y-bonddhu,*  and  sometimes  the  olive  dun.  You 
rarely  want  more  than  these  flies,  though  in  some  rivers  a 
little  creeper  is  found. 

April. — All  the  last  month's  flies,  with  the  olive  dun, 
red  spinner,  and  on  bright  days  the  yellow  dun. 

May. — Many  of  the  old  flies  are  good  still,  though  the 
March  brown  begins  to  give  place  to  the  alder ;  and  the 
blue  dun  only  shows  now  and  then  in  cold  days.  The 
black  gnat  often  shows  up  strong.  The  duns  now  vary 
from  yellow  or  almost  green  to  the  palest  lemon,  and  where 

*  Dress  this  lar^e,  about  March  brown  size,  and  rib  with 
gold  tinsel,  and  it  is  a  capital  rongh  water  fly,  to  use  wet  all  the 
season  nearly. 


TEOUT  FLIES.  Ill 

it  is  found  the  little  iron  blue  dun  or  watchet,  as  it  is 
called  in  the  north,  does  well. 

June. — Most  of  the  old  flies  will  still  come  in  at  times, 
and  you  may  add  the  sedge,  very  slight  variations  of  which 
wiU  also  include  the  sand  fly,  the  cinnamon,  and  the 
mushroom.  It  is  a  capital  fly  on  very  many  waters. 
Early  in  June,  the  celebrated  green  and  grey  drakes 
appear,  and  the  fish  have  their  great  gorge  of  the  season. 
The  quill  gnats  are  excellent  flies  now. 

July  is  a  bad  month  as  a  rule,  and  few  new  flies  come 
in.  The  duns  and  quill  gnats  will  be  found  the  best  day 
flies,  with  sedges,  alders,  &c.,  for  the  evening. 

August. — The  old  flies  still  prevail.  A  fly  which  we  call 
the  dark-winged  olive  comes  on  in  the  evening  on  many 
rivers,  and  is  good  now  to  the  end  of  September. 

September. — Add  to  all  the  old  flies  the  whirling  blue 
dun,  and  the  willow  flies,  and  that  is  all  that  is  new  in 
September. 

General  Flies. — To  these  ordinary  natural  flies  there 
are  certain  flies  called  general  flies,  which,  bearing  a 
general  or  fancied  resemblance  to  various  flies,  are  taken 
by  the  fish.  These  are  The  Francis,  the  Governor, 
Hammond's  Adopted,  Hoffland's  Fancy,  the  Coachman,  the 
Wichham,  the  Partridge  and  Grouse  Hackles,  and  the 
Caperer. 

With  the  above  collection  of  flies,  which  is  pared  down 
as  close  as  it  may  well  be  for  general  work,  the  angler 
ought  to  be  able  to  do  good  service  on  any  stream,  regard 
being  had  to  the  size  of  the  flies,  which  must  be  a  good 
deal  smaller  on  some  streams  than  on  others.  There  are 
special  flies  suited  to  special  streams,  or  flies  that  are  only 
partial,  as,  for  example,  the  grannom,  the  spider  fly,  &c. — 
very  useful  for  particular  rivers  here  and  there,  but  I  do 


112  ANGLING. 

not  deal  with  particular  rivers  here  ;  and  for  any  extension 
in  that  direction  the  angler  must  again  consult  the  "  Book 
on  Angling.**  As  to  the  dressing  of  the  various  flies  named, 
the  duns  come  first,  and  here  hooks  from  11  or  12  up  to 
8  or  9  will  be  used.  I  need  hardly  counsel  the  use  of  fine 
gut  for  the  smaller  flies,  as  if  the  angler  does  not  use  it 
he  will  have  few  fish  to  show.  On  some  rivers  they  use 
not  only  flies  but  collars  or  casting  lines  of  single  horse- 
hair ;  and  they  are  all  very  well  in  moderate  weather,  but 
do  not  do  in  a  wind,  nor  where  the  fish  run  over  half  a 
pound  or  so.  The  dims  are  the  grand  stand-by  of  the 
fisherman.  These  are  of  all  colours,  from  a  dark  slatey 
blue  to  the  palest  possible  ash,  and  from  a  deep  yellow  to 
the  faintest  lemon  almost  white,  apple  green,  olive,  and 
dark  iron  blue. 

,  The  blue  dun  should  have  a  slate  blue  quill  body, 
legs  of  a  dun  freckled  cock*s  hackle;  some  use  a  dark 
honey  dun  hackle  with  yellowish  tips  and  a  smoky  blue 
centre,  with  two  strands  of  the  same  for  the  tail — 
wings  from  the  starling's  wing,  more  or  less  dark.  By 
lightening  the  shades  of  all  these  feathers  and  the  body 
you  may  carry  the  fly  on  to  the  representation  of  other 
duns  which  come  in  later  on  in  the  season. 

The  yellow  dun. — The  same  process  is  followed  here. 
Taking  a  yellow  sUk  body  and  medium  honey  dun  hackle 
with  moderate  starling  wing,  you  get  them  lighter  and 
lighter  till  you  get  the  body  the  faintest  lemon  or  straw 
colour,  the  hackle  the  lightest  honey  dun,  and  the  wings 
of  the  pale  blue  feather  of  the  sea-swallow  or  roseate  tern, 
which  is  Mr.  Aldam*s  dressing  for  one  of  the  best  summer 
flies  you  can  put  on,  and  hitherto  almost  impossible  to 
imitate.  The  above  two  series  will  give  some  seven  or 
eight  different  shades  of  duns  which  come  on  daring  the 


TEOUT  FLIES.  113 

season  under  different  names,  and  which  are  invaluable  to 
the  angler. 

The  olive  dun  is  another  very  useful  fly  used  a  good 
deal  through  the  season.  The  body  should  be  dressed  of 
a  dark  olive  silk,  or  quill  more  or  less  stained  olive  yellow, 
with  a  turn  of  gold  tinsel  at  the  tail  end — some  rib  it 
with  yellow  silk,  or  even  fine  gold  wire — the  hackle  olive, 
with  two  strands  of  the  same  for  the  tail ;  the  wings 
of  starling,  darker  or  lighter.  This  fly  varies  considerably. 
Some  years  you  may  stain  the  wings  lightly  with  onion 
dye,  and  both  legs  and  body  are  more  or  less  yellow. 
Hooks  9,  10,  and  11. 

The  hare's  ear,  one  of  the  earliest  and  best  flies  used. 
It  comes  on  in  March,  and  may  be  used  at  intervals 
throughout  the  season.  The  body  and  legs  are  of  hare's 
ear  fur,  darker  or  lighter,  with  starling  wing,  also  darker 
or  lighter.     Some  rib  it  with  fine  gold  tinsel. 

The  Hue  dun  is  best  dressed  as  the  blue  quill  described 
at  page  118. 

The  yellow  dun  runs  so  closely  into  the  yellower  kinds  of 
olive  that  there  is  little  or  no  difference.  It  should  have 
a  yellow  silk  body,  not  too  dark,  pale  yellow  oHve  hackle 
and  light  starling  wing. 

Little  iron  blue — a  dark  slate  quill  body,  a  dark  blue 
feather  from  the  cormorant's  wing,  the  tomtit's  tail,  or  the 
moorhen's  breast,  for  a  wing,  hackle  a  shade  or  two  lighter 
than  the  body,  or  light  grey  even  to  straw  colour,  for  it 
varies  a  good  deal,  with  a  couple  of  short  strands  for  the 
tail.  Later  editions  of  this  fly  come  out  as  the  season  goes 
on,  but  they  are  mostly  lighter  in  colour,  and  with  a  fine 
yellow  silk  ribbing.     It  changes  to  the 

Jenny  Spinner,  a  fly  which  fish  take  voraciously  at 
times,  but  which  is  hard  to  imitate  ;  a  watery  whitish  floss 

I 


114  ANGLING. 

silk  body,  with  a  turn  of  brown  at  the  head  and  tail,  and 
a  pale  silvery  blue  hackle  for  legs  and  wings,  is  as  good 
as  anything. 

The  red  and  hroum  apinners  are  the  changes  undergone 
by  the  blue  and  yellow  duns.  The  red  spinner  should  be 
dressed  with  a  deep  brownish  red,  a  sort  of  burnt  sienna 
floss  silk  for  the  body,  ribbed  with  fine  gold  tinsel ;  a  red 
hackle  for  legs,  and  two  strands  of  the  same  for  the  tail,  a 
very  light  bit  from  a  young  starling's  wing  for  the  wings. 
I  have  used  pale  blue  hackle  points  for  these,  and  very 
successfully.  The  brown  spinner  is  a  somewhat  similar 
fly,  dressed  two  or  three  shades  paler.  Some  call  it  "  the 
sherry  spinner,"  from  its  colour.  There  are  two  or  three 
shades  of  this  fly,  some  with  bluish  or  greenish  olive  bodies 
of  quill.  It  is  best  dressed  hacklewise,  with  a  hackle  pale 
straw  colour  or  silvery  dun,  or  even  whiteish,  with  dark 
streak  down  the  centre. 

The  March  bronm  kills  more  fish  than  any  other  fly 
where  it  is  found.  It  comes  thickly  out  on  many  rivers, 
and  at  a  period  when  the  fish  are  himgry.  The  body  is 
made  either  of  brown  crewel  or  hare's  fur,  lighter  or 
darker,  according  as  you  wish  to  vary  the  fly  from  male 
to  female,  ribbed  with  straw  coloured  silk  or  gold  tinsel ; 
legs,  a  partridge's  back  feather ;  wing,  the  mottled  feather 
from  a  hen  pheasant's  wing,  woodcock,  or  the  wings  of  a 
game  hen ;  tail,  two  strands  from  the  same  ;  hooks,  from 
7  or  8  to  10  or  11. 

The  alder,  another  very  useful  fly,  comes  in  as  the 
March  brown  dies  out.  It  is  dressed  with  a  mixture  of 
peacock  harl,  and  black  ostrich  harl,  for  the  body,  with  a 
tnm  of  mulberry  silk  at  the  tail ;  a  rusty  black  or  dusty 
iron  blue  hackle ;  wing  from  peacock's  back  feather  or  a 
brown  hen's  rump ;  hook  8  to  10. 


TEOUT  FLIES.  115 

The  sedge,  a  famous  fly  tlirough  Hampshire  and  the 
midland  districts ;  body  stoutish  and  of  buff  or  brown 
crewel ;  sandy  red  hackle  from  head  to  tail,  ribbed  over 
the  reverse  way  with  fine  gold  tinsel ;  under  wing,  a 
little  starling;  upper  wing,  landrail  or  hen  pheasant. 
Make  the  body  slender,  and  of  a  browner  hue,  and  do 
away  with  the  tinsel  and  the  imder  wing,  and  you  get  the 
sandfly.  Make  this  again  more  creamy  in  the  body,  and 
you  obtain  the  cinnamon. 

The  quill  gnat. — This  is  a  very  useful  fly,  and  is  found 
on  the  water  previous  to  and  throughout  the  Mayfly 
season  and  even  later.  The  body  is  made  of  a  strip  of 
the  bluish  quill  of  the  starling,  which  forms  a  natural 
ribbing ;  legs,  a  red  hackle ;  wing,  lightish  starling ;  the 
tail  being  two  whisks  of  silver  dun  hackle.  Another 
kind  of  quill  gnat  is  dressed  with  a  medium  blue  dun 
hackle,  and  a  slightly  darker  wing  and  tail.  Hooks 
10  to  12. 

The  hlacJc  gnat. — The  smallest  possible  hook,  lapped 
round  with  a  few  turns  of  short  black  ostrich  harl  for 
body,  two  turns  of  small  black  hackle  for  legs,  and  a  little 
slip  of  light  or  very  dark  starling,  for  it  varies,  for  wing, 
form  the  best  representation  of  it.  There  are  two  or  three 
black  gnats,  and  unless  you  have  the  right  one  you  will 
not  kill. 

The  willow  fly. — This  is  a  curious  fly  which  may  be 
found  on  the  water  of  different  sizes  at  different  times  of 
the  year  late  and  early.  It  is  a  flat  winged  fly,  the  wings 
— of  which  it  has  two  pairs — lying  one  over  the  other  flat 
down  the  back.  The  body  may  be  made  of  starling  quill ; 
the  hackle,  freckled  dun.  The  wings  are  exactly  the 
colour  of  an  alder's,  and  the  rump  of  a  red  hen,  or  a  bit  of 
clear  speckled  hen  pheasant  might  do.     Hooks  Nos.  10 

I  2 


116  ANGLING. 

aod  11.  The  little  needle  brown  may  be  dressed  on  the 
same  lines,  but  smaller. 

The  whirling  <7m»,  a  useful  late  August  and  September 
fly.  Body,  a  couple  of  strands  of  blue  heron  hackle,  or 
back  feather  warped  like  harl ;  buff  silk  ribbing,  brown 
red  hackle,  darkish  starling  wing.     Hooks  Nos.  10  and  11. 

TJie  green  drake. — This  very  noted  fly  is  dressed  in  many 
different  ways.  It  varies  in  shade  and  colour  a  good  deal 
on  various  rivers;  on  some  the  wings  are  the  palest 
yellowish  green,  or  greenish  yellow,  and  they  vary  from 
this  down  to  a  dark  bluish  olive,  the  legs,  bodies,  and  tails, 
even,  varying  equally.  It  is  difficult,  therefore,  to  give 
any  particular  dressing  that  will  suit  more  than  a  few 
rivers  of  a  certainty.  I  shall  give  the  fly  which  I  use  the 
most  of,  and  I  shall  leave  the  angler  or  dresser  to  vary  it 
as  much  as  he  chooses.  First  whip  on  the  tail  three 
strands  of  a  cock  pheasant's  tail  feather,  and  then  tie  in 
by  the  tip  on  the  back  of  the  fly  an  olive  or  a  sandy  red 
hackle,  half  way  down  the  hook,  and  leave  it  hanging. 
The  colour  of  the  green  drake's  body  is  in  nothing  so  well 
represented  as  in  a  slip  of  straw  or  a  bit  of  maize  leaf, 
such  as  is  used  by  Spaniards  for  cigarettes.  I  therefore 
make  most  of  my  May  fly  bodies  of  this,  by  cutting  off  a 
slip  just  big  enough  to  roll  on  the  hook  for  the  body  ;  as 
the  tail  end  is  pointed,  a  wedge  or  two  should  be  cut  out 
of  the  lower  end  to  enable  it  to  be  drawn  to  a  point,  which 
is  done  by  two  or  three  laps  of  burnt  sienna-coloured  silk, 
which  is  then  touched  with  varnish  to  secure  it,  and  give 
it  the  colour  which  is  seen  at  the  tail  of  the  natural  fly  in 
a  splotcK  of  brown.  The  straw,  being  secured  at  the  tail 
end,  and  the  edges  brought  neatly  together  up  the  back, 
should  then  be  bound  on  firmly  by  ribs  of  the  brown  silk, 
carefidly  avoiding  the  olive  hackle  which  is  left  hanging ; 


TEOUT  FLIES.  117 

and  having  secured  the  straw  body,  wind  on  the  olive 
hackle,  and  fasten  it  off  just  above  the  straw,  and  tie  on 
the  point  of  a  bustard,  florican,  grey  partridge,  or  breast 
of  grey  hen,  or  a  bittern  hackle  ;  I  like  the  bustard  best, 
as  being  more  like  the  Mayfly  legs ;  in  winding  this  on, 
the  last  turn  is  given  so  that  one  side  of  the  hackle  points 
turn  upwards,  representing  the  fore  legs  of  the  May  fly, 
which  always  point  in  that  direction.  This  is  not  a  sine 
qua  norij  but  it  is  an  additional  similarity  and  is  easy  to 
do.  The  wings  are  two  small  drake  feathers  stained  to 
the  right  colour,  and  here  the  angler  may  suit  the  colour 
to  his  fancy,  greenish-yellow  with  a  slight  olive  tinge,  a 
most  difficult  colour  to  dye  (so  that  it  will  stand),  or  a 
darker  bluish  olive  tinge.  It  is  as  well  to  have  both 
shades ;  some  prefer  the  feathers  of  the  Egyptian  goose, 
and  I  like  them  if  stained  of  the  right  colour ;  some  like 
the  simimer  duck,  which  is  good  for  a  change.  There  are 
a  few  feathers  on  a  drake  which  are  nearer  to  the  dark 
back  feathers,  more  of  dingy  freckled  sort,  and  less 
regular  in  their  markings,  which  I  prefer  to  any,  but 
there  are  only  a  few  of  them,  and  they  are  not  eas^  co 
get ;  but,  whichever  be  chosen,  they  must  be  tied  on  nearly 
upright  and  back  to  back,  so  as  to  spread  out  and  support 
the  fly  upright  on  the  water.  The  head  may  be  made  of 
two  or  three  turns  of  bronzed  peacock  harl.  This  is  the 
best  pattern  for  a  green  drake  I  know  of,  and  for  floating, 
if  the  hook  be  not  too  heavy,  cannot  be  beaten.  Ham- 
mond, of  Winchester,  an  excellent  judge  of  flies  in  his 
day,  used  the  speckled  white  partridge  hackle  instead  of 
bustard,  and  a  sandy  red  one  below  instead  of  olive,  and 
a  yellow  or  lemon  coloured  crewel  body,  though  he  latterly 
adopted  straw  on  my  recommendation.  The  eyed  hooks 
made  for  this  purpose  by  Mr.  Hutchinson,  of  Kendal,  do 


118  ANGLING. 

exceedingly  well.  You  can  get  them  of  any  size.  I 
always  find  the  fish  take  the  smaller  sizes  best,  though 
they  rise  at  the  largest  well. 

The  grey  drake  is  the  change  undergone  by  the  green 
drake  when  it  casts  its  skin  and  becomes  a  perfect  fly,  and 
it  is  often  a  most  capital  change  for  the  fish  towards 
eyening.  The  body,  head,  and  tail  should  be  made  as 
before  ;  the  hackle  should  be  a  sandy  red,  or  a  rusty  blue, 
the  wings  of  the  grey  speckled  drake's  feather. 

The  black  drake^  which  is  the  perfect  male  fly,  is,  I 
think,  even  a  better  fly  still.  It  should  be  dressed  a  size 
smaller  than  the  grey  drake  body,  tail  and  head  as  before, 
but  the  hackle  should  be  a  silver  grey  with  a  black  streak 
in  the  middle,  with  dark  partridge  at  breast,  and  the  wings 
should  be  of  the  close  barred  feather  of  the  teal.  I  have 
had  good  sport  with  this  fly  toward  the  end  of  the  May. 
fly  season. 

There  are  several  other  natural  flies  which  are  useful 
in  various  rivers;  but,  as  I  seldom  use  them  myself, 
I  don't  give  the  dressing,  but  the  angler  can  get 
them  at  the  tackle  maker's  if  he  wants  them.  Among 
the  best  there  is  the  oak  fly,  the  cowdung,  the  ant 
flies,  the  gravel  bed,  the  grannom,  &c.,  &c.  The  blue, 
yellow,  and  olive  duns  have  of  late  years  become  so 
muddled  and  mixed  up,  and  the  colours  and  times  of 
appearance  seem  to  vary  and  change  so,  that  I  find  the 
best  way  to  discount  them  is  to  dress  three  sorts  of  flies, 
which  we  call  in  Hampshire  quills.  There  is  first  the  blue 
quill,  light  and  dark,  two  shades ;  the  body  is  dressed 
with  quill,  the  hackle  blue,  and  the  wing  starling,  lighter 
or  darker  to  suit  the  shades.  Then  there  is  the  olive 
quill,  a  great  medicine  of  my  friend,  Mr.  Marryatt's. 
Here  the  quill  is  stained  either  lightly  or  deeper ;  the 


TROUT  FLIES.  119 

hackle  is  an  olive  either  lighter  or  darker.  You  may  have 
three  shades,  the  wing  lighter  or  darker  as  before  ;  this 
runs  into  many  shades  of  olive  or  yellow  duu.  The  red 
quill,  plain  undyed  quill,  with  a  lighter  or  darker  red  hackle, 
wing  lighter  or  darker  as  before.  This  will  cover  most  of 
the  duns  except  the  brown  or  hare's  ear.  The  iron  blue 
and  the  little  wee  sky  Hue  or  light  durij  with  palest  prim- 
rose body,  hackle  of  the  same,  and  the  lightest  possible 
wing.  The  quill  commonly  used  is  a  single  harl  of  green 
peacock  eye  stripped  of  its  fluff.  This  rolls  on  in  rings 
nicely,  and  makes  a  lovely  body.  If  you  want  to  dye  it 
much  a  single  strand  from  the  wing  of  the  condor — an  old 
bird,  it  must  be  of  a  dozen  years  old — does  better,  but  it 
does  not  strip  well,  and  you  have  to  pull  the  fluff  off ; 
adjutant  does  equally.  You  can  stain  these  any  colour. 
The  quill  bodies  do  not  absorb  moisture,  and  float  nobly, 
and  are  thus  a  great  advantage. 

GENERAL  FLEES. 

The  Francis  may  be  made  of  any  size  from  No.  6  to 
No.  10.  Body,  peacock  harl,  ribbed  with  copper  coloured 
floss  silk  ;  legs,  blue  dun  hackle  ;  wings,  two  points  of  the 
same  (freckled).  It  is  a  very  good  evening  and  rough 
weather  fly.  I  have  made  great  takes  with  it,  and  have 
heard  of  others  from  all  parts  of  the  world. 

The  Governor. — A  capital  fly,  that  kills  all  over  the 
kingdom  from  May  out.  Body,  bronze  peacock  harl,  with 
two  turns  of  yellow  orange  floss  silk  at  the  tail ;  red  hackle 
and  a  bit  of  hen  pheasant  wing  for  wings.     From  6  to  10. 

The  Coachman.— A.  very  useful  evening  fly,  kills  well  at 
dark  in  many  places.  Body  and  legs  as  before;  wings, 
two  slips  of  white  goose  or  any  fine  white  feather.  Hook 
8  to  11. 


laO  ANGLING. 

Wickham*8  fancy. — ^An  excellent  all  day  and  nearly  all 
season  fly,  not  only  in  Hampshire,  whence  it  sprung,  but 
in  many  other  streams.  Body,  gold  tinsel ;  red  hackle 
from  head  to  tail,  starling  wing,  light  and  dark,  two 
shades.    Hook  9  to  12. 

Partridge  and  grouse  hackles. — Two  small  flies,  very 
useful  at  times,  particularly  on  northern  or  moorland 
streams.  A  lemon  silk,  or  orange  silk  body,  with  three 
turns  of  partridge  or  grouse  hackle.     Hooks  10  to  12. 

The  red  and  black  palmers. — Very  common  and  well- 
known  flies,  and  very  useful,  particularly  the  former. 
They  should  have  either  peacock  or  black  ostrich  bodies, 
and  red  or  black  hackles.  The  black  palmer  sometimes 
is  ribbed  with  silver.  K,  instead  of  a  common  red 
hackle,  you  substitute  one  with  a  black  centre,  you 
make 

The  Coch-y-bonddhu. — ^A  noted  fly  in  Wales,  and  use- 
ful in  very  many  streams.  The  flies  may  be  dressed  of 
any  size,  from  the  largest  to  the  smallest.  I  use  this  fly 
in  preference  to  all  others,  as  a  wet  fly,  ribbed  with  fine 
gold  wire,  it  kills  in  many  streams  nobly. 

The  Soldier  palmer  1  have  found  a  capital  fly  in  many 
rivers,  particularly  when  thickened  with  rain.  It  is  often 
a  good  lake  fly  too.  Body  scarlet  crewel  ribbed  with  gold 
tinsel ;  red  hackle.     Hooks  from  7  to  10. 

With  this  list  of  flies  the  angler  should  kill  anywhere. 
I  myself  use  chiefly  the  duns  all  round,  the  spinners,  the 
Governor,  the  Wickham,  the  alder,  the  sedge,  the  March 
brown,  the  quill  gnats,  the  Francis,  the  Coch-y-bonddhu, 
the  Coachman,  the  black  gnat,  and  the  drakes.  I  have 
different  sizes  of  some  of  them,  and  I  rarely  want  any 
other  fly. 

I  find  in  fly-fishing  that  it  is  very  useful  to  employ  a 


TEOUT  FLIES.  121 

damping  box — one  constantly  has  to  change  flies,  and 
unless  the  gut  has  been  well  soaked  it  is  apt  to  crack  at 
the  knot ;  or  it  is  very  apt,  if  there  is  a  little  wind  (par- 
ticularly in  your  favour),  to  go  at  the  head  of  the  fly,  and 
flick  goes  your  fly  to  grass,  and  this  is  very  trying 
if  you  happen  to  be  short  of  the  particular  pattern 
the  fish  are  fancying.  There  are  various  methods  of 
keeping  gut  damp.  Several  machines  have  been  invented 
more  or  less  ingenious,  but  after  all  an  old  wax  match 
box,  one  of  those  big  ones  about  six  or  seven  inches  long, 
by  three  or  four  wide,  does  as  well  as  anything.  Get  two 
sheets  of  flannel  or  soft  felt  to  fit  in  the  box,  but  about 
three-quarters  of  an  inch  shorter  than  the  box  ;  damp  them 
well,  but  squeeze  out  actual  wet,  and  lay  the  gut  between 
the  sheets.  If  there  are  flies  to  it,  let  them  project  just 
beyond,  on  the  three-quarter  inch  space  not  filled  by  the 
flannel,  &c.,  and  when  you  put  the  box  in  your  breast 
pocket  keep  this  end  uppermost,  or  you  crush  the  flies ;  a 
cast  line  or  two  kept  in  soak  is  also  useful. 

If  you  use  eyed  hooks  you  only  want  coils  of  loose 
gut,  and  don't  need  to  bother  about  flies,  as  you  can 
pick  out  your  fly  and  tie  him  on  then  and  there.  While 
speaking  of  eyed  hooks  I  may  as  well  go  on  with  that 
subject.  Eyed  hooks  for  eels  and  for  salmon  flies  are 
as  old  as  the  hills,  but  not  so  for  trout.  I  had  some 
many  years  ago  with  a  gut  eye  tied  on,  but  trout 
hooks  with  natural  eyes  to  them  were  brought  out  first 
by  Mr.  Hall  some  years  ago.  At  first  I  did  not  much 
like  them,  but  further  experience  has  changed  my 
opinion  very  much,  and  now  I  am  gradually  having  all 
my  flies  tied  on  them.  In  the  first  place  if  you  keep 
ordinary  flies  for  more  than  two  seasons  the  gut  is  not 
trustworthy,  it  gets  dry  and  brittle,  and  the  fly  is  done 


122  ANGUNG. 

for ;  not  so  with  the  eyed  hook,  the  fly  will  last  for 
years  and  years,  you  can  always  tie  on  a  fresh  and  new 
piece  of  gut ;  the  same  if  the  gut  gets  chafed  or  worn, 
and  you  can  use  stouter  or  finer  gut  as  it  suits  you,  and 
these  are  enormous  advantages.  But  beyond  all  that  there 
is  a  great  advantage  in  the  fact  that  you  don't  whip  off 
one  eyed  hook  for  six  of  ordinary  flies,  and,  as  I  use  a 
double  handed  rod  and  very  fine  tackle  and  small  flies, 
before  I  got  the  eyed  hooks  I  used  to  whip  them  off  by 
the  dozen,  so  much  so  that  if  I  was  short  of  a  killing 
pattern  and  there  was  any  wind  on,  I  got  quite  nervous  in 
making  a  long  cast  for  fear  I  should  lose  my  only  killer. 
Now,  however,  I  have  no  such  fears,  I  can  flail  away  as  I 
list,  and  only  now  and  then  does  the  magic  "  snap " 
announce  that  another  good  fellow  has  gone  wrong.  We 
anglers  owe  a  debt  of  gratitude  ta  Mr.  Hall,  who  has  spent 
endless  time  and  trouble  in  perfecting  these  hooks,  for  a 
0  0  0  eyed  hook  is  a  marvel.  You  almost  want  a  micro- 
scope to  see  it,  but  don't  the  fish  come  at  them  !  My ! 
Messrs.  Hutchinson  are  the  makers  of  these  hooks,  and 
have  spent  much  time  and  labour  over  them,  and  the 
hooks  (to  us,  at  any  rate)  are  worth  it. 

Though  they  dress  their  flies  somewhat  differently  in 
Derbyshire,  Cumberland,  and  the  north,  in  some  places 
tying  them  all  with  hackles  only,  &c.,  yet,  if  you  observe 
them  closely,  you  will  find  that  they  are  very  fair  imita- 
tions of  the  duns,  spinners,  <fcc.,  which  we  use ;  still,  the 
angler  will  always  do  well,  if  he  comes  into  a  new  neigh- 
bourhood, and  finds  a  pretty  good  local  tyer,  who  is  a 
fisherman  too,  to  give  his  flies  a  trial.  Long  experience  of 
a  stream  must  teach  a  man  something.  If  he  cannot  get 
on  with  them,  thea  he  can  resort  to  his  own,  or  he  can  try 
his  own  for  a  change.     In  mountain  becks,  the  small  red, 


TEOUT  FLIES.  123 

black  and  Soldier  palmers,  the  black  gnat,  small  March 
brown,  blue  and  yellow  duns,  sand  fly,  with  the  partridge 
and  grouse  hackles,  will  kill  from  year's  end  to  year's 
end. 

For  lakes  I  give  a  few  flies  which,  with  a  slight  variation, 
will  kill  all  over  the  country.  The  bodies  are  nearly  all 
crewel,  or  pig's  wool,  and  the  standard  colours  are  red, 
yellow,  orange,  claret,  black,  and  green,  some  of  them 
ribbed  with  gold,  and  some  with  silver  twist.  The 
hackles  commonly  wedded  to  these  are  red,  black,  coch-y- 
bonddhu,  and  grouse,  no  others  being  used;  the  wings 
are  teal,  mallard,  woodcock,  and  jay's  wing,  or  a  bit  of 
black  wild  duck  with  a  white  tip.  One  of  the  best  Scotch 
flies  is  known  as 

The  Heckum-jpecJcum. — The  body  is  scarlet  or  lemon 
crewel,  ribbed  with  silver  twist  and  red  hackle,  and  the 
black  feather  with  a  wliite  tij)  from  the  wild  mallard  for 
wing. 

The  same  body  and  hackle,  with  either  teal  or  brown 
mallard,  make  an  excellent  fly.  A  green  body,  with  a 
grouse  or  black  hackle,  with  a  teal  or  mallard  wing,  and 
gold  twist  is  good. 

Yellow  or  orange  bodies,  with  gold  tinsel,  red  hackles, 
and  woodcock  wing  are  also  excellent. 

Black  bodies,  silver  twist,  black  hackles,  and  teal  wing 
slaughter  many. 

Claret  bodies,  black  hackle  and  jay,  or  teal,  or  wood- 
cock wing,  make  a  serviceable  change.  The  March  brown 
and  hare's  ear,  and  hare's  ear  and  yellow  are  also  very 
useful  on  lakes.  These  flies  should  be  kept  of  two  or 
even  three  sizes  for  favourites,  to  suit  deep  or  shallow, 
rough,  or  smooth,  the  largest  about  a  No.  6,  down  to 
No.  8. 


124  ANGLING. 

In  lake  fishing  a  good  boatman  is  not  only  half,  but 
two-thirds  of  the  battle.  If  the  lake  be  of  the  usual 
character,  with  shallow  shores  and  a  deep  centre,  you  drift 
along,  with  an  occasional  paddle  from  the  man,  in  a  mode- 
rate breeze,  casting  shorewards  as  you  go.  If  the  breeze 
be  heavy,  you  either  row  head  to  it,  or,  drifting,  you  find 
it  useful  to  have  a  rope  or  chain  with  a  big  stone,  which, 
throwing  over  and  dragging  along  the  bottom,  checks  the 
too  rapid  pace  of  the  boat. 

In  lakes  where  there  are  shallow  bays,  like  Loch  Awe, 
and  where  the  water  all  over  them  is  not  more  than  from 
six  to  eight  or  ten  feet  deep,  you  may  make  two  or  three 
drifts  or  courses  at  different  depths.  As  a  rule,  the  water 
from  six  to  twelve  feet  deep  is  the  best  place  for  the  fish, 
though  I  have  caught  fish  more  than  once  with  the  fly  in 
lakes  where  there  was,  perhaps,  a  hundred  feet  of  water 
beneath  them,  but  this  is  not  done  every  day.  In  lakes 
like  Loch  Leven,  where  there  are  very  large  shallow 
portions  of  the  lake,  you  can  make  very  long  drifts 
without  much  trouble.  If  there  is  not  wind  enough  for 
the  fly  by  casting,  you  will  often  get  a  few  fish  by  trailing 
your  flies  with  thirty  or  forty  yards  of  line  out,  and  a 
spinning  minnow  at  such  times  gives  a  better  chance  than 
the  fly.  Eow  slowly,  so  as  to  keep  your  minnow  or  flies 
deep  in  the  water.  In  some  of  the  big  Irish  lakes  they 
use  cross  lines  for  the  trout.  I  cannot  approve  of  it.  You 
scratch  and  scare  no  end  of  fish ;  and  as  for  sport,  half  the 
sport  consists  in  disentangling  your  flies.  I  tried  it  once 
for  curiosity,  but  didn't  like  it. 

The  one  great  ingredient  in  successful  fly  fishing,  as  in 
most  other  fishing,  is  patience.  The  man  whose  fly  is 
always  on  the  water  has  the  best  chance.  I  am  a  great 
sticker  myself,  and  never  like  to  give  it  up.     There  is 


TEOUT  FLIES.  125 

always  a  chance  of  a  fish  or  two,  no  matter  how  hopeless 
it  looks.  You  never  know  what  may  happen  in  fly-fishing. 
I  have,  scores  and  scores  of  times,  seen  a  bit  of  luck  at  the 
last  moment,  which  turned  a  bad  day  into  a  good  one. 
The  very  last  day  that  I  fished  last  season  was  one  of  the 
best  instances  of  this  that  has  happened  to  me  for  a  long 
time.  There  had  been  rain,  and  the  water  was  coloured, 
and  it  was  a  cold  blusterous  day.  A  few  small  fish  rose 
under  the  banks,  of  which  I  got  a  brace  about  fib.  each. 
Evening  came  on ;  I  went  to  the  most  likely  part  of  the 
stream — a  comer  below  a  mill ;  there  I  found  the  best  rod 
in  our  club,  who  hadn't  a  fish.  He  had  fished  all  the  best 
places  carefully,  and  had  done  nothing.  It  was  getting 
towards  dark,  and  he  left  for  home.  I  walked  with  him 
for  a  chat  for  about  half  a  mile,  when  I  returned  to  the 
mill,  my  way  lying  in  a  different  direction.  When  I  left 
my  friend  I  took  down  my  cast  and  reeled  up  the  line, 
though  the  rod  was  still  together.  I  had  a  companion 
with  me,  who  urged  me  to  have  another  cast  below  the 
mill,  as  he  knew  there  were  some  good  fish  there.  It  was 
the  most  hopeless  chance  to  look  at  I  ever  saw — almost 
dark,  bitterly  cold  and  blusterous.  I  would  have  bet 
50  to  1  against  even  a  rise.  I  put  up  the  line  again  and 
rose  a  fish  at  the  first  cast,  and  hooked  him  at  the  second. 
I  hooked  three  fish  at  that  corner  in  about  twenty  minutes, 
two  of  which  were  about  IJlb.,  and  the  other  31b., 
besides  rising  and  scratching  two  or  three  more.  It  was 
marvellous. 

Don't  be  in  too  great  a  hurry  to  change  the  fly,  and  if 
your  flies  are  a  bad  imitation  of  what  is  on  the  water,  use 
some  totally  different  fly.  It  is  more  likely  to  give  you  a 
fish  or  two,  as  it  does  not  challenge  comparison  and 
suspicion.    When  you  get  hung  up  in  a  bush  or  tree, 


126  ANGLING. 

always  try  persuasion  and  gentle  means  first ;  an  attach- 
ment can  often,  in  that  way,  be  done  away  with,  which 
force  would  only  make  firmer.  When  you  must  break, 
shorten  your  line  as  much  as  you  can  and  pull  steadily, 
and  if  your  tackle  and  line  be  properly  constituted  you 
should  only  lose  a  fly.  A  stout  bit  of  cord,  some  half-a- 
dozen  yards  long,  coiled  in  the  basket,  is  often  very  useful. 
You  may  either  tie  a  small  leaded  grapnel  or  hook  on  to 
one  end,  or  even  a  stone  may  do  if  you  have  not  one.  This 
thrown  over  a  bough,  that  is  out  of  reach  will  often  be 
found  useful  in  saving  flies. 

Trout  grow  very  rapidly  when  the  water  and  pro- 
vision to  be  obtained  are  suitable  to  them,  and  they 
grow  to  a  larger  size  in  ponds,  millheads,  and  such 
still,  quiet,  deep  waters,  than  they  do,  as  a  rule,  in 
rapid  and  shallower  waters;  and  there  are  hundreds, 
and  even  thousands,  of  ponds  in  England,  which  now 
only  carry  a  few  worthless  carp  and  roach,  which,  with 
a  very  little  trouble,  could  be  made  to  produce  the  finest 
possible  trout.  I  have  known  many  instances  where 
this  change  has  been  advantageously  made,  and  I  have 
not,  as  yet,  met  with  a  single  failure ;  and  I  hope  that 
the  time  will  come  when  trout  will  be  as  conmion  as  roach 
are  round  London. 


GEAYLING  FISHING.  127 


CHAPTEE  IX. 

GRAYLING  FISHING. 

THE   GRAYLING  (Salmo  thyvmllus). 

This  fish,  too,  is  not  nearly  so  widely  distributed  as  it 
deserves.  Seeing  how  delightfully  it  prolongs  one's  fly- 
fishing season,  even  up  to  Christmas  if  the  water  be  in 
order  and  the  weather  open,  and  when  the  fish  themselves 
are  in  the  finest  condition,  it  has  always  appeared  to  me 
a  most  desirable  fish  to  have  in  many  of  our  trout  streams. 
Grayling  take  a  fly  well,  the  same  flies  as  are  used  for 
trout  being  suitable  for  grayling.  The  addition  of  a  turn 
of  gold  tinsel,  or  a  little  tag  or  tail  of  red  or  orange  floss 
silk,  being  a  great  additional  attraction  to  grayling. 
There  is  a  famous  fly  in  Derbyshire  called  "  the  bumble," 
which  succeeds  admirably  with  grayling.  The  bodies  are 
made  of  different  coloured  silks,  orange  or  pink,  with 
spirals  of  peacock  harl  up  them,  and  hackles  of  silver  grey 
or  light  dun,  or  of  sandy  red,  and  no  wings.  As  they 
vary  a  good  deal  in  the  bodies,  I  cannot  give  a  close 
description  of  the  dressings.  Grayling  may  be  taken,  and 
a  good  bag  even  made,  when  none  are  seen  to  rise  at  the 
natural  fly.  At  such  times  the  angler  should  try  the  deep 
still  reaches,  and  fish  well  under  the  banks.  Grayling  rise 
very  quickly  from  the  bottom  in  such  places.  Grayling 
will  often  rise,  and  refuse  even  two  or  three  times,  and 
then  take  after  all,  which  trout  rarely  do.     The  play  of  a 


128  ANGLING. 

grayling  frequently,  in  the  more  northern  rivers,  differs 
much  from  that  of  a  trout.  He  tumbles  and  rolls  about 
head  over  heels,  and  in  a  way  that  is  often  very  trying,  to 
the  hold  of  the  hook  particularly,  as  he  is  much  softer  in  the 
mouth  than  a  trout.  In  the  Hampshire  rivers  the  grayling 
play  far  stronger,  and  often  run  and  jump  in  a  surprising 
manner,  and  they  take  longer  to  kill  than  a  trout.  Gray- 
ling will  often  take  the  fly  imder  water,  rising  so  quietly 
that  you  will  scarcely  see  any  rise  or  break  of  the  water  at 
all.  It  is  desirable,  therefore,  to  watch  the  line  narrowly, 
and  to  strike  whenever  you  think  it  stops  or  checks,  and  you 
will  now  and  then  be  surprised,  although  there  is  no  break 
in  the  water,  to  find  a  good  grayling  on  the  hook.  For,  as" 
is  often  the  case  with  trout,  the  big  ones  are  very  quiet  risers. 
All  that  has  been  said  on  fly  fishing  for  trout  may 
be  more  or  less  applied  to  grayling,  and  you  may  use 
two,  and  even  three  flies,  more  safely  for  grayling  than 
you  can  for  trout.  They  are  less  of  weed  runners, 
and,  indeed,  in  their  best  season,  there  are  much  fewer 
weeds  to  get  into.  I  have  found  a  red  hackle,  with  a 
green  peacock  harl  body,  and  a  short  tag  of  bright  red 
floss  silk,  to  be  one  of  the  best  flies  you  can  put  over  a 
grayling,  which,  with  a  dark- winged  olive  dun  for  the  first, 
and  a  willow  fly  for  the  second  drop,  is  about  as  good  a 
cast  in  October  as  you  could  put  on  the  Teme  and  Lugg. 
A  Wickham's  fancy,  too,  does  well,  particularly  with  a 
landrail  wing,  and  a  silver  bodied  fly  with  blue  hackle  and 
light  wing.  For  the  rest  any  fly  which  is  on  the  water  of 
the  dun  species  will  prevail  with  the  grayling.  The  gray- 
ling when  dainty  will  take  a  dry  fly  well,  but  the  ordinary 
method  is  to  cast  straight  across,  and  let  the  fly  sweep 
down  round  till  it  straightens  below  you,  when  repeat  the 
cast. 


GEAYLINa  FISHINO.  129 

The  most  slaughterous  way,  however,  of  fishing  for 
grayling,  particularly  on  the  Shropshire  streams,  is  with 
what  is  called  the  grasshopper.  This  is  a  pear-shaped 
lump  of  lead  of  small  gooseberry  size  cast  on  to  the  shank 
of  a  No.  4  hook.  This  is  twisted  over  with  rows  of  green 
and  yellow,  and  sometimes  red  wool ;  five  or  six  gentles 
are  then  stuck  on  the  hook,  and  the  thing  is  cast  into  the 
water  in  a  favourable  eddy,  and  allowed  to  go  to  the 
bottom,  when  it  is  jerked  up  and  down  in  a  succession  of 
short  jumps  all  over  the  eddy,  never  being  allowed  to 
remain  still.  The  moment  you  feel  a  touch,  or  the  least 
obstruction,  you  strike  smartly,  and  you  ought,  if  well  up 
to  your  work,  to  catch  your  fish. 

When  the  bottom  is  first  found,  a  very  small  quill 
float,  which  is  fixed  on  the  line,  is  set  to  show  the  depth, 
as  a  guide  to  the  angler  in  his  jumpifications.  A 
pretty  stiff  cane  rod  is  used,  and  the  gut  is  tolerably  stout 
— the  hook  so  large  that  no  time  is  wasted  in  playing 
the  fish ;  as  soon  as  he  is  hooked,  you  put  a  heavy  strain 
on,  and  quickly  haul  him  ashore.  Prodigious  takes  are 
sometimes  made  in  this  fashion.  I  have  heard  of  as 
much  as  901b.  falling  to  one  rod  in  a  day.  It  is  a  coarse 
business  altogether.  Grayling  spawn  in  April  and  May, 
and,  I  think,  ought  not  to  be  taken  before  July,  or  even 
later  on  some  streams.  The  largest  grayling  in  the 
kingdom  are  found  in  the  Itchen  and  Test,  where  I  have 
caught  them  up  to  41b.  weight,  and,  though  a  three- 
pounder  is  not  caught  every  day,  2ilb.  fish  are  common. 
They  have  increased  greatly  of  late  years,  and  some  of 
these  waters  now  abound  with  them. 


180  ANGLING. 


CHAFTER  X. 

SALMON  FISHING. 

THE   SALMON   (Salmo  salar). 

Salmon  fishing  is  justly  considered  the  highest  branch  of 
the  angler's  art,  and  when  we  know  that  salmon  occa- 
sionally are  to  be  taken  by  the  rod  up  to  between  501b.  and 
601b.  in  weight,  we  may  well  wonder  what  sort  of  tackle  is 
needed  to  subdue  and  draw  to  shore  a  fish  of  such  size  and 
power;  and  when  we  consider  the  nature  of  the  water 
which  the  salmon  constantly  inhabits,  the  wonder  may 
even  be  increased — tremendous  currents,  obstructed  by 
huge  rocks,  being  their  common  habitat.  There  is  little 
need  to  dilate  on  the  history  of  the  salmon,  but  we  must 
give  a  short  sketch  of  it.  So  far  as  we  know  it,  it  leaves 
the  sea  and  runs  up  the  rivers  to  deposit  its  spawn,  which 
it  does  from  November  to  the  end  of  January  chiefly.  The 
egg8>  which  are  buried  in  the  gravel,  hatch  in  about 
eighty  or  ninety  days,  or  thereabout.  The  small  fry,  in 
about  a  month  or  five  weeks,  when  they  have  absorbed  the 
umbilical  sac  which  is  appended  to  them  at  their  first 
hatching,  make  their  way  out,  and  begin  to  seek  for  food. 
From  this  time  they  grow  more  or  less  rapidly  as  parr,  and 
in  about  fourteen  or  fifteen  months  after  birth  a  large  pro- 
portion of  them  become  smolts ;  up  to  that  time  they  have 


SALMON  FISHING.  131 

been  nice  little  fish  of  five  or  six  inches  in  length,  and 
called  parrs,  having  certain  blotches  or  marks,  called  parr 
marks,  on  their  sides,  then  they  begin  to  change  their 
scales,  and  put  on  a  new  silvery  coat,  which  hides  the  parr 
marks,  and  makes  the  little  fish  appear  the  miniature 
salmon  it  is.  These  fish  are  then  called  smolts,  and  they 
migrate  down  the  river  to  the  sea  about  the  month  of  May. 
Here  they  stay  for  a  longer  or  shorter  time,  and  grow  very 
rapidly,  being  very  eager  feeders,  and  finding  abundant 
food  among  the  molluscs  and  fish  fry  of  the  ocean.  At 
the  end  of  three  or  four  months  some  of  these  fish, 
increased  to  31b.  or  41b.  in  weight,  come  back  to  the  river 
as  grilse,  and  push  their  way  up  to  the  spawning  beds, 
where  they  spawn  for  the  first  time.  Many,  however,  do 
not  return  the  same  year,  but  stay  another  period  of  eight, 
ten,  or  twelve  months,  or  more,  in  the  sea,  and  come  back 
greatly  increased  in  size,  often  reaching  91b.,  101b.,  or  even 
111b.  in  weight.  Bat  all  these  fish,  on  their  first  return 
from  the  sea,  are  what  are  called  grilse.  They  are  more 
slender  in  shape,  have  a  more  forked  tail,  and  their  scales 
are  more  easily  detached  than  is  the  case  with  mature 
salmon. 

Some  of  the  parr,  however,  do  not  always  become  smolts 
and  migrate  so  soon.  They  remain  in  the  river  for  another 
year,  and  a  portion  of  them  have  been  found  to  remain 
even  two  years  before  they  make  their  first  move.  The 
grilse,  having  spawned,  goes  down  to  the  sea  again  as  a 
kelt,  or  spent  fish,  thin,  and  much  deteriorated.  And  here, 
again,  there  is  some  ii*regularity  about  its  return,  some 
coming  back  mature  salmon  in  a  few  months,  and  some 
staying  on  another  season  in  the  sea,  when  they  come  back 
mature  fish,  much  increased  in  size.  But  the  periods  of 
these  migrations  are  now  known  to  be  more  or  less  uncer- 

K  2 


192  ANGLING. 

tain.  Formerly  it  was  believed  that  there  was  a  regular 
stated  time  for  them  in  all  instances,  and  this  led  to  much 
confusion  and  misunderstanding.  Experiment,  however, 
has  taught  us  better.  The  salmon  deposits  a  vast  number 
of  eggs,  from  10,000  to  20,000,  or  more,  and  were  it  not 
for  the  number  of  enemies  it  has,  and  the  reckless  and 
improvident  way  it  is  dealt  with  by  man,  our  rivers  would 
literally  swarm  with  them ;  as  it  is,  however,  scarcely 
a  mature  fish  survives  out  of  every  thousand  of  eggs 
deposited.  Salmon  fishing  commences  on  some  rivers  as 
early  as  February,  and  on  some  it  continues  as  late  as  the 
end  of  November ;  most  of  these  late  fish,  however,  are 
very  much  out  of  condition. 

The  chief  method  of  salmon  fishing  practised  in  Britain 
is  with  the  fly  ;  though  minnow,  shrimp,  and  even  worm  are 
used,  and  kill  a  large  number  of  fish.  We  will,  therefore,  take 
fly  fishing  first.  The  rod  and  tackle  used  for  the  salmon 
is,  of  course,  much  larger  and  stouter  than  that  employed 
for  the  trout.  When  the  angler  first  takes  to  salmon 
fishing,  he  should  take  care  not  to  overburthen  himself 
with  his  rod,  and,  unless  he  is  unusually  strong,  he  will 
find  a  rod  of  16ft.  or  16Jft.  long  and  heavy  enough  to 
commence  with.  After  a  season  or  a  few  month's  practice, 
he  may  be  able  to  use  a  longer  and  heavier  one,  and  may 
go  on  to  19ft  or  20ft.  or  even  more,  but  unless  it  be  in 
exceptional  water,  he  will  very  rarely  need  one  of  more 
than  18ft.,  and  even  17ft.  will  be  found  large  enough  for 
any  fish.  The  reel  must  be  large  enough  to  take  120 
or  130  yards  of  eight  plait  dressed  salmon  line  easily,  so 
that  there  may  be  plenty  of  room  in  winding  up ;  a  plain 
winch,  not  too  wide  between  the  plates,  and  with  a  mode- 
rate check,  just  heavy  enough  to  prevent  the  line  over- 
running, is  the  best.    Multipliers  are  to  be  avoided  in 


SALMON  FISHING.  133 

salmon  fishing,  and,  for  that  matter,  in  all  fishing ;  the 

principle  doesn't  work,  and,  as  in  the  old  rhyme,  it  will  be 

found  that 

Multiplication  is  vexation, 

and,  if  it  doesn't  cause  a  "  division  "  in  "  practice,"  it  will 
certainly  "  make  you  mad."  Eight-plait  dressed  silk  line 
is  the  best,  and  of  these  lines  none  equal  the  London  ones. 
Many  other  manufacturers  have  been  tried,  but  they  none 
of  them  stand  so  well  as  the  London  lines.  Most  of  the 
other  lines  are  plaited  too  tightly  and  closely,  and  the 
result  is  either  that  the  dressing  does  not  soak  into  tho 
line,  but,  merely  adhering  to  the  outside,  soon  rubs  and 
wears  off,  when  they  soon  wear  out  (for  few  salmon  lines 
will  stand^with  advantage  a  second  dressing),  or  the  line 
has  to  be  soaked  so  long  in  the  composition,  and  dries  so 
slowly  that  it  becomes  half  rotten  before  it  is  dry,  and  full 
half  its  strength  is  lost  and  destroyed.  The  London  lines,* 
however,  are  more  loosely  plaited,  so  that  the  composition 
used  for  dressing  not  only  penetrates  quickly  throughout 
the  fibre,  but  dries  quickly  too ;  and  thus,  though  the 
outside  may  wear,  the  inside  still  retains  sufficient  for  all 
purposes,  and  the  line  is  less  damaged  by  the  inmiersion. 
These  lines,  however,  are  expensive,  Sd.  a  yard  being  the 
ordinary  price ;  and  this  has  induced  other  makers  to 
fabricate  lines  of  cotton,  hemp,  and  other  materials  on  the 
same  plan,  but  at  a  much  cheaper  rate.  Some  of  these 
lines  are  found  to  answer  well ;  but,  if  I  can  get  a  good 
trustworthy  London  eight  plait  silk  line  I  prefer  it  to  all 
others,  and  do  not  think  the  extra  expense  thrown  away. 
I  have  had  lines  of  this  sort  which  I  have  used  for  many 

*  Whether  these  lines  are  made  in  London  or  no  I  cannot 
say. 


134  ANGLING. 

years,  and  which  are  as  strong  and  trustworthy  as  they 
were  when  I  bought  them.  When  a  line  begins  to  go, 
however,  it  should  be  well  tested  when  wety  as  lines  are 
often  much  weaker  when  they  are  wet  than  when  they  are 
dry,  and  all  that  is  at  all  unsound  should  be  broken  off  and 
cast  aside. 

Any  line  of  from  eighty  yards  long  and  upwards  may 
be  turned  end  for  end  when  one  end  begins  to  show  signs 
of  weakness,  but  even  then  the  weaker  portion  should  be 
broken  off,  as  it  is  always  unsafe  ;  and  it  is  better  to  lash 
it  on  to  a  length  of  common  undressed  stuff,  which  will 
answer  all  the  purposes  of  a  long  run,  which  will  happen 
now  and  then  with  a  salmon,  than  to  trust  to  any  weak 
part.  Thus,  in  a  line  of  that  length  you  get  two  lines  or 
rather  two  lengths  which  you  could  hardly  get  out  of  a 
shorter  line,  as  in  the  run  you  would  so  soon  get  into  the 
worn  part  with  a  shorter  line.  It  is  as  well  to  have  the 
cast  eight  or  ten  yards  tapered  so  as  to  meet  the  casting 
line,  as  this  makes  perfectly  straight  casting  so  much 
easier  and  more  certain.  If  more  than  this  is  tapered,  as 
is  too  often  the  case,  it  makes  the  line  too  light  to  go  well 
through  the  wind. 

Rod,  reel,  and  line  being  settled  on,  we  next  come  to  the 
casting  line  :  I  usually  employ  for  this  about  one  yard  of 
treble- twisted  and  one  of  double-twisted  gut,  and  about 
two  yards  or  two  and  a  half  of  good  round  sound  carefully 
tied  single  salmon  gut.  You  cannot  be  too  particular  in 
looking  at  all  the  joints  and  junctions  in  your  casting  line. 
Every  knot  should  be  regarded  with  scrupulous  care,  as  if 
the  gut  is  new,  sound,  and  good  as  it  ought  to  be,  if  a 
salmon  breaks  away  it  is  nineteen  times  out  of  twenty  one 
of  the  knots  that  gives.  The  "  double  barrel "  knot 
shown  at  Fig.  2,  Plate  4,  in  tackle  making  is  the  best  and 


SALMON  FISHINa.  135 

most  safe  for  salmon  casting  lines ;  it  is  a  little  bigger  and 
coarser  than  the  single,  but  with  stout  gut  the  single  will 
sometimes  slip,  and  the  double  may  be  made  fairly  neat  if 
the  threads  of  gut  are  arranged  so  as  to  lie  flat  and  level, 
and  not  ride  over  one  another.  It  is  as  well  to  have  a 
sound  well-lashed  loop  at  each  end  of  the  casting  line ; 
one  for  the  running  line  to  be  fastened  on  to,  which  should 
be  done  with  a  single  hitch  knot ;  at  the  other  end  the  fly 
should  be  looped  on,  a  loop  being  also  made  for  the  purpose 
in  the  thread  of  gut  fixed  to  the  fly. 

Salmon  flies  are  mostly  tied  on  loops  or  eyes,  either  of 
single  or  twisted  gut,  or  in  some  instances  a  loop  or  eye  is 
made  in  the  end  of  the  shank  of  the  hook.  The  simplest 
and  easiest  way  is  to  tie  a  long  loop  with  a  double  or  a 
single  shp  knot,  whichever  the  angler  prefers.  I  find  the 
single  secure  enough  if  properly  soaked,  but  some  prefer 
the  double.  Push  the  bight  of  the  slij)  loop  through  loop 
or  eye  on  the  hook  so  far  as  to  be  able  to  pass  the  whole 
of  the  fly  through  the  loop ;  then  draw  the  slip  knot  home 
down  to  the  eye  and  jam  it  tight :  and,  having  looped  the 
fly  on  to  the  cast,  you  are  all  ready  to  begin.  On  reaching 
the  river  side  the  casting  is  done  exactly  as  in  the  case  of 
a  double-handed  trout  fly  rod.  K  you  are  fishing  with 
your  left  shoulder  to  the  stream,  you  should  cast  from 
your  left  shoulder  left  hand  uppermost ;  if  with  the  right, 
from  the  right.  This  is  desirable,  as  you  hang  the  fly 
better  in  the  stream,  and  that  is,  as  old  fishers  will  tell 
you,  a  point  of  no  slight  importance,  a  very  little  practice 
makes  it  immaterial  which  you  use.  You  must  cast  across 
the  stream  and  somewhat  down  stream,  allowing  the  fly  to 
go  down  stream  until  it  is  straight  down  from  the  top  of 
the  rod,  and  working  the  fly  more  or  less  by  alternately 
raising  and  dropping  the  point  of  the  rod  as  you  do  so. 


136  ANGLING. 

This  makes  the  fly  advance  and  retreat,  giving  to  every 
feather  a  life-like  motion,  and  precisely  the  sort  of  motion 
evinced  by  the  shrimps  and  other  marine  creatures  on 
which  the  salmon  feed  largely  in  the  sea,  and  it  is  supposed 
to  be  very  attractive  to  the  salmon.  When  the  line  comes 
straight  down  it  should  be  withdrawn  after  two  or  three 
jerks,  and  another  cast  made. 

Never  use  too  much  power  in  casting ;  it  is  not  only  not 
necessary  but  it  is  injurious,  you  cast  the  line  with  the 
top  and  half  the  second  joint,  and  very  little  force  suffices 
to  bring  this  into  play.  K  you  use  more,  all  the  effect  is 
to  bring  the  lower  part  of  the  rod  into  action,  which  has 
very  little  spring  compared  with  the  top  of  it.  Try  how 
little  force  you  can  use  (not  how  much)  to  get  the  line  out, 
and  you  will  be  surprised  how  little  is  really  needed  to 
send  a  straight  line  out.  *  The  tremendous  **  whoosh  "  that 
one  often  hears  from  a  salmon  rod  is  quite  unnecessary 
and  even  objectionable.  Thirty  yards  is  a  very  good  cast ; 
the  most  I  could  ever  manage  was  34J  yards,  and  I 
have  done  that  two  or  three  times  and  measured  it.  The 
most  I  ever  saw  cast  was  38  yards,  but  Pat  Heams*  has 
cast  over  43  yards.  I  never  heard  of  anyone  else  doing 
it.  It  is  never  necessary  to  fish  over  the  same  cast  twice, 
unless  you  have  some  special  reason  for  it.  Take  a  short 
step  between  each  cast  so  that  you  leave  from  two  to 
three  feet  between  every  cast,  and  thus  you  will  not  miss 
an  inch  of  the  water.  Though  you  may  now  and  then 
once  in  a  way  cast  up  stream  and  work  down  it  is  a  very 
rare  case  to  get  a  rise  from  a  salmon  thus.  Here  and 
there  you  may  seem  to  do  so  and  get  a  rise,  but  you  will 
frequently  find  that  there  is  a  great  eddy  at  the  spot 

*  Lately  dead,  poor  old  Pat ! 


SALMON   FISHING.  137 

where  the  stream  really  is  working  up ;  and  the  salmon 
always  lies  head  to  the  stream,  so  that  you  will  have  been 
fishing  in  the  proper  direction  to  rise  him.  Enough 
attention  is  not  paid  to  this,  as  eddies,  particularly  below 
waterfalls  or  at  the  head  of  heavy  streams,  are  very 
common,  and  their  direction  is  not  sufficiently  borne 
in  mind. 

When  a  salmon  rises  there  are  three  ways  of  knowing 
it,  you  either  see  a  part  or  nearly  the  whole  of  his  body, 
as  he  roUs  over  at  the  fly,  or  you  see  a  large  break  or  boil 
in  the  water  as  he  turns  at  it ;  or  you  see  nothing  at  all, 
but  feel  a  touch  more  or  less  smart ;  this  is  often  very 
gentle  indeed,  for  a  201b.  salmon  will  frequently  come  so 
softly  and  gently  at  the  fly  as  scarcely  to  move  the  point 
of  the  rod,  and  you  would  think  that  it  was  hardly  a 
three-ounce  troutling.  When  you  see  the  aforesaid  body 
of  the  fish,  or  the  big  break  or  boil,  you  may  raise  the 
point  of  the  rod  pretty  steadily  and  leisurely  ;  but,  when 
you  feel  the  touch  under  water,  you  must  strike  instantly 
and  pretty  smartly,  as  the  fish  is  a  shy  one,  and  has  taken 
the  hook  very  gingerly,  and  if  not  hit  at  once  will  drop  it 
directly.  Many  people  say  that  you  should  never  strike 
till  you  feel  the  fish,  because  it  will  often  happen  that  a 
fish  in  his  eagerness  misses  the  fly,  when,  if  it  is  not 
pulled  away  from  him,  he  will  turn  and  seize  it ;  whereas, 
if  you  snatch  it  away,  he  will  get  alarmed,  and  go  down 
sulky,  and  will  not  rise  again ;  and  I  must  say  that  I  have 
seen  this  happen  on  several  occasions.  But  it  is  by  no 
means  easy  (for  a  young  hand  more  particularly)  to  avoid 
striking  when  he  sees  the  head  and  shoulders  or  the  break 
of  a  good  fish. 

But  there  is  another  point  of  view  to  be  considered,  and 
that  is  that  fish  very  frequently  rise  false,  and  come  at 


138  ANGUNG. 

the  hook  with  their  mouths  shut,  or  roll  over,  or  smack 
at  the  fly  with  their  tails.  These  fish  do  not  mean  taking ; 
they  rise  for  frolicsomeness,  or  from  some  other  reason, 
but  they  will  not  take ;  and  yet  it  frequently  happens  that 
if  you  strike  at  such  fish  the  hook  comes  over  or  against 
some  part  of  the  head,  body,  or  fins,  and  hooks  them  foul, 
and  you  get  the  best  runs  and  most  obstinate  fights  out 
of  foul-hooked  fish,  though  I  would  only  whisper  the  fact; 
and  these  fish  you  certainly  would  not  hook  at  all  if  you 
didn*t  strike  or  waited  till  you  felt  them,  and  it  is  quite 
certain  that  the  number  of  fish  is  much  greater  which  you 
hook  in  this  way  than  of  those  which  take  the  fly  after 
missing  it  if  you  don't  strike.  On  the  whole,  therefore, 
in  the  long  run,  the  angler  will  find  that  it  pays  better  to 
strike  than  not  to.  As  to  the  theory  about  pulling 
the  fly  away  from  a  fish  before  he  can  take  it,  or  has  time 
to  do  so,  that  is  only  possible  when  you  are  standing  on 
a  high  bank,  or  rock,  or  bridge,  and  see  the  fish  coming 
from  the  bottom,  at  such  times  you  are  very  apt  to  do  it ; 
but  as  for  doing  so  when  you  see  the  rise  or  break  from 
the  level,  it  is  all  nonsense.  The  fish  has  the  fly  by  that 
time  (bar  bimgles,  of  which,  as  I  have  said,  there  are  but 
few)  if  he  means  to  have  it. 

K  fish  are  rising  very  shyly,  fish  slow,  and  sink  the 
fly — many  a  fish  will  take  a  foot  under  water  who 
will  only  make  a  boil  at  a  fly  on  the  surface.  If  the 
water  is  very  clear  and  fine,  plenty  of  single  gut  of 
sea-trout  size  with  small  flies  may  answer.  In  trying 
a  shy  fish,  go  slowly  over  him  ;  go  quickly ;  go  with 
big  violent  jerks ;  go  with  very  slight  ones — some  like 
a  steady  draw  without  any,  and  Mr.  Colquhoun  recom- 
mends simply  ^vinding  up  the  line  over  the  throw  as  a  last 
expedient.     All  these  and  any  other  plans  you  can  think 


SALMON  FISHING.  139 

of  may  be  tried  over  a  dull  fish,  and  oftentimes  in  vain  ; 
he  has  tasted  steel  before,  and  is  mistrustful  of  toppings 
and  tinsel. 

If  you  do  not  know  a  river  it  is  always  most  desirable  to 
have  someone  with  you  who  does.  It  is  not  always  easy 
to  tell  which  are  salmon  casts  and  which  not  on  a  biggish 
river ;  and  you  may  waste  much  time  on  the  part  of  a  cast 
which  is  of  little  value,  and  scamp  that  which  should  be 
fished  inch  by  inch.  If  you  see  any  stones  or  sticks  stuck 
in  any  unnatural  or  unusual  position,  or  any  cuts  in  the 
turf,  <fec.,  on  the  bank  of  a  salmon  pool,  go  gingerly  oppo- 
site that ;  ten  to  one  it  is  a  mark  to  note  some  fish  that 
has  risen  to  some  former  angler,  and  which  has  not  yet 
been  accounted  for. 

When  you  hook  a  salmon  play  him  as  well  as  you  can. 
For  some  minutes  he  will  play  you  most  likely ;  but  when 
he  begins  to  calm  down  you  may  begin  to  alter  the  role  a 
little.  It  is  of  no  use  trying  to  check  a  salmon  in  his  first 
two  or  three  runs ;  but  as  his  trips  become  shorter  and 
more  laboured,  let  the  line  go  out  grudgingly,  so  that  he 
may  have  a  good  dead  weight  to  pull  against.  In  the 
eariier  part  of  the  struggle  all  you  can  do  perhaps  is — 
supposing  the  fish  is  running  up  or  down,  and  there  be 
danger  ahead — to  take  it  in  time,  and  by  a  little  pressure, 
and  a  gentle  slant  of  the  head,  to  run  him  clear  of  it.  To 
this  end  the  instant  you  hook  your  fish,  if  you  do  not 
know  the  pool  well,  look  round  ^nd  take  stock  of  all  the 
difficulties  you  have  to  contend  with,  so  as  to  know  well 
beforehand  what  you  want  to  do.  Always  keep  a  tight 
line ;  never  let  any  slack  hang  about  anywhere.  If  a  fish 
airs  himself  or  jumps,  drop  the  point  of  the  rod,  and  give 
to  him  all  the  line  you  can,  so  that  it  may  be  slack  when 
he  falls  in  the  water  again ;  but  as  soon  as  he  is  under 


140  ANGLING. 

water  once  more  recover  your  strain.  Always  keep  level 
with  or  opposite  to  your  fish,  and  do  not  let  him  get 
further  below  or  above  you  than  you  can  help,  as  it  is  apt 
to  drown  the  line;  and  if  the  fish  turns  suddenly,  you 
may  have  a  lot  of  loose  line  in  the  water,  and  the  fish 
careering  about  at  his  pleasure.  When  he  begins  to  run 
short,  look  out  for  a  suitable  landing-plaoe  where  you  can 
bring  the  fish  close  in,  and  where  he  can  be  either  netted 
or  gaffed  from ;  never  dash  at  a  fish  in  gaffing,  but  wait 
until  he  is  well  within  reach,  extend  the  gaff  beyond  him 
(as  near  the  tail  as  you  can  make  sure  of,  so  as  to  spoil 
the  fish  as  little  as  possible),  and  with  a  quick  stroke  and. 
a  drag,  send  the  point  well  into  him,  and  haul  him  out  at 
oneef  letting  him  hang  a  dead  weight  on  the  hook  (the 
gaff  being  held  perpendicularly)  as  you  lift  him  out  of  the 
water,  get  him  in  a  safe  place,  and  knock  him  on  the  head 
at  once. 

If  you  have  not  a  gaff  or  net,  you  must  tail  him  out. 
Find  a  shelving,  sandy,  gravelly  bit  of  shore,  and  as  the 
fish  turns  on  his  side  beaten,  draw  him  up  gently  into  the 
shallow  water,  when  your  assistant  should  go  behind  him, 
grip  him  firmly  by  the  small  of  the  tail,  and  "  run  him 
in."  If  you  have  no  basket  nor  bag  to  put  your  fish  in, 
get  a  piece  of  stoutish  string,  tie  one  end  tightly  round  the 
small  of  the  tail,  put  the  other  end  through  the  gills,  out 
through  the  mouth,  drawing  the  fish  up  to  the  best  part  of 
a  circle,  with  about  a  foot  of  string  between  head  and  tail, 
and  tie  off.  If  you  then  take  four  inches  of  a  round  stick, 
and  take  a  turn  of  the  string  round  it,  you  can  carry  the 
fish  very  convenientiy,  and  without  cutting  your  fingers 
with  the  string,  any  distance. 

Although  it  is  desirable  to  be  able  to  make  long  casts  at 
times,  you  should  never  use  an  inch  more  line  than  is  abso- 


SALMON  FISHING.  141 

lutely  necessary,  or  jou  throw  over  aaid  beyond  your  cast, 
and  so  lose  power,  having  more  or  less  a  bagged  line  when 
you  come  on  to  it,  and  if  your  rod  is  upright,  and  your 
line  bagged,  and  a  fish  happens  to  rise,  as  they  will  some- 
times at  the  last  moment,  you  cannot  strike  your  fish,  and 
the  chances  are  a  scratch  and  a  lose. 

Always  fish  your  best,  and  cast  as  if  you  were  expecting 
a  fish  to  rise  at  every  cast.  If  you  get  listless  and  out  of 
heart  sit  down  and  smoke  till  you  grow  keen  again,  but 
don't  fish  carelessly.  It  is  ten  to  one  that  you  lose  your 
chance  if  you  do.  You  have  been  fishing  all  day  perhaps, 
and  have  not  touched  a  fin.  You  are  tired,  out  of  heart, 
and  careless.  You've  fished  the  best  of  the  pool.  The 
lower  bit  is  never  very  good,  only  giving  a  fish  once  in  a 
way.  You  have  pitched  your  fly  out,  however,  and,  your 
cigar  being  out,  you  take  the  opportunity  to  strike  a  fuzee 
while  holding  the  rod  for  a  moment  in  your  left  hand,  or 
you  are  doing  something  else  equally  imprudent,  when 
suddenly  you  feel  a  touch  at  the  rod  point.  You  look  up 
from  the  all-absorbing  fuzee.     "Ah!  confound  it,  there 

he  was  just  as  I  was Oh,  dem,  dem,  dem,  he's  gone  ; 

and,  having  had  a  good  taste  of  the  fly,  will  not  come 
again  for  a  day  or  two,  and  what  a  thundering  big  boil  he 
made.  I'll  lay  a  sovereign  that's  the  twenty-pounder 
Jones  saw ;  and  he  said  it  was  in  this  pool,  too,  but  I 
thought  it  was  further  up.  Oh,  dem,  dem,  dem  !  "  Why. 
will  you  do  two  things  at  once?  Isn't  salmon  fishing 
enough  for  anyone  ?  There  is  nothing  more  common  than 
to  fish  all  day  and  do  nothing,  and  to  get  your  fish,  or  even 
two,  towards  evening. 

Don't  wade  if  you  can  do  without,  as,  at  the  best,  it. is 
more  or  less  rheumatic.  If  you  must  wade,  use  water- 
proofs and  worsted  under,  and  always  turn  them  down 


142  ANGLING. 

when  not  wading  to  let  the  air  in  and  perspiration  out. 
Don't  wade  a  pool  unless  you  know  it  well,  or  have  some- 
one with  you  who  does,  and  always  "  gang  warily ;  "  a 
round  stone  or  an  unseen  boulder  may,  if  it  does  no  worse, 
give  you  a  hearty  ducking,  and  if  you  are  five  or  six  miles 
from  home,  and  no  inn  or  house  near,  that  is  not  worth 
while. 


SALMON  FLIES.  143 


CHAPTER     XI. 

SALMON  FLIES. 

I  NOW  come  to  salmon  flies.  Of  these  I  shall  give  a  list 
of  fourteen,  which  will  suffice  for  all  general  work,  and 
with  which — regard  being  had  to  the  size,  depth  and 
colour  of  the  water,  and  the  consequent  size  of  the  fly — 
fish  should  be  killed  anywhere.  There  are  hundreds  of 
varieties  of  flies  used  on  the  different  rivers  in  Great 
Britain,  and  every  river  has  its  peculiar  varieties.  I  always 
use  the  flies  which  are  said  by  the  local  fishermen  to  kill 
best ;  but  I  have  no  space  to  give  here  a  complete  list  of 
all  these  flies  for  each  river.  Salmon  fishermen  who  are 
so  far  interested  in  their  pursuit  as  to  desire  this,  may 
find  complete  lists  for  every  river  and  lake  fully  set  forth 
and  described  in  my  "  Book  on  Angling."  But  the  labour 
and  drudgery  of  compiling  such  a  list  is  so  great  and  so 
tedious  that  having  done  it  twice  I  have  no  desire  ever  to 
go  through  it  again.  I  here  give  a  list  of  the  flies  under 
the  names  they  are  known  by.  The  method  of  dressing 
them  follows. 

FOURTEEN  SALMON  FLIES. 


The  Butcher. 
The  Jock  Scott. 
The  Blue  Doctob. 


The  Silver  Doctor.  The  Wasps. 


The  Parson. 

The  Namsen. 
The  Popham. 


Thunder  and  Lightnino. 


The  Black  and  Teal. 

The  Orange  and  Grouse.     The  Childers. 

The  Claret.  i  The  Ranger. 


144  ANGLING. 

With  these  flies  in  his  book,  suited  in  size  and  brilliance 
to  the  water,  the  angler  need  not  fear  to  encounter  any 
river.  It  will  be  seen,  too,  that  with  slight  modifications 
of  dressing,  which  I  have  suggested,  perhaps  double  the 
number  of  patterns  could  be  made.  I  will  now  give  a 
brief  description  of  the  dressing  of  each  fly. 

The  Butcher  is,  perhaps,  one  of  the  most  general 
fayoorites  with  slight  variations.  It  is  dressed  in  many 
ways.  The  body  is  made  of  rough  pig's  wool.  Beginning 
at  the  tail  we  have  about  one-fifth  of  the  whole  body 
oompoeed  of  claret,  then  the  same  quantity  of.  medium 
blue ;  ditto  ditto  red,  and  the  rest  of  the  body  of  dark 
blue ;  a  reddish  claret  hackle  with  gallina  at  the  shoulder ; 
fine  gold  tinsel ;  an  under  wing  of  golden  pheasant's  niff 
and  rump,  and  a  mixed  upper  wing  of  mallard,  bustard, 
wood  duck,  dyed  swan,  &c.,  Ac. :  a  topping  for  the  tail ; 
and  the  same  may  be  added  to  the  wing  if  you  wish 
to  make  it  extra  gay.    This  fly  may  be  used  of  any  size. 

The  Jock  Scott  has  grown  greatly  in  favour  of  late 
jean.  In  Scotland  there  is  hardly  any  river  which  it  will 
not  kill  on.  The  tail,  one  topping  and  a  short  Indian 
crow  feather  ;  the  body  is  made  of  floss  silk  in  two 
joints — the  tail  joint  of  golden  yellow,  the  upper  one  of 
black.  At  the  joint  are  tied  in  two  or  three  small  toucan 
points,  with  two  turns  of  black  ostrich  harl ;  silver  twist 
over  the  black  joints,  gold  wire  over  the  yellow ;  a  black 
hackle  with  gallina  over  it ;  a  mixed  wing  of  white  tip 
turkey,  pintail,  bustard,  mallard,  and  dyed  swan,  with  one 
topping ;  a  short  kingfisher  feather  on  either  shoulder ; 
and  blue  macaw  points.  This  fly  ranges  from  a  largish 
medium  size  downwards  to  sea  trout  size. 

The  Blue  Doctob,  another  capital  fly.  Tail,  a 
topping ;  over  this  a  turn  of  bright  scarlet  crewel ;  body, 


SALMON   FLIES.  145 

very  pale  blue  silk ;  silver  tinsel ;  on  large  flies  double  the 
tinsel  or  use  silver  twist  alongside  it ;  hackle,  either  a  blue 
some  shades  darker,  or  a  blue  jay  feather  may  be  used, 
and  over  this,  at  the  shoulder,  a  grouse,  or  a  bustard 
hackle;  mixed  wing  of  bustard,  dark  turkey,  Argus 
pheasant,  and  dyed  swan ;  head,  scarlet  crewel.  Some 
people  omit  the  scarlet  crewel  at  head  and  tail,  and  use 
the  ordinary  black  ostrich  harl ;  it  is  matter  of  taste  and 
fancy.  I  don't  think  it  influences  the  salmon  much  one  way 
or  the  other.  The  fly  is  dressed  large  at  times.  I  have  seen 
very  large  ones  used  in  the  heavier  casts  in  the  Tummel, 
where  it  is  the  best  fly  by  far  that  can  be  used ;  and  they 
run  down  to  sea  trout  size. 

The  Silver  Doctor. — There  is  another  fly  somewhat 
similar  to  this  called  "  the  Wilkinson,"  which  kills  well  in 
the  Tweed  and  elsewhere.  The  doctor  has  a  body  of 
silver  tinsel,  with  a  topping  for  tail,  and  red  crewel  at  the 
butt,  as  in  the  Blue  Doctor  ;  blue  hackle,  speckled  gallina 
at  the  shoulder  ;  and  a  wing  chiefly  of  pintail  with  dyed 
swan,  mixed  fibres,  a  topping  or  two  over,  and  red  head. 
The  "  Wilkinson "  has  a  similar  body  ribbed  with  silver 
thread;  hackle  and  tail  as  in  the  Doctor,  with  a  lake 
coloured  hackle  at  shoulder;  a  mixed  wing  of  bustard, 
wood  duck,  pintail,  red  and  blue  macaw,  a  topping  over, 
and  two  kingfishers  at  the  shoulders  ;  with  a  black  instead 
of  a  red  head.  The  only  real  difference  is  in  the  wing  and 
the  shoulder  hackle,  which,  possibly  makes  the  fly  a  little 
more  brilliant,  and  perhaps  improves  it.  From  medium 
to  a  moderate  grilse  size. 

The  Black  and  Teal  is  a  capital  fly,  and  kills  almost 
anywhere.  In  small  flies  I  make  the  body  of  black  silk, 
and  in  larger  ones,  as  it  gets  towards  the  shoulder,  I  throw 
in  some  black  pig*8  wool ;  a  topping  for  tail ;  with  silver 

l 


146  ANGLING. 

twist  for  small,  and  tinsel  for  larger  flies  ;  a  black  hackle 
on  half  the  body,  and  gallina  (the  large  spotted  feather) 
at  the  shoulder.  In  small  flies  I  make  the  wing  simply  of 
a  slip  of  teal ;  in  larger  ones  I  add  doubled,  or  a  long  and 
short  jungle  cock  on  either  side  of  it  as  well ;  and  a  small 
teal  or  black  partridge  feather  for  the  under  wing.  You 
may  add  a  topping  if  you  like.  This  fly  runs  from  some- 
thing above  medium  size  down  to  sea  trout  size.  It  is  a 
good  sea  and  lake  trout  fly  also. 

Thb  Obanqe  and  Grouse. — This  is  a  capital  Irish  fly, 
and  will  kill  in  more  places  than  Ireland.  Tail,  a  topping 
and  small  kingfisher  feather ;  body,  orange  coloured  floss 
silk,  with  a  turn  or  two  of  lake  floss  at  the  tail  end  ;  silver 
tinsel ;  hackle,  grouse  with  a  bit  of  blue  jay  at  shoulder. 
The  hackle  is  usually  clipped  on  the  breast,  and  left  long 
for  the  wing ;  but  I  do  not  like  this  plan,  and  prefer  a 
wing  of  brown  turkey  of  the  same  colour  as  the  grouse 
hackle,  with  one  topping,  and  blue  macaw  points.  You 
may  vary  the  blue  jay  at  shoulder  with  any  other  colour ; 
a  long  fibred  black  heron  hackle,  with  a  coch-y-bonddhu, 
instead  of  grouse,  makes  a  good  change,  and  you  may  put 
a  bit  of  tippet  in  for  an  imder  wing.  ,  This  fly  should  be 
dressed  from  a  small  medium  size  down  to  sea  trout.  The 
orange  must  not  be  too  deep  a  red. 

The  Clajiet. — This  'fly  is  sometimes  called  the  fiery 
brown.  The  colour  of  the  body  may  be  varied  from  a  sort 
of  brownish  claret  to  reddish  and  almost  to  plum  colour. 
The  reddish  or  ordinary  claret  is  the  best,  however.  Tail, 
a  topping  ;  body,  claret  mohair,  or  seal's  fur,  with  two  or 
three  turns  of  orange  floss  at  the  tail ;  gold  twist ;  a  dirty 
reddish  claret  hackle  (a  darker  one  for  the  darker  bodies), 
with  a  black  hackle  at  the  shoulder ;  vary  this  with  a  blue 
jay;   wing,  a  golden  pheasant  tippet  feather  for  under 


SAXMON  FLIES.  147 

wing,  the  upper  "wing,  mixed  gold  pheasant  tail,  brown 
turkey,  pintail,  and  bustard,  with  a  few  fibres  of  red  and 
green  parrot,  and  blue  macaw  points.  This  is  a  very 
useful  fly,  and  may  be  dressed  from  over  medium  size 
down  to  grilse  size. 

The  Pa-rson. — This  is  a  very  gay  fly  indeed,  and  is 
rather  a  name  for  any  fly  with  a  number  of  toppings  in  it 
than  for  any  particular  fly.  It  hails  from  the  Erne  in 
Ireland,  one  of  the  most  charming  salmon  rivers  I  know 
of,  and  where  I  have  had  many  a  delightful  day's  sport ; 
but  if  a  striking  showy  fly  is  required,  this  is  almost  as 
good  a  basis  as  can  be  selected ;  Tail  a  topping,  some 
tippet  sprigs,  and  a  short  kingfisher  feather ;  body,  golden 
floss  about  three  turns,  then  pig's  wool  of  the  same  colour, 
changing  into  orange  ;  silver  twist ;  a  golden  olive  hackle 
with  a  turn  or  two  of  orange  over  it,  and  lastly,  a  lake* 
hackle  or  blue  jay  in  the  shoulder,  or  in  very  showy  flies  a 
few  short  toppings  are  tied  in  at  the  breast.  The  wing 
varies  according  to  the  brilliancy  of  the  fly — in  very  bright 
flies  a  single  tippet,  with  cock  of  the  rock  (not  the  square 
feather),  on  either  side,  two  strips  of  pintail  and  a  lot  of 
toppings — as  many  as  the  fly  will  carry — with  two  short 
kingfishers  at  the  shoulders,  and  blue  macaw  points.  In 
less  showy  flies,  two  golden  pheasant  saddle  feathers  over 
the  tippet  and  less  toppings,  with  a  few  sprigs  of  gold 
pheasant  tail  over  the  pintail,  and  no  cock  of  the  rock, 
does  well — the  toppings  are  sometimes  tied  on  so  as  to 
curve  upwards.     Tie  it  about  medium  sizes. 

The  Namsen. — This  fly  is  remarkable  chiefly  for  the 
beautiful  way  in  which  the  colours  of  the  body  are 
graduated  from  the  tail  to  the  shoulder.     Taking  that 

*  I  don't  know  what  they  call  this  colour  now,  but  it  is  a  sort 
of  red  purple. 

L  2 


148  ANGUNG. 

body  for  a  basis,  you  may  put  any  hackle  and  wing  to  it 
you  like,  but  I  do  not  think  you  can  improve  the  body. 
Tail,  a  topping  and  a  bit  of  red  ibis  ;  body,  two  turns  of 
golden  yellow  pig's  wool,  changing  into  orange,  and  then 
into  claret,  and  lastly  into  darkish  blue  ;  and  you  may  add 
a  twirl  of  black.  The  upper  part  of  the  body  should  be 
roughish,  and  picked  out  to  serve  as  a  hackle  ;  silver  and 
gold  thread  side  by  side,  a  black  hackle  on  the  shoulder ; 
wing,  slips  of  dark  turkey,  well  marked  bustard,  bittern 
wing,  and  dyed  swan  fibres,  various.     Size  medium. 

The  Popham. — This  is  a  curious  fly,  but  it  has  become 
a  very  general  favourite  of  late  years.  The  body  is  made 
in  three  equal  joints  of  floss  silk,  the  lowest  of  bright 
yellow,  the  middle  one  of  medium  blue,  and  the  upper  one 
of  orange ;  at  each  joint  is  tied  in  two  or  three  Indian 
crow  feathers,  with  a  turn  of  peacock  harl  over  ;  fine  gold 
twist ;  blue  jay  hackle  at  shoulder ;  tail,  a  topping  ;  a 
mixed  wing  of  golden  pheasant  tail  and  tippet,  bustard, 
teal,  and  dyed  swan  fibres  various,  and  one  topping.  From 
medium  to  grilse  size. 

The  Wasps. — These  are  flies  so  named  on  the  Tay,  but 
they  are  merely  the  type  of  the  old  almost  universal  Scotch 
fly,  which  formerly,  with  a  slight  variation  in  the  wing, 
was  used,  and  is  now,  not  only  all  over  Scotland,  but 
Wales  as  well.  Varied  slightly  they  are  the  most  useful 
flies  the  angler  can  have  in  his  book.  The  body  is  the 
main  point,  it  is  made  of  pig's  wool,  the  lower  half  yellow, 
the  upper  of  either  medium,  blue,  black,  or  claret  pig's 
wool,  or  you  may  graduate  it  with  a  few  turns  of  orange 
or  claret  above  the  yellow  ;  the  hackles  are  mostly  either 
coch-y-bonddhu  or  black,  with  or  without  a  bit  of  gallina, 
jay,  blue  or  claret,  at  the  shoulder ;  tinsel,  either  silver  or 
gold  at  will— tail  a  discretion.     The  wings  are  either  of 


SALMON  FLIES.  149 

cinnamon  coloured  turkey,  or  brown  speckled  turkey,  or 
peacock  wing,  or  (and  this  is  a  modem  innovation)  mixed, 
of  gold  pheasant  tail  and  ruff,  bustard,  wood  duck,  and 
dyed  swan.  These  flies  may  be  dressed  of  any  size,  from 
three  inches  long  down  to  sea  trout  size.  With  the  black 
and  yellow  body,  coch-y-bonddhu  hackle,  and  brown  turkey 
wing,  I  beat  every  fly  I  could  put  on  the  Usk  last  autumn, 
killing  every  fish  I  did  kill  with  it,  though  I  used  many 
other  flies.  It  is  now  called  there  the  Usk  Francis, 
though  the  fly  is  as  old  as  the  hills,  or  at  least  as  salmon 
fishing. 

The  Thundee  and  Lightning. — A  capital  Irish  fly 
first  introduced  on  the  Moy,  but  now  much  used  also  in 
Scotland,  where  it  kills  well.  Tail  a  topping,  black  ostrich 
over ;  body,  two  turns  of  orange  floss,  the  rest  of  black 
floss ;  gold  tinsel ;  light  orange  hackle  all  the  way  down 
with  blue  jay  at  shoulder ;  wing  dark  brown  mallard,  one 
topping,  blue  macaw  ribs ;  dark  purple  head.  From 
medium  to  sea  trout  size. 

The  Childebs. — This  is  another  capital  Scotch  fly.  I 
never  did  a  great  deal  with  it,  but  that  is  because  I  have 
used  it  but  little.  On  all  the  northern  rivers,  however,  it  is 
indispensable.  Tail  a  topping  with  some  teal  and  tippet 
fibres ;  body  yeUow,  orange,  and  dark  reddish  lake  (it  is  a 
difficult  colour  to  describe)  pig's  wool ;  broad  gold  tinsel ; 
a  reddish  claret  hackle  and  lightish  blue  or  jay  at  the 
shoulder  ;  wing  darkish  turkey,  bustard,  and  gold  pheasant 
tail,  with  dyed  swan  fibres,  various.  From  above  medium 
size  down  to  grilse. 

The  Kangeb. — There  are  two  Eangers,  the  black  and 
blue.  The  first  has  a  topping  for  tail.  Body  two  or  three 
laps  of  bright  yellow  floss,  then  bright  red  and  black  pig's 
wool ;  silver  twist  and  tinsel ;  or  dark  blue  hackle  with 


150  ANGLma. 

black  at  the  shoulder ;  wing  doubled  jungle  cock  feathers, 
some  tippet,  a  topping  blue  macaw  horns,  and  kingfisher's 
at  the  shoulders.  Substitute  blue  pig's  wool  for  the 
black  and  a  gallina  for  a  black  hackle,  and  you  have  the 
blue  Banger. 


ON  TACKLE  MAKING,  ETC.  151 


CHAPTER    XII. 

ON  TACKLE  MAKING,  &c. 

Tackle  Making. — The  first  thing  in  tackle  making  is  to  be 
able  to  tie  a  hook  and  gut  together.  Take  some  fine  toler- 
ably strong  waxed  silk,  using  either  cobbler's  wax  or  white 
wax.  If  the  colour  of  the  silk  is  a  matter  of  any  moment, 
the  white  wax  will  be  found  the  best.  Select  the  hook 
and  gut,  lay  the  gut  along  the  shank  of  the  hook  until  it 
nearly,  but  not  quite,  reaches  the  bend,  and  lay  the  end  of 
the  waxed  silk  along  with  it  and,  holding  both  gut  and  silk 
in  its  place  on  the  inside  of  the  hook,  twirl  the  silk  round 
and  round,  laying  every  coil  evenly  and  firmly  side  by  side, 
until  the  whole  of  the  gut  is  covered,  when  fasten  off  with 
a  couple  of  hitches  drawn  tight.  Touch  the  silk  with 
varnish,  and  put  it  aside  to  dry.  A  little  practice  will 
enable  the  angler  to  do  this  with  great  quickness  and 
certainty ;  but,  before  laying  the  gut  to  the  shank  of  the 
hook,  it  is  as  well  (particularly  in  smallish  hooks)  to  bite, 
or  indent  with  the  teeth,  the  gut  to  be  lashed  over,  as  it 
gives  an  irregular  surface  to  the  silk  and  prevents  it  from 
slipping. 

The  next  thing  is  to  tie  two  ends  of  gut  together  so  as 
to  be  able  to  make  or  lengthen  a  casting  line  or  other 
tackle.  On  tying  gut  together  you  should  always  soak  it 
first  in  lukewarm  water — if  you  do  not  the  knot  never 
draws  so  close  home,  and  is  very  apt  to  slip.     If  you  have 


152  ANGLING. 

no  warm  water  at  hand,  place  the  ends  in  your  mouth  and 
keep  them  there  for  some  minutes.  There  are  two  or 
three  ways  of  tying  strands  of  gut  together,  the  first  and 
simplest  is  by  what  I  call  the  single  l)arrel  knot,  as  given 
in  the  first  knot  in  Plate  4.  Lay  the  ends  of  the  gut 
alongside  of  one  another  for  an  inch  and  a  half  or  two 
inches,  take  a  coil  round  and  pass  the  ends  through ; 
shorten  the  useless  ends  as  much  as  you  can  so  as  te  waste 
none,  draw  the  knot  as  tight  as  you  can  and  cut  off  the 
ends,  unless  you  contemplate  lashing  them  te  the  line  with 
fine  silk,  as  some  people  do,  when  leave  about  the  sixth  of 
an  inch,  and  lash  that,  touching  with  varnish  of  course. 
I  sometimes  do  this  with  the  upper  side  of  such  a  knot, 
when  I  want  to  tie  on  over  it  a  dropper  fly  ;  in  other  cases 
I  find  it  quite  enough,  with  moderately  fine  gut,  to  pull 
tight  when  moist,  to  allow  the  knot  to  dry,  and  then  having 
cut  off  the  ends,  touch  it  with  varnish.  It  is  ten  to  one 
against  its  slipping  in  any  ordinary  trial ;  but  with  stout 
salmon  gut  submitted  to  heavy  strains  such  knots  will 
sometime  slip  unless  the  ends  are  lashed.  The  stouter 
the  gut  the  more  liable  it  is  to  slip. 

Many  persons,  to  make  quite  sure,  use  the  double  barrel 
knot.  This  is  the  same  fashion  of  knot,  only  the  ends  are 
passed  twice  through  the  coil,  as  shown  in  Fig.  2,  and 
when  drawn  tight  you  must  be  careful  to  anange  the  coils 
so  that  they  lie  nice  and  even,  and  no  one  rides  over  the 
other.  There  is  another  knot  and  a  very  good  one — the 
double  tie  knot.  Lay  the  gut  ends  together  as  before, 
take  hold  of  one  end  and  tie  it  round  the  opposite  gut, 
then  take  the  other  end  and  do  the  same ;  pull  the  ties 
home,  and  then  draw  the  ties  together  until  they  are  quite 
firm  and  strong,  and  cut  off  the  ends.  This  is  shown  in 
Fig.  3.     Some  people  use  this  knot  for  fixing  di-oppers : 


ON  TACKLE   MAElNa,  ETC.  153 

they  tie  a  knot  at  the  end  of  the  gut  of  the  dropper,  put 
it  between  the  gut  strands  between  the  ties  before  they  are 
drawn  home  together,  and  then  when  drawn  home  the  knot 
in  the  dropper  holds  it.  I  don't  approve  of  the  plan. 
The  only  other  knots  or  hitches  worth  notice  are  the  single 
hitch,  by  which  a  running  line  without  a  loop  can  be 
fastened  very  quickly  and  simply  to  the  casting  line: 
when  drawn  home  this  is  very  secure.  (See  Fig.  4.)  A 
double  hitch  can  be  made  by  returning  the  knot  at  the  end 
of  the  running  line  again  through  the  eye,  so  as  to  leave 
a  bight  of  the  line  on  one  side  of  it  and  the  knot  end  on 
the  other.  When  this  is  drawn  tight,  the  hitch  can  be 
undone  instantaneously  by  a  pull  at  the  knot.  The  double 
slip,  which  is  given  at  Fig.  5,  is  the  double  slip  loop 
mentioned  in  fastening  on  salmon  flies,  the  bight  is  pushed 
through  the  loop  of  the  fly  so  far  that  the  whole  fly  can 
be  turned  through  it,  the  slip  is  drawn  home  and  the  end 
cut  off.  It  is  usually  easy  thus  to  take  the  fly  off  and  put 
on  another  in  the  same  way,  though  now  and  then  the 
loop  gets  so  jammed  that  it  is  not  very  easy  to  do  so. 
These  are  all  the  knots  that  are  really  required  by  the 
angler. 

The  next  point  is  how  to  tie  a  trout  fly.  The  simplest 
form  of  trout  fly  is  not  difficult  at  all  to  learn.  Of  course 
practice  is  required  to  be  able  to  do  it  neatly.  The 
simplest  form  of  fly  is  that  of  the  plain  hackle  or  palmer 
fly.  It  is  fitted  with  more  or  less  body,  which  has  a 
hackle  rolled  over  it  till  it  resembles  a  small  section  of  a 
bottle  brush.  In  the  north,  where  hackle  flies  are  largely 
and  in  some  instances  almost  exclusively  used,  only  a  few 
turns  of  the  hackle  are  made  at  the  head  of  the  fly.  In 
other  flies — take  chub  flies  for  example — they  are  rolled 
thickly  all  up  the  body  from  tail  to  head.     In  most  of  the 


154  ANGLING. 

winged  flies,  however,  only  about  two  or  three  turns  are 
taken  at  the  shoulder  or  breast,  though  there  are  several 
exceptions  to  this ;  but  suppose  we  want  to  make  a  full 
dressed  palmer  of  the  chub  fly  pattern,  we  take  two  or 
three  strands  of  harl,  either  of  peacock,  ostrich,  or  other 
feather,  or  a  fragment  of  silk,  wool,  or  other  matter,  and 
having  whipped  on  the  hook  to  the  gut,  and  left  a  good 
end  of  silk  hanging,  we  tie  one  end  of  the  harl,  &c.,  on  to 
the  lower  end  of  the  hook,  just  above  the  bend,  tying  in  at 
the  same  time  the  tip  of  a  hackle  of  suitable  proportions. 
See  Fig.  6,  Plate  4.  Then  we  roll  the  silk  up  to  the  head 
of  the  fly,  as  that  is  where  we  now  want  it ;  we  then  take 
hold  of  the  harl — silk  or  wool — and  roll  it  round  the 
shank  of  the  hook,  coil  after  coil,  till  we  reach  the 
shoulders  or  head,  where  the  lashing  silk  is,  and  with  this 
we  take  a  turn  over  the  harl,  &c.,  and  a  hitch  to  secure  it ; 
cut  off  the  surplus  harl,  Ac,  and  there  is  the  body  com- 
plete. (Fig.  7.)  Then  we  take  hold  of  the  butt  end  of 
the  hackle,  and  roll  that  on  likewise  in  rather  more  open 
coils,  taking  care  that  the  points  of  the  hackle  are  kept 
clear  and  free,  and  not  doubled  up  anyhow,  all  of  a  heap ; 
and  having  in  like  fashion  reached  the  head  or  shoulder, 
tie  off  the  stump  of  the  hackle  with  two  or  three  tight 
turns  and  hitches;  cut  off  all  the  refuse  hackle,  neatly 
press  the  fibres  down  in  the  direction  they  should  point, 
pull  out  any  that  may  have  got  doubled,  so  that  they 
stand  in  their  proper  place,  with  a  dubbing  needle — this  is 
a  blunted  carpet  needle,  fixed  in  a  handle — blunted  that 
it  may  not  cut  the  silk  ;  touch  the  head  of  the  fly  where 
the  tying  silk  is  with  varnish,  and  there  is  your  hackle  or 
palmer  fly  complete.     (Fig.  8.) 

If  you  want  a  winged  fly,  you  must  leave  a  fragment  of 
the  hook  unoccupied  at  the  head,  and  pinching  or  pulling 


ON  TACEXE  MAKING,  ETC.  155 

off  a  fragment  of  feather  from  the  wing  of  a  starling, 
thrush,  or  other  bird  of  the  requisite  size,  and,  holding 
the  feather  between  the  left  finger  and  thumb,  fit  it  care- 
fully to  the  hook,  so  that  it  may  not  be  too  long  or  too 
short,  and,  having  nipped  in  the  butt  end  of  the  feather  in 
the  place  where  the  tying  silk  should  come,  take  three  or 
four  turns  of  it  over  that  spot,  and  fasten  off ;  and  if  you 
have  managed  it  well,  you  will  find  the  wing  of  the  fly  sit 
up  well,  and  open  in  shape  like  unto  the  wing  of  a  fly.  If 
not,  and  the  wing  be  askew  or  broken,  you  must  humour 
it  as  well  as  you  can,  and  make  the  best  of  it.  Practice 
alone  will  put  you  on  velvet  here.  Many  tyers  use  a  pair 
of  wings.  In  this  case  you  should  pull  pieces  from  both 
the  bird's  wings,  so  that  they  may  sit  well  right  and  left. 
Having  tied  your  wings  on  separate,  then,  with  the  dubbing 
needle,  cut  off  stumps,  touch  with  varnish,  and  all  is 
finished.  (Fig.  9.)  In  about  eight  or  nine-tenths  of  the 
winged  flies,  however,  the  hackle  is  not  carried  all  up  the 
body.  In  this  case,  when  you  are  carrying  your  silk  up  to 
the  head,  after  tying  in  at  the  bend  of  the  hook  the  end  of 
the  material  which  is  to  form  the  body,  you  do  not  tie  in 
the  tip  of  the  hackle  with  it,  but  wait  till  the  silk  reaches 
half  or  two-thirds  up  the  shank  of  the  hook,  and  tie  the 
tip  of  the  hackle  in  there,  when  two  or  three  turns  suffice 
after  the  body  is  on,  which  is  worked  up  to  the  head  and 
past  the  hackle,  carefully  avoiding  it  in  the  process.  If  a 
tail  is  wanted,  it  usually  consists  of  two  or  three  points  or 
strands  of  some  hackle  or  other  feather  ;  they  are  whipped 
on  above  the  bend  of  the  hook,  after  it  is  lashed  to  the 
gut,  before  any  other  process  is  taken.  If  a  spiral  of 
tinsel  be  required,  it  is  tied  in  at  the  bend  at  the  same 
time  as  the  body  material ;  and  after  the  body  is  wound 


156  ANGLING. 

on,  the  tinsel  is  wound  over  it  in  open  spirals,  and  tied  off 
at  the  shoulder  similarly. 

There  is  one  more  process,  and  that  is  in  case  of  a  fur 
body  being  required,  pick  out  your  fur  enough  and  to 
spare,  lay  it  along  the  palm  of  your  hand,  as  if  you  were 
depositing  the  tobacco  for  a  cigarette ;  then  roll  it  to  and 
fro  in  just  the  same  manner  until  it  incorporates  in  a  long 
thin  roll.  Then  lay  this  against  the  waxed  thread,  and 
twirl  the  thread  so  as  to  whirl  the  fur  round  it,  roll  on 
silk  and  fur  together  up  to  the  shoulder  till  the  body  is 
formed,  when  pull  off  the  refuse  fur,  and  fasten  off  the 
silk  as  usual.  Then,  with  the  dubbing  needle,  pick  off  all 
that  is  not  needed,  and  work  the  body  to  the  proper  size 
and  form.  If  the  tyer  wants  his  fly  to  be  lightly  legged, 
he  can,  by  stripping  one  side  of  the  hackle,  and  rolling  on 
the  other,  have  it  as  light  as  he  pleases  ;  but  he  must  be 
careful  to  strip  the  right  side  of  the  hackle.  A  little 
experience,  however,  on  all  these  points,  and  a  few  bungles, 
which  he  is  sure  to  make,  will  soon  teach  him  the  right 
method,  and  there  is  nothing  else  he  will  learn  so  quickly 
or  so  soon  from.  The  only  lesson  I  ever  had  in  fly  tying 
was  seeing  a  schoolfellow  tie  a  palmer  (such  as  it  was,  and 
it  was  rough  enough  in  all  conscience)  hard  on  fifty  years 
ago — all  the  rest  I  puzzled  out  myself.  There  are  other 
ways  of  tying  flies ;  some  tie  the  wings  on  first,  and  work 
down  to  the  tail,  &c.  &c. ;  but  this  is  the  simplest.  Since 
I  knew  how  to  tie  flies — particularly  salmon  flies — I  have 
picked  up  a  hint  here  and  there,  but  the  general  method 
is  much  the  same  throughout.  The  great  skill — quick- 
ness and  precision  of  professional  tyers  is  acquired  from 
the  habit  of  tying  large  orders  of  particular  flies.  For 
example,  a  man  has  an  order  for  three  or  four  dozen  of 
**  clarets."     First  he  looks  or  fits  out  three  dozen  hooks 


ON  TACKLE  MAKING,  ETC.  157 

with  loops  ;  then  three  dozen  small  toppings  for  the  tails. 
Then  he  looks  out  for  a  good  quantity  of  claret  seal's  fur, 
with  tinsel  to  match.  Then  three  dozen  claret  hackle, 
three  dozen  jays,  or  black,  or  what-not  for  shoulders,  and 
then  he  makes  up  three  dozen  piles  of  assorted  wings. 
Having  his  various  materials  sorted  out  before  him  on  the 
table,  he  begins  and  whips  on  his  three  dozen  tails,  one 
after  the  other  ;  then  three  dozen  bodies  ;  then  three 
dozen  strips  of  tinsel  and  hackles  to  match  ;  and,  lastly, 
three  dozen  assorted  wings.  In  this  way,  if  any  difficulty 
or  error  occurs  in  one  body,  hackle,  or  wing,  &c.,  it  is 
corrected  by  experience  in  the  next,  and  the  constant 
doing  of  the  same  thing  gives  wonderful  dexterity  and 
certainty,  which  an  amateur  can  hardly  obtain. 

Now,  one  great  object  in  tying  a  salmon  fly  is  to  leave 
nothing  but  the  feathers,  &c.,  it  is  tied  with  visible ;  all 
lashing  and  fixing  materials  should  be  concealed  until  the 
extreme  head  of  the  fly,  where  the  loop  is  reached,  when  the 
least  bit  of  the  hook  may  be  left  to  finish  off  the  lashing. 
Consequently,  as  you  finish  off  one  operation,  you  cover 
the  lashing  of  that  finish  with  the  material  of  the  next 
operation.  With  the  salmon  fly,  you  begin,  as  in  the  trout 
fly,  at  the  tail.  Very  many  flies  have  what  is  called  a  tag. 
This  is  a  turn  or  two  of  fine  tinsel  or  thread,  and  the  same 
of  floss  silk.  First,  you  tie  on  the  end  of  the  tinsel,  and 
work  the  tying  silk  back.  Take  two  or  three  turns  of  the 
tinsel,  and  tie  it  off,  tying  on  the  end  of  the  floss  at 
the  same  time,  and  work  that  off  in  the  same  way.  Then 
you  tie  on  the  tail,  making  it  set  as  well  as  you  can  in  a 
straight  line  with  the  hook,  and  curving  delicately  up- 
wards. Having  tied  that  on  securely  you  may  touch  it 
with  varnish.  Then  take  a  bit  of  the  strongest  ostrich 
harl  you  can  find  (black  is  usually  employed),  and  tie  the 


158  ANGLING. 

end  of  that  in  over  the  stump  of  the  tail.  Take  about 
three  turns  of  that,  taking  care  that  the  fibre  of  the  harl 
points  towards  the  tail.  This  is  called  the  butt.  It  is  not 
used  in  all  flies  by  any  means ;  but  in  many,  and  par- 
ticularly where  the  bodies  or  the  lower  part  of  them  are 
made  of  floss  silk,  it  gives  an  elegant  and  brilliant  finish 
to  the  fly.  It  is  not  at  all  indispensable,  however.  In 
tying  or  fastening  off  the  butt,  it  is  usual  to  tie  on  the 
floss  or  other  material  for  the  body  ;  likewise  the  tinsel ; 
and,  if  it  runs  all  up  the  body,  the  hackle  likewise.  Work 
the  silk  back  up  to  the  shoulder  of  the  fly,  leaving  a 
portion  of  the  hook  for  the  wing  and  head  to  be  fitted  on. 
The  process  then  followed  is  just  the  same  as  in  a  trout 
fly.  You  roll  on  the  body  and  tie  it  off  at  the  shoulder. 
Then  the  tinsel,  and  then  the  hackle,  following  the  spiral 
of  the  tinsel  with  the  quill  of  the  hackle,  and  fasten 
off  at  the  shoulder.  If  the  hackle  is  only  needed  at  the 
shoulder  or  half  way  up  the  body,  the  tip  must  be  tied  on 
as  you  work  the  silk  back;  and  it  must,  of  course,  be 
avoided  in  rolling  on  the  body  and  tinsel. 

Having  now  got  on  body,  tinsel,  and  hackle,  it  often 
happens  that  you  want  a  shoulder  hackle.  This  is  com- 
posed of  some  short  feather,  as  a  grouse,  jay,  bustard,  or 
other  hackle.  You  never  want  much  of  this ;  at  most,  not 
more  than  two  or  three  turns.  Now  to  make  the  hackle 
run  even,  you  must  compare  the  length  of  the  fibres,  and 
match  them,  cutting  off  all  that  is  too  short,  then  nicking 
the  feather  where  you  want  to  tie  the  quill  in,  and  cutting 
off  most  of  the  hackle  fibre,  so  as  not  to  have  too  big  a 
bunch  of  stuff  to  tie  in  the  point  you  have  thus  fashioned. 
Work  the  silk  back  to  the  head,  roll  on  the  hackle  two  or 
three  times  round,  taking  care  to  make  the  fibres  point 
straight  and  even  with  the  others ;  then  tie  off  the  stump 


ON  TACKLE   MAKING,  ETC.  159 

firmly,  and  cut  o£E  all  refuse,  and  touch  the  tie  with 
varnish.  If  you  use  grouse,  jay,  or  hackles  of  that  class, 
it  is  best  to  strip  ofE  one  side.  Be  careful  that  you  take 
off  the  right  one.  In  the  jay  hackle  you  will  probably 
have  to  shave  off  some  of  the  quill  with  a  sharp  Denknife, 
as  it  is  too  thick  at  the  stump  to  roll  neatly.  This  is  a 
delicate  operation.  It  is  always  as  well  to  let  your  varnish 
dry  before  fixing  on  the  wing  and  head. 

If  you  have  what  is  called  an  underwing,  which  usually 
consists  of  one  or  two  tippet  or  saddle  feathers  of  the 
golden  pheasant,  or  some  other  short  showy  feather,  you 
must  tie  that  on  first,  and  the  main  wing  you  tie  on  over 
it.  This  will  either  be  strips  of  some  feather  or  a  mixed 
wing  of  many  fibres  of  various  feathers.  The  strips  you 
tie  on  right  and  left  of  the  under  wing,  and  it  is  by  no 
means  an  easy  thing  to  make  them  all  set  straight  and 
well  always.  In  the  mixed  wing  you  either  select  the 
various  fibres  and  put  them  together  before  tying  on,  and 
then  tie  them  on  in  bulk,  or  you  tie  on  a  few  at  a  time. 
But  all  this  experience  will  teach  better  than  precept. 
Make  a  few  bungles,  my  dear  pupil,  and  try  to  rectify 
them,  that  is  the  way  to  learn ;  and  beyond  all  you  need 
not  throw  away  your  bungles  in  disgust.  They  will 
probably  kill  quite  as  well  as  the  most  perfect  works  of 
art. 

One  of  the  most  successful  fishermen  I  ever  knew  was 
one  of  the  worst  fly  tyers,  and  he  always  fished  with  his 
own  monstrosities.  Awful  things  they  were — "  quite  too 
utterly  awful "  in  the  Lingua  Haut-tonica  of  the  period. 
His  hackles  buzzed  in  all  directions.  His  tails  skewed, 
and  his  toppings  stared  enough  to  give  a  neat  tyer  the 
cold  shivers,  but  the  salmon  liked  'em  well  enough  some- 
how.    There  was  a  novelty  about  'em,  and  my  friend  was 


160  ANGLINa. 

a  very  eminent  sticker.  IVe  known  him  stick  for  two  or 
three  hours  over  a  fish,  and  work  him  with  fly  after  fly  till 
the  fish,  in  desperation  and  to  get  rid  of  the  nuisance,  took 
it  at  last.  My  old  friend  was  particular  about  colour  and 
size,  however ;  moreover,  he  used  a  long  stretch  of  single 
gut,  and  that  was  all  that  he  required,  and  I  am  inclined 
to  think  he  was  not  far  out. 

Having  got  your  wing  on  to  the  best  of  your  ability, 
you  may,  if  you  please,  mount  it  with  a  topping,  or  even 
two  or  more,  and  you  may  put  what  are  called  ribs,  horns, 
or  feelers  of  macaw  points,  or  you  may  put  cheek  or 
shoulder  feathers — which  are  short  feathers  of  kingfisher, 
blue  chatterer,  or  jungle  cock— at  the  side  ;  all  these  are 
mounted  after  the  bulk  of  the  wing  is  on ;  all  these  aids 
are  more  difficult  to  tie  on  straight  and  true  than  the 
other  part  of  the  wing,  and  nothing  but  practice  will 
enable  a  fly  tyer  to  put  his  wings  on  neatly.  Having 
bound  your  wing  on  firmly,  varnish  the  tie  well,  and  lay 
it  aside  till  dry;  then  take  a  bit  of  harl,  crewel,  or  chenille, 
the  last  is  the  strongest,  and  preserves  the  fly  best,  tie  the 
end  on,  wind  it  round  over  the  stump  of  the  wing  once  or 
twice,  and  tie  it  off  to  last  fragment  of  hook,  and  this 
forms  the  head ;  take  a  turn  or  two  on  to  the  loop  to  make 
all  secure,  fasten  off,  and,  finally,  cut  off  the  silk,  varnish, 
and  lay  the  fly  by  till  it  is  wanted.  If  by  that  time  the 
wing  stands  pretty  firmly  on  the  fly,  and  cannot  be 
wobbled  to  and  fro  when  handled,  you  may  be  satisfied.  If 
you  want  to  see  how  any  particular  salmon  fly  is  tied,  you 
must  cut  it  up,  beginning  with  the  head,  and  having  got 
to  the  silk  under  it,  cut  by  cut  until  you  work  down  to  the 
tail,  and  you  will  then  see  pretty  clearly  how  H  is  done. 
These  directions  on  reading  them  over  appear  to  me  so 
dear  and  understandable,  that  I  think  the  reader,  if  he 


ON  TACKLE   MAKING,  ETC.  161 

has  any  taste  or  appreciation  of  tackle  making,  can  hardly 
miss  his  mark  or  lose  his  way.  Some  tyers  use  a  vice, 
some  trust  altogether  to  their  fingers.  Where  the  fly  is  at 
all  beyond  the  simplest,  I  generally  use  a  vice  myself,  as  it 
gives  more  freedom,  and  another  pair  of  fingers  as  it  were, 
and  with  two  pair  of  spring  pliers  to  hold  the  silk  or  the 
hackle  in  place,  one  ought  to  be  able  to  get  on  in  time — 
once  master  the  method,  however,  and  all  the  rest  is 
a  matter  of  practice. 

Eecipes. — I  have  mentioned — 

White  Wax. — This  is  made  with  a  lump  of  resin,  about 
one-sixth  the  quantity  of  beeswax,  and  one-eighth  of 
taUow ;  melt  them  together  in  a  pipkin ;  then  pour  out 
into  cold  water,  and  then  work  the  mass  about  till  it 
becomes  quite  pliable  and  tough  in  the  fingers ;  lay  it  by 
for  use. 

Vaenish  is  made  of  the  best  spirits  of  wine  put  into  a 
bottle,  and  about  half  the  quantity  of  broken  up  shellac ; 
let  it  stand  till  all  is  taken  up  by  the  spirit,  and  when  you 
use  it,  let  it  be  quite  dry  before  you  put  your  tackle  into 
the  water,  or  it  turns  white  and  crumbles. 

Cobbler's  Wax,  when  it  becomes  too  hard  and  brittle 
in  cold  weather,  may  be  worked  up  before  the  fire  with  the 
smallest  fragment  of  tallow,  and  will  soon  become  quite 
soft  and  usable. 


162 


ANGLING. 


ADDEISTDA. 

I  HB&B  add  a  very  useful  little  table  compiled  originally, 
or  at  any  rate  put  forth,  by  Messrs.  Eaton  and  Dbller. 
of  Crooked-lane.  It  may  not  be  strictly  accurate  always, 
but  it  gives  a  fair  approximation  to  what  fishes  of  various 
lengths  should  weigh. 

A  TABLS  Oy  APP&OXIM ATB  W1IORT8  OF  riBH  AOGOBDINO  TO 
THBIB  LVNOTB. 


CATALOGUE  OF  BOOKS 


BBLATINa  TO 


^nQlixiQ,  §0atitt0,  €mUU  gaming,  «artomg,  Hiiwtittg, 


U8XFUL  rOB 


COUNTRY    GENTLEMEN, 

TEAVELLEES,   ETC., 


PUBLISHED  BY 

HORACE     COX, 

"THE  FIELD"  OFFICE,  346,  STRAND,  LONDON,  W.C. 


*#*  Orders  for  any  of  the  following  works,  with  postage 
stamps  or  post-ofice  order  {payable  at  the  Somerset  House 
Branch  Money  Order  Ofjice)  for  the  amount,  should  he  sent  to 
Horace  Cox,  Publisher,  at  the  above  address,  or  they  may  be 
obtained  by  order  of  any  bookseller. 


PREFACE. 


T  BEG  to  call  the  attention  of  Country  Gentlemen, 
Travellers,  Sportsmen,  Farmers,  &c.,  to  the 
works  quoted  in  this  catalogue,  as  written  by  authors 
who  are  well  known  and  trusted  as  authorities  in 
their  respective  branches  of  knowledge.  These 
books  are  well  illustrated  by  competent  artists,  and 
I  think  I  may  say  that  everything  has  been  done 
that  could  be  to  make  them  complete. 

HORACE   COX, 

PuNither. 


A 

CATALOGUE    OF    BOOKS 

PUBLISHED  BV 

HORACE    COX. 

Second  Edition,  Greatly  Enlargred. 

Royal  Mo. J  bevelled  hoardsj  gilt  edges,  price  15«. 

PHEASANTS: 

THXIB 

Natural  History  and  Practical  Management. 

BY 

W.   B.   TEGETMEIEE,  F.Z.S., 

{Member  of  tk*  BrUith  Or%itkotogi$U'  Union.) 
AUTHOB  OF  ''The  Natcbal  Histoby  of  thb  Cbambs,"  *o. 

niiutrated  with  numerous  fall-p»g«  engr&ringi  drawn  from  Life  by  T.  W.  WOOD. 


CONTENTS. 

Including  the  Natural  History  of  the  Pheasants,  their  Management  In  Preserves 
and  in  Conflnement.  with  detailed  descriptions  of  the  Different  Species  adapted 
for  the  Covert  and  tne  Aviary,  and  an  account  of  their  Diseases  and  Transport. 


Notices  of  the  Second  Edition. 

From  Yarrell's  "  British  Birds,"  fourth  edition.—"  For  further  details,  as  well 
as  for  instructions  as  to  the  management  of  pheasants,  both  in  the  covert  and  the 
aviary,  and  the  disorders  to  which  they  are  liable,  the  reader  is  referred  to  Mr. 
Tegetmeier's  excellent  work,  to  which  the  editor  is  under  great  obligations." 

From  the  Pall  Mall  Oatette. — "  This  new  and  sumptuous  edition  contains  so 
large  an  amount  of  fresh  matter  that  it  may  be  regarded,  practically,  as  another 
work.  In  its  own  way,  it  is  quite  exhaustive.  Illustrated  by  admirable  and  life- 
like full-page  illustratrations.  On  the  technical  details  of  rearing  and  preservation, 
Mr.  Tegetmeier  will  be  found  a  thoroughly  trustworthy  and  Hcientiflc  guide." 

From  the  Daily  Telegraph. — ''  Both  in  its  description  and  practical  aspects,  the 
treatise  is  admirable." 


'*THE   field"   OFFICE,   346,   STBAND,  W.C. 


A  CATALOGUE  OF  BOOKS 


ILLUSTRATED  WITH  NUMEROUS  DRAWINGS  OF  CELEBRATED  YACHTS. 
In  Imperial  folio,  price  £3  3«. 

YACHT   DESIGNING: 

A    TREATISE 

ON  THB 

PRACTICAL  APPLICATION  of  the  SCIENTIFIC  PRINCIPLES 

DPON  WHICH  18  BX8BD 

THB  ART  OP  DESIGNING  YACHTS. 
By  DIXON    KEMP,  A.I.N.A., 

Amtkor  9f**A  Mtmrnai  «if  Taeht  and  Boat  Sailingr 


rilUlS  WOBK  haa  been  compiled  to  give  information  upon  the 
X.  practical  i4>plioation  of  the  scientific  principles  upon  which  the 
art  of  Taoht  Designing  ia  based.  A  complete  system  of  constmc- 
tion  ia  prorided  for  the  goidance  of  the  inexperienced,  together 
with  all  necessary  information  relative  to  the  primary  subjects  of 
buoyancy,  stability,  resistance,  and  speed. 


CONTENTS. 


I. — EzpUnation  of  PrinciplM. 
II.— Deacription  of  Tarioos  Bales  and  Formnla  of  Use  in  Determining  the 

QaaUtiea  of  a  Yacht. 
nL— Application  of  the  Foregoing  Bolea. 

Vl— llM  Effect  of  Shifting  and  B«movingWeighti  on  StabUity ;  the  Longitadinal 
Mataoentre;  Alteration  of  Trim ;  Pitching  and  Scending,  and  BoUing. 
VL— Power  to  Carry  Sail;  the  Impalae  of  the  Wind  as  a  Propelling  Power; 

Table  of  Velocity  and  Pveaaore  of  Winds. 
VIL— Beaictanoe  to  Veaaels  moring  in  Water;  Stream  Lines;    the  Wave-line 
Theory ;  Belative  Lengths  of  Forebody  and  Afterbody  for  Speed  in  Elnots 
per  Hour. 
YIIL— Sortaoe  Friction;  Calculation  of  the  Immersed  Surface;  the  Immersed 
Suf  aoe  in  Belation  to  Lateral  Besistance. 
IX— Value  of  the  Wave-line  Theory;  the  Forebody;  the  Afterbody;  Form,  Area, 

and  position  of  the  Midship  section. 
X.— Nystrom's  System  of  Parabolic  Construction. 
XI.— Oalenlation  of  Probable  Speed. 
XIL— Coostmetioo  Drawing. 
XnL— Laying  Off ;  Taking  Off. 
XIV.— Ballast  and  Spars. 
XV.— Besistance  Experiments  with  Models. 
Appendix. 

"  THE   FIELD "  OFFICE,  346,   BTBAND,  W.C. 


PUBLISHED   BY   HOBACE   COX. 


THIRD   EDITION.    GREATLY  ENLARGED. 
Super-royal  Svo.,  with  Sixty -five  full-page  Diagrams,  price  258, 

A   MANUAL 

OF 

YACHT  AND   BOAT   SAILING. 


DIXON     KEMP,    A.I.N.A., 

Adthoe  of  "Yacht  Desiqnwg." 


CONTENTS. 


Infor. 
of 


Chap. 

r— Selecting  a  Yacht. 
II.— Examination  of  the  Yacht  before 

Purchasing, 
m.— Building  a  Yacht. 
IV.— The  Equipment  of  the  Yacht,  in- 
cluding complete  information 
as  to  Spars,  Rigging,  Ac. 
v.— Seamanship. 

Thifl  chapter  contains  complete  Information 
as  tothe 
the 
Off 

ing,  Oybini 

Under  way,  &o.    It  also  ffires 
mation  as  to  the  Management 
Open  Boats. 

VI.— The  General  Management  of  a 
Yacht,  including  Duty  and  Dis- 
cipline of  the  Crew. 
VII.— Yacht  Eacing. 

Containing  full  Information  as  to  the  ex- 
penses of  Tacbt  Baolng,  and  an  Kzpoeltion  of 
Yacht  Badng  Kales. 

VIII.— Centre-board  Boats. 

This  chapter  Inolndee  designs  for  Centre- 
board Boats  for  Bowing  and  Balling,  and  the 
best  varietlee  of  SaUs,  with  working  drawings. 

IX.— Sails  for  Centre-board  Boats. 

This  chapter  diaotuses  the  merits  of  the 
various  lug  sails  and  sprit  sails  used,  inoludlitg 
the  Balance  Lug,  Chinese  Lug,  Ounter  Sprit 
Klg,  Falmouth  Luggers,  Lowestoft  Lateen 
Sail,  Algoa  Bay  Lateen  Sail,  Ac. 


Chap. 

XI. — Centre-board  Sloop 
XII.— The  Polly wog. 
XIII.— Lough  Erne  Yachts 
XIV.— Una  Boats. 
XV. — The  American  Centre-board 

Sloop  Parole. 
XVI.— The     Sharpie     and     Sneak 

Boat. 
XVII.— New  Brighton  SaUing  Boats. 
XVIII.— Lake  Windermere  Yachts. 
XIX.— Yachts  of  the  Norfolk  Broads. 
XX.— Itchen  Boats— Itchen  Sailing 

Punts. 
XXI.— Clyde  Sailing  Boats. 
XXII.— Kingstown  Boats. 
XXIII.— Yachts  of  Three,  Five,  and 

Ten  Tons. 
XXIV.— Penzance     Luggers,     Coble, 
Oalway  Hooker  and  Pook- 
haun,     Norwegian     Pilot 
Boats,  ius. 
XXV.— The  Jullanar. 
XXVI.— Double  Boats. 

This  oh^ter  Includes  a  full  desoription  of 
the  American  Catamaran. 

XXVII.— Steam  Yachting. 
XXVIII.— Ice  Yachting. 

XXIX.— Canoeing. 
Appendix.— Contains  complete  instruc- 
tions as  to  Practical  Boat  Building. 

This  section  Is  arranged  alphabetically  In  the 
form  of  a  dictionary,  and  embodies  a  variety  of 
Information  connected  with  Yachts,  Boats,  &c. 


X.— Brighton  Beach  Boats.  

Full  initruction  is  g^ven  as  to  the  Building  and  Management  of  every  Boat 
described. 


THE   FIELD"   OFFICE,   346,   STEAND,   W.C. 


▲  CATAXOGUB  OF  BOOKS 


ILLUSTRATED  WITH  FULL-PAGE  ENGRAVINGS  DRAWN  PRINCIPALLY  FROM 
LIFE  BY  HARRISON  WEIR. 

In  Imperial  4to.,  bevelled  hoards^  gilt  edgea^  price  18«. 
THE 

CATTLE  OF   GREAT   BRITAIN: 

BEING 

A   SERIES    OF    ARTICLES 

ON  THS 

VARIOUS  BREEDS  OP  CATTLE  OP  THE  UNITED  KINGDOM, 
THEIR  HISTORY,  MANAGEMENT,  &c. 

Editsd  bt  J.  COLEMAN, 

■dttoroTtlMruin  I>«p*(tiiMBto<"TlM  FUUL"  ftod  foniMrly  ProfaMor  of  Affrioolturd 
•t  Um  Ho|mi  Acrlooltoiml  OoUflg*,  Otrenoaster. 


CONTENTS. 


THE  GENERAL  iANAGEMENT  OF  CATTLE. 


L— Introductory. 
IL— Breeding  and  General  Hana^e- 

IILF-PiinelpleA   of    Feeding— Nature 

and  Value  of  Different  Kinds 

or  Food. 
IV.— Boildln«s.  and  the  Manufacture 

of  Manure. 
V.—Dalry    Manasemeat,    the    MUk 

Trade.  Ac. 


%. 


SCOTCH   OBOUP. 


THE  VARIOUS  BREEDS  OF  CATTLE. 

ENGLISH  OEOUP. 


VI.— Shorthome.    By  John  Thornton. 
ViL—Herefords.     By  Thomas  Duck- 
ham. 
VIIL— Derons.       By      Capt.     Tanner 
DaTey. 
IX.— The     Longhoma.      By    Gilbert 

Murray  and  the  Editor. 
X.-aiiBaez  Cattle.    ByA.HeaBman. 
XL— Norfolk  and  Suffolk  Bed  Polled 
Oattle.    By  Thomas  Fulcher. 


-Polled    Galloway  Cattle.     By 
Gilbert  Murray. 
„      Polled  Angus  or  Aberdeenshire 
Cattle.    By  "  Scotus." 
Xm.— The  Ayrshire  Breed  of  Cattle. 

By  Gilbert  Murray. 
XIV.— West    Highland   Cattle.      By 
John  Bobertson. 

WELSH  AND  IBISfl  GEODP. 
Chap. 
XV.— The  Glamorgan  Breed  of  Cattle. 

By  Morgan  Evans. 
XVI. — Pembrokeshire  or  Castlemartin 

CatUe.    By  Morgan  Evans. 

XVII.— The  Anglesea  Cattle.    By  Mor- 
gan Evans. 
XVni.— The  Kerry  Breed  of  CatUe.    By 
E.  O.  Pringle. 

CHANNEL  ISLANDS  GEOUP. 
Chap. 

XDl.— The  Aldemey  Breed  of  Oattle. 
By  "  An  Amateur  Breeder." 
XX.— The  Breton  Breed  of  Cattle. 
By  J.  C.  W.  Douglas  and 
Others. 
XXI.— The  Guernsey  Breed  of  Cattle. 
By  "  A  Native.- 


THE   FIELD"  OFFICE,  346,   8TEAND,   W.C. 


PUBLISHED   BY   HORACE   COX. 


ILLUSTRATED  WITH  FULL-PACE  ENGRAVINGS  DRAWN  PRINCIPALLY  FROM 
LIFE  BY  HARRISON  WEIR. 

In  Imperial  4to.,  bevelled  hoards,  gilt  edges,  price  ISs. 
THE 

SHEEP  AND  PIGS  OF  GREAT  BRITAIN: 

BEINa 

A    SERIES    OF    ARTICLES 

ON  THE  VARIOUS 

BREEDS  OF  SHEEP  AND  PIGS  OP  THE  UNITED  KINGDOM, 
THEIR  HISTORY,  MANAGEMENT,  &c. 

Edited  by  J.  COLEMAN, 

Editor  of  the  Farm  Department  of  "  The  Field,"  and  formerly  Professor  of  Agrloaltaiv 
at  the  Boyal  Aflrrtoultural  College,  Cirencester. 


CONTENTS, 


S  H  B3  B3  P. 


THE  GENERAL  MANAGEMENT  OF  SHEEP. 

Chap. 
I.— Introductory. 
II.— Management    of    Ewes     np    to 

Lambing. 
III.— Preparations  for  and  Attention 

during  Lambing. 
IV.— Management     from     Birth     to 

Weaning, 
v.— From  Weaning  to  Market. 
VI— On  Wool. 

THE  BREEDS  OF  SHEEP. 

Chap. 
I.— Leicester  Sheep.    By  the  Editor. 
II.— Border    Leicesters.      By    John 

Usher. 
III.— Cotawold  Sheep.    By  the  Editor. 
IV.— Long-Wooled  Lincoln  Sheep, 
v.— The     Devon     Long-Wools.     By 

Joseph  Darby. 
VI.— Bomney  Marsh  Sheep.     By  the 

Editor. 

VIL— Southdown  Sheep.  By  the  Editor. 

VIII.— The  Hampshire,  or  West  Country 

Down  Sheep.    By  E.  P.  Sqnarey. 

IX.— Shropshire  Sheep.    By  the  Editor. 

X. — Oxfordshire    Down    Sheep.      By 

Messrs.  Dmce  and  C.  Hobbs. 


ChM). 

XL— The   BoscommoD   Sheep.    By 

B.  O.  Pringle. 
XII.— Negrette  Merino  Sheep. 
XIII. — Exmoor  Sheep. 
XIV.— The    Blackfaoed    or    Scotch 

Mountain  Sheep. 
X  v.— Cheviot  Sheep.    By  John  Usher. 
XVI.— Dorset    Homed     Sheep.      £^ 

John  Darby. 
XVII.— Welsh    Mountain  Sheep.     By 

Morgan  Evans. 
XVIII.— The  Radnor  Sheep.    By  Morgan 

Evans. 
XIX.— Herdwlck    Sheep.     By  H.  A. 

Spedding. 

XX.— Sheep  Farming  in  Queensland. 
By  John  Sidney. 


FIGS. 

Chap. 
I.— General  Management  of  Pigs. 
II.— The  Berkshire  Pig.    By  the  Editor, 
ni.— Black  Suffolk  Pigs. 
IV.— Large  White  Pigs.    By  the  Editor, 
v.— SmaU  White  Pigs.    By  the  Editor. 
VI.— Middle-bred  White  Pigs.    By  the 

Editor. 
Vll.— The  Black   Dorset    Pig.     By    A. 
Benjafield. 


THE   field"  office,  346,   STRAND,   W.O. 


▲  CATALOGUE  OF   BOOKS 


FOURTH    EDITION    NOW    READY. 

Re-vrritUn,  with  addition  and  new  fulLpage  Engravings.     In  om 
volume^  bevelled  hoardg,  gilt  edget,  price  lbs. 

THE 

DOCS  OF  THE  BRITISH  ISLANDS: 

BUMO 

A  SERIES  OF  ARTICLES 

ON 

THE  POINTS  OP  THEIR  VARIOUS  BREEDS, 

▲ND 

THE  TREATMENT  OF  THE  DISEASES  TO  WHICH 
THEY  ABE  SUBJECT. 

BSPBINTED  FBOM  ''THE  FIELD"  NEWSPAPEB. 

By  J.    H.  WALSH, 

**  STOKXHiNeB,"  Editor  or  *<  The  Fiklo." 
{WITH   THE  AID   OF  SEVBRAL   EXPERIENCED   BREEDERS.) 


CONTENTS. 
General  Manafirement. 


L— MAnA(ein«nt  of  Dogn  in  Health. 
IL— Drag*  Oommoaly   Used  for   the 
DiMsaee  oT  Doga,  and  their  Modes 
of  Administration. 


III.— The  Ordinary  Diseases  of  the  Dog 

and  their  Treatment. 
IV.— Judging  at  Dog  Shows  and  Field 

Trials. 


Sportlngr    Doers. 

I  Book 

•Dogs  Used  with  the  Otin.  |    II.— HoandB  and  their  Allies. 

Non-Sportlngr   Dogs. 


L— Watch  Dogs.  m.— Terriers  (other  than  Fox  and  Toy) 

n.— Sheep  and  Cattle  Dogs.  I  IV.— Toy  Dogs. 

"THE   field"  office,  346,  STRAND,  W.C. 


PUBLISHED   BY   HORACE   COX. 


THIS  WORK   CONTAINS   ABOVE   700   PACES,   AND   NEARLY  400 

ILLUSTRATIONS. 

New  a/nd  cheaper  Edition,  with  additions,  price  308.,  by  post  31«.  4d., 

cloth  gilt. 

Shifts  and  Expedients 

OF 

CAMP  LIFE.  TRAVEL,  and  EXPLORATION. 


W.   B.   LORD  AND  T.   BAINES. 

(Royal  Artaiery.)  {F.R.OM.) 


CONTENTS. 


iKTRODUCnON. 
Chap. 
I.— Outfit  to  take  abroad. 
II.— BoatB,  Eaf  tfl,and  Makeshift  Floats 
m.— Working  in  Metal. 
IV. — Hats  and  Houses, 
v.— Extempore   Bridges  and  Make- 
shifts for  Crossing  Eivers  and 
Bavines. 
VI.— Timber  and  its  Utilisation. 
VII.— Sledges  and  Sledge  Travelling. 
Vni.— Boots,  Shoes,  and  Sandals. 


Chap. 
XV.— Fish  and  Amphibious  Animals. 
XVI. — Poisoned    Weapons,    Arrows, 

Spears,  itc. 
XVII.— Tracking,  Hunting,  and  Trap- 


ping. 
, — Palanqi 


XVni.— Palanquins,  Stretchers,  Ambu- 
lances, Ac. 
XIX.— On    Sketching    and    Painting 
under  the  Ordinary  Difficul- 
ties of  Travel. 
XX.— The  Estimation  of  Distances, 


IX. — Waggons    and    other    Wheeled  and  Hints  on  FieldObserving. 

Vehicles.  I      XXI,— Hints  to  Explorers  on  Collect- 

X. — Harness  and  Pack  Animals.  I                     ing  and  Preserving  Objects 

XI. — Camels.  I                      of  Natural  History. 

Xn.— Cattle  Marking.  XXII.— Eopes  and  Twines. 

XIII.— Water,  and  the  Sap  of  Plants.  XXIII.— Bush  Veterinary  Surgery  and 

XIV.— Camp  Cookery.  Medicine. 


Extract  from  the  INTRODUCTION. 

Like  two  voyagers  returned  from  a  long  cruise  in  far-off  seas,  we  throw  together 
our  joint  gleanings  in  many  lands.  These  do  not  consist  of  jewels,  gems,  gold,  or 
furs ;  no  piles  of  costly  merchandise  do  we  lay  at  the  reader's  feet  as  offerings  from 
distant  climes,  but  simply  the  experiences  of  two  roving  Englishmen  who  have 
"roughed  it."  By  those  who  have  to  pass  through  a  campaign,  travel  wild 
countries,  or  explore  little  known  regions,  shifts  must  be  made,  and  expedients  of 
many  kinds  had  recourse  to,  of  which  the  inexperienced  in  such  matters  would  but 

little  dream In  our  travels  and  adventures  we  have  not  been  associated,  the 

paths  trodden  by  us  being  widely  separated.  Whilst  one  was  exploring  the  wilds 
of  North  Australia,  the  other  was  dwelling  in  a  canvas-covered  hole  in  the  earth 
before  Sebastopol.  The  scenes  chanare;  Southern  and  Tropical  Africa  is  visited 
by  the  late  Australian  traveller,  whilst  the  Crimea,  with  its  rugged  hills  and  wild 
ravines,  is  exchanged  for  the  jungles  of  Central  India  by  the  other. 

"THE   field"   OFFICE,  346,   STRAND,   W.C. 


10  A  CATiiLOGUE  OF  BOOKS 

Now  ready,  pp.  480,  price  lbs.,  by  pwt  15».,  VOLUME  I,  of 
THE 

MODERN    SPORTSMAN'S 
GUN   AND    RIFLE, 

INCLUDING 

Came  and  Wildfowl  Guns,  Sporting  and  Match  Rifles, 
AND  Revolvers. 

IN    TWO    VOLUMES. 


Vol.  I.— Game  and  ^Vildfowl  Guns. 


By    J.    H.    WALSH, 

** Stonkbkkob,"  Editob  of  "The  Field," 
Amtktr  <r*  ^V»  o/thtBritUh  I$kmd$,"  "  The  Orefkomd,"  "  BrUUh  Rural  Sporti"  *c. 


**  A  peniMl  of  Mr.  WaUh'a  book  baa  forced  apon  as  tbe  conclusion,  one  that  will 
be  aluired  by  neaiij  erery  reader,  that  it  is  indisputably  the  Rtandard  work  on  the 
■nbiect,  and  ia  Ukely  kmg  to  remain  so— a  position  it  richly  merits.  Sportsmen 
will  anxkmaly  look  forward  to  tbe  eeoond  Tolume  of  the  work,  for  there  is  every 
WOP  to  anOeipale  that  tbe  same  high  sUndard  will  be  maintained,  and  that  the 
rifle  will  reoelTs  aa  comitete  an  exposition  as  tbe  '  Qame  and  Wild  Fowl  Uunn.' 
We  ar»  oi^  fnlfUllof  a  duty  to  the  pablic  when  we  say  that  no  man  connected  in 
any  way  with  nnaor  ffnimery  sboald  be  without  a  copy  of  Mr.  Walsh's  masterly 
reamer— Tk» Dbmtighmm  DaUy  Oatette,  Not.  31,  1883. 

**  It  will  be  aeen  that  the  work  contains  a  variety  of  hints  which  may  he  useful  to 
inWDding  purchasers  of  cons,  so  that  we  can  confidently  recommend  an  intelligent 
^■aee  throogb  it  aa  likdy  to  save  money  and  prevent  disappointment."— iSa^urcfat^ 

**  Taking  the  work  aa  a  whole,  the  sportsman  will  find  in  it  much  information  on 
(una,  shot,  and  kindred  topics."— /*a//  Mall  Oatette. 

**  Tbe  meet  complete  work  that  baa  yet  been  written  on  sporting  guns."— 
8L  Jamet'i  Oazette. 

<*  For  breadth  of  view  and  completeness  this  treatise  could  hardly  be  excelled. 
U  haa,  moteover,  the  advantage  of  reporting  authoritatively  on  the  very  latest 
Its,  both  as  regards  weapons  and  powder  and  shot,  all  which  objects 


of  %  nortKnan's  consideration  seem  to  be  susceptible  of  indefinite  progress." — 
Dattflfeun. 

^  With  sQcb  a  guide  as  this,  all  who  appreciate  sport  will  be  able  to  enjoy  it 
folly,  and,  what  is  of  importance,  will  be  able  to  avoid  much  of  the  danger 
attending  the  use  of  imperfect  weapons.- 7'A«  Bra. 

"THE   field"  office,  346,   8TEAND,  W.C. 


PUBLISHED   BY   HOBACE   COX.  IX 

Demy  ito.,  with  12  full-page  illuitratioru,  some  of  tchich  contain  Portraits  (tf 
Sporting  Celebrities,  and  24  vignettes,  price  £1  Is.,  by  post  £1  2s. 

SPORTING    SKETCHES 

WITH 

PEN   AND    PENCIL. 


BY 

FRANCIS   FRANCIS  AND  A.  W.  COOPER. 


CONTENTS. 

The  First  of  September.  Babbit  Shooting. 

A  Day  in  a  Punt.  Eoaohing. 

Mark  Cock !  GrooBe  Shooting. 

Tronting.  Salmon  Fishing. 

Long  Tails  and  Short  Ones.  Snipe  Shooting. 

Paying  the  Pike.  Grayling  Fishing. 

Crown  4to.,  printed  on  toned  paper,  price  26s.,  by  post  2S<. 
THE 

ANNALS    OF    TENNIS. 

BY 

JULIAN     MARSHALL. 


ThjS  work  will  be  found  very  complete,  and,  it  is  thought,  jnstly  entitled  to  take  its 
place  as  the  standard  work  on  Tennis.  It  has  cost  its  author  much  laborious^ 
research ;  and,  independently  of  its  great  value  to  tennis  players  and  all  lovers  of 
the  game,  it  is  trusted,  from  the  vast  amount  of  carious  lore  it  contains,  the  volume 
will  be  found  not  unworthy  of  a  place  on  the  shelves  of  the  scholar.  The  author, 
himself  a  well-known  amateur,  is  fully  competent  to  speak  with  authority  on  the 
game,  having  had  the  opportunity  of  studying  the  play  of  the  best  Continental,  In 
addition  to  that  of  the  best  English,  masters,  and,  therefore,  may  be  taken  as  a  safe 
guide  by  learners. 


CONTENTS 

I. — Tennis  Abroad. 
n. — Tennis  in  England. 
III. — The  Court  and  Implements. 


rV. — The  Laws  and  their  History, 
v.— The  Game. 
VI. — Appendix. 


THE   field"  office,  346,   STRAND,   W.C. 


12 


A.  CATALOOXTB  OP  BOOKS 


A    PRESENTATION    VOLUME    FOR    CLUBS. 


4io^   hweUed   hoards^  gilt  edges,   (500    pages),  with  appropriate 
iUuttrations,  price  One  Cfuinea,  by  poet  £1  2s.  4d. 

THE 

ENGLISH  GAME  OF  CRICKET: 

OOMPKISINO  A  DIQB8T  OP  ITS 

ORIGIN.  CHARACTER.  HISTORY.  AND  PROGRESS. 

TOOKTHKB  WITH 

AN  EXPOSITION  OF  ITS  LAWS  AND  LANGUAGE. 


CHARLES     BOX, 

MM  Of  0«l*brat«d  Play«n."  Sssaya  on 
■Bd  PtMOoe  of  Cricket,"  ko. 


CONTENTS. 


TOV  Introdaetory. 
VL) 

QluoM  at  ik»  PMt  and  PrMeat  SUta  of 
Oraaty  Cricket. 
Vn.— IflddleMX. 
Vm.— PnbUo  School  Uatcbaa. 
IX— Kent. 
X.— Hampahlre. 
XL— Sorrej. 


hire. 


xniw— N( 

XIV^Ti 


XV.— Warwickshire  and  Derbyshire. 
XVT. — Oloucefltershire. 
XVII. — Lancaiihire  and  Leicestershire. 
XVIII.— The  Eastern  Counties. 

^^l  IntercolonUl  Matches. 

XX  I.— School  and  Village  Matches. 
XXIL— Curiosities  of  Cricket. 
XXin.— Cricket  Grounds. 
XXIV.— Laws  of  the  Game. 

XXV.— Poems,  Son«s,  and  Ballads. 
XXVI.— Glossary  of  Words  and  PhraseR. 
P08T8CBTPT.— Shakespeare  and  Cricket 
—An  Enforced  Dissertation. 


OPINIONS   OP   THE  PRESS. 


'<  The  most  complete  and  interesting  work  on  cricket  ever  published.  No  expense 
has  been  spared  in  making  that  which  is  really  useful  a  very  handsome  volume." — 
BtilT$Hfe, 

^  We  welcome  with  heartiness  a  writer  like  Mr.  Charles  Box,  who  has  so 
pleasantly  united  in  the  splendid  volume  before  us  the  old  order  (of  cricket)  with 
the  new." — Sporting  and  Dramatie  Nan. 

**  This  work  will  prove  interesting  to  all  lovers  of  cricket."— 7Ynj««. 

*^  The  volume  is  a  very  handsome  one  indeed,  destined,  doubtiess,  to  become  an 
authority  on  the  essentially  '  English  Game  of  Cricket.'"— i/omt;!^  Pott. 

"The  beet  work  on  cricket  that  has  yet  come  under  our  no\lice."-  -Nottingham 
Jommal. 

*'  A  handsome  and  well  got-up  volume,  the  author  being  the  man  of  all  others 
qualified  and  in  a  position  for  compiling  such  a  work.— ATen^  Herald. 


"THE   FIELD*'  OFFICE,  346,   STRAND,   W.C. 


PUBLISHED   BY    HORACE    COX.  13 

Nearly  ready,  crown  8vo. 

ITETS     j^ISTD     IsTElTTIIsrG-. 

By  W.  B.  TEGETMEIER,  F.Z.S. 

Large  post  Svo.,  price  8a.  6d.,  by  post  9». 

BY  LAKE  AND  EIVEE: 

AN   ANGLEE'S   RAMBLES  IN    THE   NORTH    OF   ENGLAND 
AND   SCOTLAND. 

Author  of  "A  Book  on  Angling,"  <fec. 
Second  Edition,  large  post  8vo.,  price  5«.,  by  post  5s.  3d. 

JL  3sr  C3-  Xj  I  3sr  a-. 

By   FRANCIS   FRANCIS. 

Author  of  "  A  Book  on  Angling,"  "  By  Lake  and  Eiver,"  "  Hot-Pot,"  4c. 


Prkface. 


CONTENTS. 

Chap. 

v.— The  Pike. 
VI.— Trout  Fishing  with  Bait 
VII.— Fly  Fishing  for  Trout. 
VIII.— Trout  Flies. 
IX.— Grayling  Fishing. 


I.— The  Art  of  Angling, 
n.— Mid- Water  Fishing. 
III.— Surface  or  Fly  Fishing, 
rv.— The  Gudgeon,  the  Pope  or  Buff, 

the  Bleak,  the  Roach,  the  Budd,  I  X.— Salmon  Fishing, 

the  Dace,  the  Chub,  the  Barbel,  {  XI.— Salmon  Flies, 

the  Bream,  the  Carp,  the  Tench,  ;  XII.— On  Tackle  Making, 
the  Perch.                                      I  Addenda. 

Post  8vo.,  in  elotht  price  5«.,  by  post  5«.  4d. 

MISCELLANEOUS      PAPERS 
By  Francis  Francis, 

Author  of  "  A  Book  on  Angling,"  "  By  Lake  and  River,"  "  Angling,"  Ac. 

contents. 

A  Christmas  Reverie— The  First  Day  of  the  Season— A  Strange  Fishing  Match— 
The  Poacher— The  Banker— Reminiscences  of  an  Angler;  or,  Justices  Justice- 
Christmas  in  the  Fisherman's  Snuggery— St.  May  Fly— Catching  TarUrs— 
Under  the  Boughs,  "  Now  and  Then  "—Reminiscences  of  an  Angler,  "  Farmer 
Qumshun  "—Bankers  and  Tinkers— The  Pleasures  of  Grayling  Fishing — Will 
Whistle — An  Angler's  Christmas  Yam— Reminiscences  of  an  Angler,  '*  Squaring 
the  Keeper  ''—A  Week  on  the  Brattle— A  Storm  on  the  Bra wle— White  Trout  and 
Salmon  Fishing  in  Galway— Reminiscences  of  an  Angler,  "  Anglers'  Miseries  " 
—Sam  Coventry— Piscatory  Prosings  "  De  Omnibus  Rebus,"  Ac.— Chewton  Pike. 

"THE   field"  office,   346,   STRAND,  W.C. 


14 


A  CATALOGUE  OF   BOOKS 


Demy  8tK>.,  with  folding  plaU$  and  fulUpage  Ulustrationa  printed  on 
toned  papety  price  21«.,  by  poet  2l5.  9d. 

MODERN    WILDFOWLING. 

BY 

LEWIS     CLEMENT, 

"  WiLDFOWLBB." 


I.— Introdat'tlon. 


CONTENTS 

Clw] 


Uunle-loadinx     Punt     Gans 
(Flint.  Percasaion  and  Ck>pper 


t.ferciu«] 
•  lotion. 


Tob© 


BreeehkMdlof  Ptint  Onnt. 

-LcMdinff  Pont  Oons. 
-Alminf  and  Firing  Pont  Qnns. 
-The  8^Slx«  of  Punt  Qona. 
oO  and  After-recoU  Appa- 


Pont«. 


-Laonchinc  Pnnla  and  Oanoea. 
-Panting. 


Pnnting. 

-My  First  Sln^le-banded  Pant- 
ing Trip. 

Amateur  and  Professiona] 
Puntnncn. 


ciwp. 
XXVII. -) 

XXVIII.  ^Shoulder  GuHB. 
XXIX.) 
XXX.— Flapper  ShooUng. 
XXXI.— Inknd  Duck  Shooting. 
XXXII.— SnllioK  to  Fowl. 

^^J^^;  j-  Decoying  to  the  Qun. 

XXXV.— Decojrlng  in  America. 
XXXVI.— American  Blinds. 
XXXVII.— American      Canvas  •  back 
Shooting. 
XXXVIII.— Shore  Shooting. 
XXXIX.— Flighting. 

XL.)  Curious  WUdfowl  and  Sea- 
XLI.f  fowl  Shooting  Expedients. 
XLIL-Oloae  Time  and  WUdfowl 

and  Sea-fowl  Acts. 
XLUI.— "Wildfowler'B"    Table  of 


XLIV.— Netting  Plovers  and  Snipe 
Snaring. 
XLV.— Snaring  and  Hooking  Sea- 
fowl  on  the  Continent. 
XL VI.— Decoying  into  the  "  Pipes." 
XLVIL— Flight    Ponds    and    Eock 

Fowling, 
XLVni.— Concluding  Bemarks. 

OPINIONS  OF  THE  PBESS. 

**AnezoeUent  work  indeed,  and  full  of  capital  illuotrationR,  is  'Modem  'Wild- 
fowling;'  to  recommend  it  aright  I  should  have,  if  I  were  clever  enough,  and  it  did 
not  already  exist,  to  invent  the  famouR  phrase,  'a  book  no  gentleman's  library 
should  be  without.'  "—Truth,  March  17,  1881. 

♦*  This  book  deals  not  only  with  the  various  modes  of  approaching  or  decojing, 
and  killing  wildfowl  of  all  kinds,  but  enters  into  minute  details  upon  the  construc- 
tkm  of  punts,  both  single  and  double  banded:  sails;  punt  guns,  muzzle-loading  as 
wefl as  Dreechloarting;  recoil  apparatus;  and  shoulder  guns  of  all  patterns,  with 
the  Tmrytng  loada  required  for  different  bores.  In  addition  to  this  are  several 
chapters  devoted  to  a  narration  of  the  adventures  of  the  author  while  in  pursuit  of 

wildfowl,  both  at  home  and  abroad— which  are  very  pleasant  reading 

With  the  addition  of  a  good  index,  sportsmen  will  have  in  this  work  a  capital  vade 
on  the  art  of  wildfowling.— 7%«  ZooloffUt  for  November,  1880. 


THE   field"  OFFICE,  346,   STRAND,  W.C. 


PUBLISHED   BY   HORACE    COX.  15 

Second  Edition.    Large  pott  8vo^  price  It.  M.,  fty  pott  8*. 
THE 

"IDSTONE"    PAPERS. 

A  SERIES   OF  ARTICLES  AND   DESULTORY   OBSERVATIONS   ON 
SPORT  AND  THINGS  IN  GENERAL 

BT 

"ID  STONE," 

Of  "  The  Field." 


CONTENTS. 


Chap. 

XVI.— Brown  In  the  Country. 
XVIL— The  Earthstoppers'  Feast. 
XVIII.— The  White  Snipe. 
XIX. — Swans  and  Eagles. 
XX.— The  Philosophy  of  Mlsalng. 
XXI.— Shooting  In  Aldemey. 
XXII.-Shirkers. 
XXIII.— Our  Black  Heath. 
XXIV.— Traps  and  Calls. 
XXV.— Northward. 
XXVI.— A  Bright  October. 
XXVII.— Varied  Shooting. 


uoap. 

I. — Agricultural  Labourers. 
II.— The  Rough  Eider. 
III.— The  First  of  May. 
IV.—"  Strictly  Confidential." 
v.— Shooting  Dress. 
.     VI.— Some  Old  Portraits. 
VII.— Dens  and  Sanctums. 
VIII.— The  Bat-catcher. 
IX.— Early  Morning  in  London. 
X.— The  Earthstopper. 
XI.— The  Shooting  Pony. 
XII.— Whistle  and  Whip. 

XIII.— Old  Traps  and  Spring-guns.  XXVIII.— The  End  of  the  Season. 

XIV.— Tom     Frere     the     Hard-riding       XXIX.— On  Beating  for  Game. 

Fanner.  |       XXX.— Land  Valuers  and  Stewards. 

XV.— Expecting  Brown.  |     XXXI.— Snipe  Shooting. 

This  work  is  admirably  adapted  for  use  as  a  Sporting  Touriat's 
Handbook,  while  it  is  of  absorbing  interest  to  the  general  reader. 

Large  post  Bvo.,  price  6«.   6d.,  5y  post   6«.   lOd. 

OF 

LIFE,  SCENERY,  AND  SPORT  IN   NORWAY. 


Rev.  M.   R.   BARNARD,   B.A. 

Author  of  "  Sport  in  Norway  and  Where  to  Fbid  It,"  "  Life  of  Thorvalsden," 
and  Translator  of  "  Private  Life  of  the  Old  Northmen,"  and  a  ''  Summer  in 
Iceland,"  Ac. 

"THE   field"  office,   346,   8TBAND,   W.C. 


16  A  CATALOGUE  OF  BOOKS 

jM9t  puhlithed,  Svo.,  pp.  463,  teith  32  illustration*,  price  16«.,  by  po$t 
16s.  lOd. 

ESSAYS 

ON 

SPORT  AND    NATURAL    HISTORY. 
By  J.  E.   HARTING. 


CONTENTS. 

Shooting— Hawking— Fishing — Training  Hawks — Lark  Mirrors — 
PloT«r  Catching — Fishing  with  Cormorants — Decoys — The  Irish 
Wolfhound— The  Badger— Wild  Turkeys— The  Great  Bustard- 
Seals- Wfld  Swans,  Ac. 

Thirty-eight  Essays :  oonolading  with  Practical  Hints  on  Bird 
Preserring  for  the  use  of  Travellers  and  CoUeotors. 

Largs  post  8t».,  pries  8«.,  by  post  6s.  4d. 

RAMBLES  AFTER  SPORT; 

OR, 

TRAVELS  AND  ADVENTURES  IN  THE  AMERICAS  AND  AT  HOME. 
By    "OLIVER    NORTH." 


CONTENTS. 


A  Week's  Dock  Shooting  at  PooI»— That  Sheldrake— Qoail  Shooting  in  California 
—Bear  Hunting  in  Mezioo— Bear  ShooUng  in  California^— My  First  Elk— My  Last 
Bear— Bound  Ci^M  Horn,  Valparaiso,  Santiago— Andacollo,  Lima,  Panama, 
Jamaica— Country  Sports  and  Life  in  Chile— Shooting  in  Chile— Two  Days'  Fishing 
in  ChUe— **  Toling"  for  Doeks  in  Califomia^Up  the  Sacramento— The  White  Elk 
of  Astoria— Sport  in  tbe  Coast  Bange  M oontains. 

In  large  post  8vo.,  limp  cloth,  price  2s.  6d.,  by  post  2s.  Sd. 

OOXjOI^J^IDO  : 

ITS 

AGRICULTUEE,  STOCKFEEDING,  SCENERY,  AND  SHOOTING. 

By   S.   NUGENT   TOWNSHEND,   J. P. 

(''St.  Kambs.") 

"THE  field"  office,  346,   8TEAND,   W.C. 


PUBLISHED  BY   HOEACB   COX.  17 

Now  ready,  VOLUME  I.  (containing  Parts  I.,  II.,  and  III.),  in 
crown  8vo.,  red  cloth,  price  6s.,  hy  poit  6«.  6<J. 

THE 

HUNTING    COUNTRIES 

OF 

ENGLAND, 

THEIR   FACILITIES.   CHARACTER,  AND   REQUIREMENTS. 

A  GUIDE  TO  HUNTma  MEN. 

By     "BROOKS  BY." 


CONTENTS. 

PART  I.— Introduction— The  Belvoir— The  South  Wold— The  Brocklesby— 
The  Burton  and  The  Blank  ney— The  Fitrwilliam— The  Quom— The  Cottesmore— 
The  Puckeridge— The  Old  Berkeley. 

PART  II.— The  North  Warwickshire— The  Pytchley— The  Woodland  Pytchley 
—The  Atherstonev-The  Blllesdon  or  South  Quom— The  Meynell— The  Bicester  and 
Warden  Uill  Hunt— The  Heythrop— The  Old  Berkshire— The  South  Oxfordshire— 
The  South  NottinRhamBhiro— The  East  Kent— The  Tickham— The  Vine— The 
South  Berkshire— Mr  Garth's— The  H.  H.— The  Tedworth— Lord  Ferrers'— The 
Warwick  Bhi  re. 

PART  III.— The  Dulverton— The  Stars  of  the  West— Mr.  Lnttrell's— Lord 
Portsmouth's— The  Essex  and  the  Essex  Union— The  Hertfordshire— The  Whaddon 
Chase— The  Vale  of  "White  Horse— The  Cheshire  and  South  Cheshire— The  Black- 
moor  Vale— The  Cambridgeshire— The  Duke  of  Grafton's— The  Holdemess— The 
Oaklqr— The  North  Herefordshire— The  Duke  of  Buccleuch's— The  Tynedal©— 
Lord  Percy's— The  Morpeth— The  Bufford. 

Also  nmo  ready  (VOLUME  II.). 

PART  rV.— The  Badsworth— The  Southdown— The  East  Essex— The  Bram- 
ham  Moor— The  East  Sussex— The  Essex  and  SufTolk- The  York  and  Ainsty— Lord 
Fitzwilliam's— The  Crawley  and  Horsham— The  West  Kent— Sir  Watkin  Wynn's 
—The  Hursley— The  Hambledon— Lord  Coventry's— The  Grove— The  West  Norfolk 
-The  Bedalo— Lord  Zetland's— The  Craven— The  Surrey  Union. 

PART  v.— The  Old  Surrey— Mr.  Richard  Combe's— The  Burstow- The  Hur- 
worth— The  Cattistock- The  Suffolk— The  Shropshire— The  Earl  of  Radnor— Capt. 
Hon.  F.  Johnstone's— The  South  Durham— The  Worcestershire— The  Ledbury— 
The  South  Herefordshire— The  South  Staffordshire— The  North  Staffordshire— The 
Duke  of  Beaufort's— The  Cotswold- The  Dumfriesshire— The  Albrighton— The 
North  Cotswold. 

Each  Part  is  published  separately,  pries  2s.  6d. 

In  One  Map,  bound  in  red  cloth,  mounfed  on  eantxu,  site  25in.  by  25in.,  price  is.  6dL, 
by  po$t  At.  %d. 

"THE  FIELD"  HUNTING  MAP 

(printed  in  colours), 

GIVING   THE    NAMES    AND    DISTRICTS    OF    EACH    PACK   OF   HOUNDS    FROM 
CARLISLE   TO   LAND'S   END. 

"  THE   FIELD  "   OFFICE,  346,   STBAND,   W.C. 


18  A  CATALOGUE  OF  BOOKS 

^010  ready t  royal  8vo.,  price  10s.  6d.,  hy  post  lis. 

HORSE  BREEDING  RECOLLECTIONS. 

BY 

COUNT     G.      LEHNDORFF, 

CONTAININO : 

Notes  on  the  Breeding  of  Thoronghbreds — In-breeding  and  Out- 
orowing — Pedigrees  of  all  the  Principal  Sires — and  (Genealogical 
Tables  of  Celebrated  Thoroughbreds. 

Post  8vo.,  price  7s.  Sd.,  hy  post  8s. 

MOSS  FROM  A  ROLLING  STONE; 

MOORISH    WANDERINGS    AND    RAMBLING 
REMINISCENCES. 

BT 

•*  SarctRe"  o/**J%e  FUld,"  <tf.,  Amthor  iff  The  Diamond  Diggingt  of  South  Africa:* 

Price  5».  cloth,  by  post  5s.  4d. 

A  Year  of  Liberty ;  op,  Salmon  Ang-Iing  in  Ireland. 

BT 

W.  PEARD,  M.D,.  LL.B. 

In  One  Volume,  larffi  pott  8ro.  iri7A  Mapt,  price  &*..  by  pott  6i.  4</. 

THE  DIAMOND  DIGGINGS  OF  SOUTH  AFRIGA. 

A  PERSONAL  AND  PRACTICAL  ACCOUNT. 

BY 

"  SarcelU;'  of  "  The  Field." 


CONTENTS. 

Put  I  Part 

L— (}eneral  Account  of  the  Fields.  IV.— My  Diary  at  the  Diggings. 

IL— Bootes  to  the  Fields.  j  V.— The  Gold  Fields. 

IIL— Sketches  of  Life  and  Character  on  the  Fields. 


THE   field"  OFFICE,  346,   STRAND,   W.C. 


PUBLISHED   BY  HOBACE   COX.  19 

Thibd  Edition.    Large  post  8ro.  price  7s.  Gd.  cloth,  by  post  It.  lOd. 

FACTS    AND    USEFUL    HINTS 

RELATING    TO 

FISHING    AND    SHOOTING: 

TO   WHICH    IS   ADDED 

A  LIST  OF  RECIPES  FOR  THE  MANAGEMENT  AND  CURE 
OF  DOCS  IN  DISEASE. 

Edited  by   I.  E.  B.  C, 

Editor  of  "  The  Gamekeeper's  and  Game  Preserver's  Account  Book  and  Diary,"  Ac. 


C035rTE2SrTS. 

FISH  INC. 

Baits— Fish— Fish  Hatching— Flies  and  Fly  Making— Flights— Floats— Gnt— Lines 
—Miscellaneous— Nets— Ponds  and  Streams— Rods— Wading  Boots— Wax. 


SHOOTING 

g  —  Coverts  —  Deer— 1 
sts — Preserving — Rabl 

APPIVDIX.— I>iB«a8e8  of  Dogs. 


Birds    and    Beasts- Breeding  — Coverts  — Deer— Dogs— Ferrets— Foxes— Guns— 
Kennel— Miscellaneous— Nets— Preserving — Rabbits— Rifles — Traps — Vermin. 


In  post  8vo.,  with  IHuatrations,  price  3s.  6d. 

THE  PRACTICAL  MANACEMENT  OF  FISHERIES. 

a  book  foe  propeietobs  and  keepees. 
By  Francis  Francis, 

Author  of  ♦'  Fish  Culture,"  "  A  Book  on  Angling,"  "  Reports  on  Salmon 
Ladders,"  Ac.  <feo.  &c. 


CONTENTS. 


Cbap.  CIuu>. 

I.— Fish  and  Fish  Food.  VL— On    the    Rearing    of    Fry   and 

II.— How  to  Grow  Fish  Food  and  how  the  Conduct  of  Ponds,  Stews, 

to  Make  Fishes'  Homes.  Ac. 

III.— On  the  Management  of  Weeds  and      VII.— Some  Hatcheries. 

the  Economy  of  Fishing.  VIII.— Coarse  Fish. 

rV.— The  Enemies  of  Trout  and  how  to  '.     IX.— On  Salmon  and  Trout  Ladders 

Circumvent  them.  '  and  Passes, 

v.— The  Artificial  Incubation  of  Ova.      Appendix.— Notes,  Ac. 


"THE   field"  office,   346,   STRAND,   W.C. 


20  A  CATALOGUE   OP   BOOKS 

Now  nady,  quarto,  price  5».,  by  po9t  6«.  6d. 
THE 

GAMEKEEPER'S   AND    GAME    PRESERVER'S 

Account  l^ook  attir  ©tars. 

By    I.  E.  B.  C. 

of  tracts  and  Uaefal  Hint«  reUtliv  to  Fishing  and  Shooting,"  "The 
Angler's  Dlarj-,"  Ac 


AKD  m  GUAROIAire. 

or  AoRUMurr. 

BKHPTS  AVD  PATmMTB. 


VSKlfnt  DIABT— 

OcnanU  8amm*rr, 

POCLTKT  DlAKT— 
BMSlptaaii 

PHBASAJrr  DUBT— 


ITS  SECTIONS  COMPRISE- 

Dm  DlABT— 

KmumI  Vmmm,  A«m,  VaIim,  fto. 
KaniMl  Oooapanta  at  the  bertnninff  of 

•Mih  Qoartar  of  the  Tear. 
Prodoo*  Rerlater— Bitches. 
Stad  Bealster. 
PwUfTsas. 
Beodptau 


Oamb  Diaby— 

Tol»l  Bammanr  at  the  Besson. 
Prodooe  of  the  Beats  or  Gorerts. 
TsnsBta.  tto.,  to  whom  Owne  should  be 


InTentorjr  of  AppUsnoes,  fto. 
Stock  Valuation. 
General  Balance  Sheet  for  the  Tear. 


In  handy  pocJcet  site,  price  1«.  W.,  by  po»i  Is.  7d. 

THE  GAMEKEEPER'S  SHOOTING  MEMORANDUM  BOOK 

FOB  THE 
REGISTERING  OP  GAME  SHOT,  MEMORANDA  OF  SALE,  Ac. 

By   I.  E.  B.  C. 

Editor  of  "  Facte  and  Usefal  Hlnta  relating  to  Fishing  and  Shooting,"  "  The  Game- 
keeper's and  Game  Preserver's  Account  Book  and  Diary,"  Ac. 

Oroim  Svo.,  price  2>».  6d.,  by  post  2«.  9c?. 

PUBLIC  SHOOTING  QUARTERS 

IN  ENGLAND,  WALES,  SCOTLAND,  IRELAND,  AND  ON  THE 
CONTINENT. 

By    ••  W  I  L  D  F  O  W  L  E  R  ," 

Author  of  "  Shooting  and  Fishing  Trips,"  *•  Modem  Wildfowling,"  «  Table  of 
Loads,"  Ac. 

"THE    field"  OFFICE,  346,   8TBAND,    W.C. 


PUBLISHED   BY   HORACE    COX.  21 

Thibd  Edition,  Enlarged  and  Eevised. 
Large  post  8vo.,  with  Illustrations,  price  5s.  cloth,  by  post  Ss.  4<l. 

THE    COUNTRY    HOUSE: 

A   COLLECTION    OF    USEFUL    INFORMATION    AND    RECIPES, 

Adapted  to  the  Country  Oentleman  and  his  household,  and  of  the  greatest  utility 
to  the  housekeeper  generally. 

By   I.  E.  B.  C, 

Editor  of  "  Facts  and  Useful  Hints  relating  to  Fishing  and  Shooting,"  and  "  The 
Gamekeeper's  and  Game  Presenrer'a  Account  Book  and  Diary." 

Published  Annually.     In  post  8vo.,  price  Is.  6d.,  by  post  1«.  8d. 

THE    ANGLER'S    DIARY 

AND 

TOURIST    FISHERMAN'S    GAZETTEER 

CONTAINS 

A  Record  of  the  Bivers  and  Lakes  of  the  World,  to  which  are  added  a  List  of 

Rivers  of  Qreat  Britain,  with  their  nearest  Railway  Stations. 

Also  Foims  for  Regintering  the  Fish  taken  during  the  year;  as  well  as 

the  Time  of  the  Close  Seasons  and  Angling  Licences. 

By    I.  E.  B.  C. 

Editor  of  "  The  Gamekeeper's  and  Game  Preserver's  Account  Book  and  Diary,"  Ac. 

Fourth  Edition.     In/cap.  8vo.,  price  Is.,  &y  post  Is.  Id. 

GROUND   GAME   ACT,    1880, 

WITH    EXPLANATORY    NOTES, 

Indicating  the  various  periods  at  which  the  law  comes  into  force  under  different 
conditions,  its  effect  on  existing  contracts  between  owners  and  occupiers  of  land, 
and  the  lessees  of  sporting  rights,  the  limitations  placed  upon  the  killing  and 
selling  of  ground  game,  and  other  matters  included  in  the  Act. 

*'  Will  be  a  great  convenience  to  magistrates,  and  to  all  persona  affected  by  the 
Act." — Saturday  Review. 

Third  Edition.    In  /cap.  Svo.,  price  Is.,  by  post  Is.  Id. 

WILD   BIRDS'  PROTECTION  ACT,  1880, 

WITH  COMMENTS  ON   THEIR  RESPECTIVE  SECTIONS 

Explanatory  of  their  bearing  as  regards  owners  and  occupiers  of  land,  sportsmen, 
bird  catchers,  bird  dealers,  Ac. ;  together  with  Notes  on  the  Birds  named  in  the 
Schedule,  their  provincial  names,  &c. 

"  An  accurate  exposition  of  and  commentary  on  the  recent  measure,  and  will 
dispel  many  misconceptions  of  its  acope."— Quarterly  Review. 
'A  capital  annotated  edition  of  the  Act." — Saturday  Revieic. 

"THE   field"  OFFICE,  346,   STRAND,   W.C. 


A  CATALOOUB  OF  BOOKS 


Sbcond  Edition.     In  dtmy  8vo.,  price  10».  6d.,  by  post  lis. 

ESTATE  MANAGEMENT: 

A  PRACTICAL  HANDBOOK  FOE  LANDLORDS.  STEWARDS, 
AND  PUPILS, 

WITH  A 

LEGAL  SUPPLEMENT  BY  A  BARRISTER. 

AJ.80 

Cnuutt   Bigi)t    from    a    laiitrlortl'it   ^otiit   of    tSitfo, 
By    CHARLES     E.    CURTIS. 


L— Leuiiwa 
II.— r»mVi 


CONTENTS, 


ralaations. 

in.-] 

IV. 
v.— FenoM. 
VL— QrMneii  raluble  for  Wood*  and 

Planutlona. 
VIL— The  Home  Farm. 


^'jy- j  Bepairs  and  Materials. 

xi— The  Bliffbts  of  Wheat  and  other 

CerealB. 
XL— Aocotinte. 

XII.— Usefal  Bales  of  Arithmetic  and 
Mensuration. 


In  croicn  8vo.,  price  Is. 

CATECHISM  OF  ESTATE  MANAGEMENT. 

SECTION    I. 

LETTING     AND     LEASES. 

BT 

CHAS.  E.  CURTIS,   P.S.I., 


ProTeMor  of  Estate  Management  at  the  College  of  A^coltare,  Principal  of  the 
Sdiool  of  latate  Manaffement,  Aathor  of  *'  EsUte  Manaipement,"  &c. 

Jn  crown  8tx>.,  vnth  Thirteen  full-page  Plates,  price  2«.  6d.,  61/ 
post  2s.  9d. 

The  Swimming  Instructor: 

A  TREATISE   ON  THE  ARTS  OF  SWIMMING  AND 
DIVmG. 

By    WILLIAM    WILSON. 

Anther  of  **  Swimming,  Diving,  and  How  to  Save  Life,"  ''  The  Bather's  Manual," 
"  Binte  on  Swimming." 

"THE   FIELD*'  OFFICE,   346,   STBAND,    W.C. 


PUBLISHED   BY   HORACE   COX.  2^ 

Just  pvhlished,  228  pp.,  demy  8vo.,  price  4«.,  by  post  4s.  4ci. 

SILOS 

FOB 

PEESEEVING  BRITISH  FODDER  CROPS  STORED 
IN  A  OREEN  STATE. 

Notes  on  the  Ensilage  of  Grasses,  Clovers,  Vetches,  &c. 

COMPILED  FBOM  VAEIOUS  SOUBCES 

BY    THB 

STJB-EXDITOI^    OIF    "the    DF^IEILID." 


I.  INTBODUCTOBV.  COHT^HTS. 

II.  Cbops  fob  thk  Silo.— Grasses,  cloven,  lucerne,  vetches,  green  rye  and 
oats,  roots  and  miscellaneous  crops. 

III.  Making  thb  Silo.— Earthem  pits  and  other  simple  forms  of  silo;  best 
kinds ;  American  silos  of  concrete,  wood,  Ac. ;  English  silos. 

rV.  Cost  of  Sii.08.— Estimation  of  capacity  and  cost  of  American  silos  built 
of  wood,  concrete,  brick,  stone,  and  mixed  materials ;  French  and  English 
silos;  relative  capacity  of  silos  and  hay-bams;  roofs,  weights,  and  planks. 

V.  Filling  and  Emptying  the  Silo.— Mixture  of  dry  material  with  green 
fodder;  influence  of  wet  weather;  chopping  up  fodder;  slow  r.  quick 
filling ;  the  use  of  salt ;  the  covering  boards ;  closing  the  doorway ; 
opening  the  pit. 

VL  COVKBINO  UP  THK  SiLO.— Straw  and  other  materials. 

VII.  Wkightinq  the  Silo.— Amount  of  weight  to  put  on;  consequenoea  of 
insufficient  pressure. 

VIII.  Effect  ok  Ensilage  on  Foddbbs.— Quality  of  ensilage  shown  by  qaallty 
of  butter;  fermentation  in  the  pit;  advantages  and  losses  produced  by 
fermentation. 

IX.  Feeding  Qualities  of  Ensilage.— Sir  John  Lawes  on  ensilage  and  turnips; 
American  and  English  experiments  in  feeding  and  milk  production. 

X.  SCHMABY  OF  PbACTIOB. 

Appendix. 

Now  read/y,  price  6d. 

HARVESTING  CROPS  INDEPENDENTLY 
OF  WEATHER: 

Practical  Notes  on  the  Neilson  System  of  Harvesting. 

By   "AG  RICO  LA," 
And  otheb  Contbibutobs  to  "  Thb  Field." 


THE   field"  office,   346,   STBAND,   W.C. 


24  A  CATALOGUE  OF  BOOKS 

niuttrated  Vfith  numerotu  Woodcuts,  post  8vo.,  price  5«., 
hy  post  5s.  3d., 

The  Internal  Parasites  of  our  Domesticated 

ANIMALS: 

A  MANUAL  OF  THE  ENTOZOA  OF  THE  OX,  SHEEP, 
DOG,  HORSE,  PIG,  AND  OAT. 

By  T.  8PEKCES  COBBOLD,  MJ).,  PJL8.,  P.L.S. 
In  erown  8vo.,  price  2s.  6<i.,  by  post  2s.  Sd. 

MANURES: 

THEIB  RESPECTIVE  MERITS  FROM   AN  ECONOMICAL 
POINT  OP  VIEW. 

Author  of  "  Omum  :  iU  Oiiftn.  Blstory,  and  Vtrtaaa."  "  The  PoUto  and  its  Colttvation,"  fto. 


CONTENTS. 

PABT.  I.— Definition  of  the  Word  "Manure"— Nature's  Modes  of  Applying 
Fertiliner*— HiBtory— Clansiflcation. 

PART  n.— The  Value  of  Plouxhinx  Down  Green  Crops— Weeds— Sea-weed— 
8U»w—8«wita>t— Tanners'  Bark— Wood  Ashes— Peat— Bape  Cake— Hemp— 
Pop|«7,  OoUoa,  and  Cocoa-nut  Cakes— Bran— Malt  Dust— Brewers*  Grains— Coal— 
8ooi— Ghanoal. 

PABT  m.— Dead  AiUmals— Fish— Blood— Animalised  Charcoal- Bones— Horn 
•-WooDn  Ba^a,  Hairs,  Featheni,  ftc.-Night-soil— Farmyard  Manure— Guano. 

PABT  IV.— Salts  of  Ammonia— Salu  of  Magnesia— Salts  of  Potash— Salts  of 
Soda— Oommoo  Salt— Lime  and  its  Compounds— '*  Ooze." 


In  erown  Svo.,  price  2«.,  by  post  2s.  2d. 

THE  POTATO  AND  ITS  CULTIVATION. 

BY    A-.    'W.    CB»B^WS. 

Aotbar  of  "  Onano  -.  its  Origin.  Hiatory,  and  Virtoas,"  "  Manares :  their  Respective 
Merita,  Ac. 


CONTENTS. 


DeriTation  —  History  —  Constituents  —  Varieties  —  Sprouting  -  Soils  —  Planting- 
Manures— Earthing  up— Disease — Scab— Storing— Forcing— Producing  New 
Varieties — Substitutes  for  the  "  Potato  "—Miscellaneous  Information. 


THE   field"  OFFICE,  346,   STRAND,   W.C. 


PUBLISHED  BT  HORACE  COX. 


25 


Demy  8eo.,  price  Z$.  6d.,  by  pott  3».  9rf.,  Illiutrated  tnth  several  Diagrams. 
THE 

PRACTICAL     SURVEYOR : 

A  TREATISE   UPON   SURYEYING. 

SPECIALLY  AEEANQED  FOE  THE  GUIDANCE  OF  PUPILS,  STEWAEDS, 
THE  SCHOLASTIC  PEOFESSION,  AND  INTENDING  EMIQEANTS. 

BY     THOMAS      HOLLOWAY. 


CONTENTS. 


Ch«E 


kp. 

I.— The  Man  and  his  Outfit. 
II.— The    Chain  —  Cautions    to   Be- 
ginners— Best  Figure  for  Chain 
Surveying. 
III.— Boundaries . 
IV.— Setting-out  Lines  by  the  Eye  and 

passing  Obstructions, 
v.— Division  of  the  Circle  and  Use  of 
Box  Sextant  —  Chain  Angles 
Condemned— Cross  Staff  Con- 
demned—  The  Optical  Square 
— Measuring  Inaccessible  Dis- 
tances. 
VI.— The      Theodolite  —  Settlng-out 

Lines  with  the  Theodolite. 
VII. — Eeduction  of  the  Measure  of  Un- 
dolating  Qrotmd  to  Horizontal 
Measures  and  Table  of  Vertical 
Angles. 
VIII.— Measuring    Lines- The     Offset 
Staff  and  taking  Offsets. 
IX.— To  prove  the  Correctness  of  Ob- 
servatlonB  taken  with  the  Sex- 
tant— Single  Fields  Measured 
with    the  Chain  and    Optical 
Square,  so  that  the  Areas  can 
be  directly  Calculated. 
X.— To  Set-out  a  Eight  Angle  with 
the  Chain— Figures  of  the  Lines 
of  Measurement  best  adapted 
to  Irregular  Fields 
XI.— Equalising       Boundaries,      and 
Drawing  a  Triangle  equal  to  a 
given  Figure. 
XII.— Computation  of    Areas  of  Irre- 
gular Fields. 


Chap. 

XIII.— Example  of  a  Survey  of  several 
FieldB  together,  and  the  Field 
Book. 
XrV. — Befereoce  Numbers  to  Maps— 
To  put  Detached  Buildings 
in  correct  Positions  on  a  Plan 
by   Means    of    Unmeasured 
IJnes — Lines    Measured    on 
the  Work— Making  Stations. 
XV.— Plotting  —  Selection  and   Ma- 
nagement of  Paper— Inking 
in. 
XVI. — Surveys  made  for  the  purpose 
of  Dividing  Land  into  Stated 
Quantities. 
XVII.— Settlng-out     AUotmenta    and 

Building  Plots. 
XVIII.— Angles  and  Bearings,  and  Use 
and  Adjustment  of  Circular 
Protractor. 
XIX. — Traverse  Surveys. 
XX. — Trespass. 

XXI. — Quality  Lines — Superstructures 
and  Works  Underground — 
Harvest  and  Coppice  Work 
— Beducing  Plans  from  a 
Large  Plan  to  a  Small  One. 
XXII.— To   Copy   a    Map— Colouring, 

Penmanship,  Ac. 
XXIII. — Commencement    of    a    Parish 
Survey— Surveying  to  a  Scale 
of  Feet. 
XXrV.- Town  Surveying. 
XXV.— Testing    the    Accuracy   of    a 
Survey— General  Bemarks. 
XXVI,— In  Memory  of  the  Past. 


Price  6d.,  by  post  7d. ;  or  2$.  6d.  the  half-dozen. 

"The  Field"  Duplicate  Judging  Book 

Facilitates  the  work  of  the  Judges  at  Poultry  and  other  Shows,  by  a  very  simple 
method  of  entering  and  preserving  a  duplicate  judging  list. 


THE   field"  office,  346,   STEAND,   W.C. 


26  A  CATALOGUE  OF  BOOKS 

SbOOKD  Edition.    /»  Three  Pan*,  large  pott  89<K,  price  &t^  dy  pott  fit.  4dl.,  each. 
THE 

FARM,  GARDEN.  AND  STABLE. 

By   I.  E.  B.  C. 

Editor  of  "  The  Oamekeeper't  and  Game  Preaenrer's  Aooonnt  Book  and  Diary." 


C025ra7Ei5rTS. 

Part  I.— The  Farm. 

Cattle— Crojpa—Dairy— Diseases— Fencing— Food  for  Stock— Manures— 

MlsoeUaneoas— Pigs-Sheep— Soils— Weeds— Woods. 

Part  II.— The  Garden. 

Flowers— Frait-Hooses— Lawns— Manoree—Hiscellaneoas— Seeds— Trees  and 
Shmbs—VflVetables— Vermin— Weeds. 

Part  lil.-The  Stable. 
OmtIi— — Diseaf    FeediBg— Hameaa,  *&— MlaoeUaneons— SUble  Management 

PuBiasHSD  Annually.    Demy  4fo.,  jMric«  U.,  6y  poH  Is.  2^d. 

THE  RURAL  ALMAMAC 

AND   SPORTSMAN'S    ILLUSTRATED  CALENDAR  FOR   1883. 


CONTENTS. 
▲NOUVO.— Bam*  laportant  Lagal  DmUom  ■AMttof  FIsheriM-Alxtnot  of  Prixusip«a 

BT»-lawa  ai>d«r  thm  Satanoa  AcU-FlshTy  DIsUloiiilB  Bnriaixl  and  Wales,  their  Coart 

Lbaita,  *o.— Oom  8— om  for  SaliDoa.  Tnmt,  sad  other  Vlali-Oost  of  Bod  Lioenoes  for 

Salman  and  Trooi. 
ATHX<BTIC8.— Saramarr  at  the  8  won  MBS. 
CATTI.B.-OatUe  YahMa  In  UBI;  Hotaa  on  Sales.  *«.-PartraiUi  of  Aberdeen  POQed  and  Jersey 

OatUe— Liatof  Herd  Books  and  8tad  Bo(d(»-Ltat of  Falra.  abowlnff  where  the  different 

Bleeds  of  CatUa,  Bheep,  and  Pin  mi^  be  porohaaed. 
OOACHIirO.-A  BatnMpeoitve  Medley. 

CmiCKXT.— AnAaUan  CMokatera  In  ■nnland-Bn^iah  Cricket  in  1882. 
DOOA.— A  Twehre  Months'  Oanlne  Dotnoa-FieldTriala  in  ISSa-Portraito  of  Clumber  and 

niiMBT  8panlela.B«idHn»ton  and  Airedale  Tetrlet*— Kennel  Notea,  Ac. 
FAIB8  AinSllAUUTS.-^UiA  of  Falra  and  Markets.  ahowin«  where  the  different  Breeds  of 

Honea and  Ponlea,  Oattto,  Sheep, and  Pisa  may  bepomhaned 
HOB8B8.— Hone  Showa  in  U»— Uatof  Stud  Booka,  Co.— Longest  Jump  on  Beoord— Lirt.  of 

Fkira,  ahowlnr  when  the  dlAvent  Dreeda  of  Honea  and  Ponlea  may  be  purcbaaed. 
HUKTlliO.— The  Kmpreaa  of  Aostrla  at  Home :  Meet  In  the  Park  at  OOdOlUV— Channa  and 

Pruapeuts  in  Hnnonr  Coontrtoa— Paoks  of  Hoonda ;  their  Mastera,  Hontemen,  whips, 

XaBndB|Ae  —Hints  for  Hanttny  Man. 
LAWN  TBNNIS.— Motaa  on  the  Toamaments  of  im,  with  Lista  of  Winners  of  the  varloas 

aAraunBANDTBNNIS.- Besnlts  of  the  Oxford  snd  Csmbridee  Matohes,  and  the  PubUc 
Suioola  BaoqoetB  Challengs  Cop,  fMm  their  Commenoement  to  the  Preaent  Time. 


BOWntO.— Boat-ractof  in  Un— Beanlta  of  the  Oxford  and  Cambridge  Matohes  from  the 

Commenoement  to  the  Pnaent  Time. 
SHOOTDfO.— The  Legal  Oeaanni  for  Killing  Game,  WildTowl,  fto.— Mems  for  Shooting  Men. 
THX  TUBF.— Notea  on  Baeing  In  UBS— The  Past  and  Future  of  Steeplechasing— A  Betroepeo- 

tHe  Medley— Baoe  and  Steeplechase  Firtores  of  1863. 
TACHTIHO.— Taoht  Baeing  in  IMB— List  of  Winners,  with  amount  ot  Prizes,  &c.— Notes  on 

the  Tide  Tsblea. 
MI8CBLLANBOU8.— Bookeriea  and  bow  to  form  them— Sleighs  or  Snow  Ploughs— Hints  on 

Batcatching— Insect  Pests  at  Home  snd  Abrosd-Cslendsr  of  the  Month,  Ac.,  Ac. 

"THE  FIELD"  OFFICE,  346,   8TBAND,   W.C. 


PUBLISHED   BY   HORACE   COX.  27 


Published   Half-Ybablt.      Fcap.   8vo.,  price  10s.   6d.,  hy  post 
10s.  6d. 

THE  COURSING  CALENDAR. 

IT   CONTAINS 

BETUBNS  OP  ALL  THE  PUBLIC  OOUESES  RUN  IN  GREAT  BRITAIN 

AND  IRELAND,  REVISED  LIST  OF  ADDRESSES  OF  COURSING 

SECRETARIES,  JUDGES,  SLIPPERS,  AND  TRAINERS; 

List  of  Members  of  the  National  Club,  Reports  of  the  Meetings 

AND 

A  COMPLETE  LIST  OF  WATERLOO  CUP  WINNERS. 

Edited  by  "STONEHENGE," 

Editor  of   ^  The   Field,"   Author  of  "  Dogs  of   the  BritiBh   Islands." 

Published  Annually.    In  large  post  Svo. 
THE 

KENNEL  CLUB  STUD  BOOK: 

CONTAININO  A  COMPLKTB 

RECORD  OF  DOG  SHOWS  AND  FIELD  TRIALS, 

WITH 

Pedigrees  of  Sporting  and  Non-Sporting  Dogs. 

Vol.  I.,  from  1859  to  1873,  price  128.  6d.,  by  post  138. 

Peick  IDs.  6d.,  by  Post  lOa.  lOd.  each — 

Vol.    IL,  1874;    Vol.   m.,    1875;   Vol.   IV.,    187G ;   Vol.  V.,    1877; 

VoL  VL,  1878  ;  Vol.  VH.,  1879  ;  Vol.  VIII.,  1880 ;  Vol.  IX.,  1881  ; 

Vol.  X.,  1882. 

Vols.  Vin.  to  X.  are  also  published  in  Four  Parts. 

Fourth  Edition.     Large  post  8vo.,  price  Is.  6d.,  hy  post  Is.  6d. 
By  H.  F.  WILKINSON,  of  the  London  Athletic  Club, 


I. — Ancient  Athletics. 
II.— The  Rise  of  Modem  Athletics. 
III.— The     Management     of     Athletic 

Meetings. 
IV.— Training, 
v.— Wallting. 
VI.— Running. 


CONTENTS 
Chai 


ftp. 
Vll. — Jumping. 
VIII.— Hammer  Throwing  and  Weight 
Putting. 
DL— The  Laws  of  Athletics. 
X.— Statistics. 

XI.— The  best  Performances  on  Re- 
cord. 


THE   field"  office,   346,   STRAND,   W.C. 


A  CATALOGUE  OF   BOOKS 


Thud  Edition.    Price  It.  6rf.,  6y  pott  It.  lOrf. 

FIGURE     SKATING; 

BEING 

THE  THEORY  AND  PRACTICE  OF  THE  ART  AS  DEVELOPED 
IN  ENGLAND. 

WITH 

A  OUNCE  AT   ITS  ORIGIN   AND   HISTORY. 

Bt  H.  0.  YANDEBYELL  and  T.  MAXWELL  WITHAM 
{Mm^btn  ^  tkt  Lmim  SkaHng  CTui). 


Th«r*  are  thooMuida  of  akAtera  who  attain  a  small  amount  of  skill  in  Figure 
WkattWf,  and  th«re  atop^  baeaoae  they  neither  know  what  to  do  or  how  to  do  it.  A 
nUnuM  to  thla,  the  admowledged  Text  Book  on  Figare  Skating,  will  solve  any 
diflkvl^  that  maj  have  slopped  progreaa  for  years. 

FOUBIB  Eomox.    /a  pott  8n>.,  Ump  doth,  gtit,  priet  it.  M.,  6y  pott  it.  M. 

THE   ART  OF  SKATING; 


ILLUSTRATIONS,     DIAGRAMS,    AND    PLAIN    DIRECTIONS    FOR    THE 

ACQUIREMENT  OF    THE  MOST  DIFFICULT  AND  GRACEFUL 

MOVEMENTS. 

By  GEOSOE   ANDEB80H  ("Cyelot"), 

▼lee-PrwidaBt  of  th*  CrTctal  P»teoe  8k»Unc  aab.  and  for  many  yean  Preaident 
of  the  OUfl«ow  SkaUoc  Club. 


Jmsi  ptMithed,  price  6t.,   bp  pott   6t.   2d. 

"COMBINED  FIGURE  SKATING;" 

Being  a  collection  of  300  combined  flgnres,  as  skated  by  the  Skating  Club,  London, 
the  Wimbledon  Skating  Clab,  Ac.,  illnstrated  by  130  scaled  diagrams,  showing  the 
correct  direction  of  erery  cure  executed  by  the  skater,  and  the  recognised  amount 
of  circUng  roond  the  centre;  together  with  a  progressive  series  of  alternate 
**  calls."  The  llgaree  are  named  in  accordance  with  the  revised  system  of  nomen- 
elatare  and  mles  for  combined  figure  skating,  compiled  by  the  Skating  Club. 


.uuuwwM,  Sept.  11,  1883.    Diagrams  of  the  combined  figures  in  the  first  and  second 
elaas  tests  of  the  National  Skiving  Association  are  included. 

By  Montagu  S.  F.  Monier-Wiluams  and  Stanley  P.  Monier-Williams 

{Memben  of  the  WinMedon  Skating  Club). 
"THE   field"  OFFICE,  346,  STRAND,   W.C. 


PUBLISHED  BY  HORACE  COX. 


29 


In  crown  Svo.,  price  5«,,  by  post  5«.  4d. 

OR, 

THE  ARTS  OF  ROWING  AND  TRAINING. 


EDWIN    DAMPIER    BRICKWOOD 

(EX-AMATEUR  CHAMPION  OF  THE  THAMES). 


CONTENTS. 


ROWING. 
Chap. 
I.— Introduction :  Past  and  Present 
Condition  of  Boat- racing. 
II.— Bacing  Boats:  Their  History  and 

Fittings, 
m.— The  Sliding  Seat:  Its  Invention, 

Adoption,  and  Theory, 
rv.— How  to  Use  an  Oar.  and  Sculls. 
V. — Faults  and  Errors:  What  to  avoid. 
VI. — Steering:    Coxswain    and    Non- 
coxswain. 
VII. — Teaching  Beginners. 
VIII. — Coaching  for  Baces,  and  Selec- 
tion of  Crews. 
IX.— The  Varieties   and   Conduct  of  j 
Boat-races. 
X.— The  Laws  of  Boat-racing.  | 


Chap. 
XI.— The    Qoaliflcations   of    Ama- 
teurs. 

XII.— Boat  Clubs :  Their  Orgaaiaatlon 
and  Administration. 

XIII.— Historical  Kecords,  A.D.  1716  to 
1838. 

XIV.— Historical  Eecords,  A.D.  1889  to 

1855. 
XV.— Historical  Becords,  AJ>.  1856  to 
1876. 

TRAINING. 
XVI.— Its  Principles. 
XVII.— Its  Practice. 
XVIII.— Prohibitions,  AUments,  Ac 
APPENDIX.— Eules  for  Betting. 
Index. 


Fttblishsd  Annually.     Price  1«.,  by  post  U.  Id. 

THE  ROWING  ALMANACK  AND  OARSMAN'S 
COMPANION. 

Edited    by   E.    D.    BRICKWOOD 

(EX-AMATEUR  CHAMPION  OF  THE  THAMES), 

Author  Of  "  Boat-Bacing ;  or,  the  Arts  of  Bowing  and  Training." 


CONT 

A  Calendar  with  Space  for  Memoranda 
and  High  Water  Table,  with  a  Table 
of  Tidal  Observations. 

The  Definition  of  an  Amateur. 

Becord  of  all  Begattas  and  Principal 
Club  Baces,  with  a  copious  Index. 

A  Beview  of  the  Bowing  Season. 

An  Itinerary  of  the  Biver  Thames  from 
Oxford  to  Putney,  showing  all  the 
points  of  interest,  with  Hotels,  &c. 


ENTS. 

A  Bowing  Directory. 

The  Lengths  of   the   different    Bacing 

Courses. 
The  Laws  of  Boat-Bacing. 
Henley  Begatta  Bules. 
Metropolitan  Amateur  Begatta  Bules. 
The  Bule  of  the  Boad  on  the  Biver. 
Thames  Navigation  Bules. 
Tables  of  Winners  of  all  the  principal 

Baces  and  Begattas. 


THE   field"  OFFICE,   346,   STBAND,   W.C. 


30  A  CATALOGUE  OF  BOOKS 


"REPORTS  on   SALMON    LADDERS,   with    Original 

-'-*'    Dr»wiii(r«,  PUns.  and  Sections.    By  Francis  Francis.    In  post  4to.,  price 
U.  6d^  by  po«t  2«.  7tf. 

MANUAL  of  the  LAW  of  SALMON  FISHERIES  in 

ENGLAND  and  WALES,  with  a  eopioas  Index.    By  Spbnceb  Walpols, 
one  of  Her  Majesty's  Inspectors  of  Salmon  Fisheries.    Price  '2$.  6d^  by  post  28. 8d. 


"W 


ILDFOWLER»S  "   TABLE  of  LOADS  for  Shoulder 

Guns  of  all  Sixes  (Cylinder  and  Ohoke-bored)  and  for  Punt  Guns. 
8iCOin>  Edition.    Price  9d^  by  poet  7d. 

THE  GUN  TRIAL  of  1879.— The  "FIELD"  TRIAL  of 

■*-  It,  1«.  and  SfMtors  GUNS,  1879;  with  FaU  Score  of  the  Shooting,  and  a 
Detrlptfon  and  Woodoata  of  the  Force  Gaojre  and  Machine  Best  used ;  compiled 
from  Baporta  and  Artiolaa  pubUahed  in  *'The  Field."  Also  an  Appendix,  con- 
talnlnc  OorTeapoadBnee  on  Large  and  Small  Bores,  the  Detonation  of  (Gunpowders 
•Dd  ottber  BzploalTea.  Experiments  on  the  Velocity  and  the  Striliing  Force  of  Shot, 
Ae.    Priee  l«.,  by  poat  U.  Id. 

A  TABLE  of  CALCULATIONS  for  nse  with  the  "Field" 
Force  Gauge  for  Testing  Shot  Guns.    Also  an  Illustration  and  Description 
of  the  Appsr«tiis.    In  demy  4to.,  price  2j.  sd. 

THE  RULES   of   PIGEON  SHOOTING.     Published  by 

-^  Specisl  Permission,  the  Hnrlinghsm  Club  and  the  Gun  Club  Bulea  of  Pigeon 
Shooting.  Sbcond  lomox.  Bound  together  in  doth,  gilt  edges,  price  Cd.,  by 
poUTdL 

THE  RANELAGH  CLUB  RULES  for  Flying  Cky  Pigeon 

-*-  Shooting.  Edited  by  H.  Cholmdndklbt-Pbkiibll.  Cloth,  gilt  edges,  price 
U^  by  post  1«.  Id, 

THE  LAWS  of  LAWN  TENNIS,  as  adopted  by  the 
-*-  MMytobooe  Orlekat  Club  and  the  AU  EngUuid  Croquet  and  Lawn  Tennis 
Cfaib.    EDtaradatStotkmers'HaU.    Prioe  M.,  by  post  Sid. 

THE  "  FIELD  "  LAWN  TENNIS   UMPIRES'  SCORE- 

•*•  SHEET  BOOK  (with  instructions  for  the  use  of  UnipireH).  Adapted  for 
tiie  ose  of  Umpires  and  flayers,  as  nsed  at  the  Chsmpionship  Meetingn.  Price  6d., 
by  post  «K 

FIELD"    LAWN    TENNIS    CALENDAR:    for 

1888.    ConUining  the  Laws  of  Lawn  Tennis ;  List  of  SecretarieR  and(their 
Summary  of  the  Season,  1882;  On  the  MstcinK  of  Tennis  Lawns  and 
and  Grarel  Courts:    with  Full  Reports  of  all  Tournaments  and  Club 
of  the  Season  1882.    Edited  by  B.  C.  Evklbioh  (of  the  "  Field  ").   Price  !«., 
by  post  U.  2|<1 

THE  ITALIAN  SYSTEM  of  BEE  KEEPING;  being  an 

-■-  Exposition  of  Don  Giotto  Ulivi's  Economical  Frame  Hives  and  Honey 
Extractor.  By  Arthur  J.  Danyell,  late  Capt.  H.M.  9l8t  Begiment.  With  Illustra- 
tions. Price  1*.,  by  post  Is.  Id.  This  pamphlet  contains  practical  directions  for 
the  making  and  utilisation  of  frame  hires,  costing  less  than  '2x.  each,  and  a  centri- 
fugal honey  extractor  costing  5«.  or  6$. 

"THE   FIELD"  OFFICE,  346,   STRAND,   W.C. 


THE 


PUBLISHED  BY  HORACE   COX.  31 

In  4<o.,  printed  on  toned  papeVy  teith  plates,  price  55.,  by  post  5s.  4rf. 

THE   QUEEN    LACE    BOOK: 

AN 

Historical    and    Descriptive    Account    of   the    Hand-made 
Antique   Laces   of  all  Countries. 


This  work  contains  the  whole  of  the  series  of  articles  on  Antique  Point  Lace 
which  have  been  published  in  "  The  Queen."  It  will  prove  an  invaluable  guide 
and  book  of  reference  to  ladies  interested  in  Antique  Lace,  and,  with  its  highly 
ornamental  embossed  cover,  will  form  a  handsome  ornament  for  the  drawing-room 
table. 

ENGLISH  TRANSLATIONS  OF  THE  CLASSICS. 

Pout   Sro.,   MO  partes^  price  7.«.   M. 

HALF-HOURS  with  GREEK  and  LATIN  AUTHORS. 

FROM    VARIOUS    ENGLISH    TRANSLATIONS,    WITH 
BIOGRAPHICAL  NOTICES. 

By    G.    H.    JENNINGS  and   W.   8.  JOHNSTONE. 

Authors  of  a  "A  Book  of  ParliamenUry  Anecdote." 

Ill  post  8fo.,  price  5s.,  by  post  5s.  Ad. 

THE   BARB  AND  THE  BRIDLE: 

A 

HANDBOOK   OF   EQUITATION    FOR   LADIES, 

AND 

MANUAL  OF  INSTRUCTION  IN  THE  SCIENCE  OF  RIDING   FROM  THE 

PREPARATORY  SUPPLING  EXERCISES  ON  FOOT  TO  THE  FORM 

IN  WHICH  A  LADY   SHOULD  RIDE  TO  HOUNDS. 

By   "VIEILLE    MOUSTACHE." 

Handsomely  bound  in  cloth,  price  8«.  6</.,  by  post  3*.  9</. 

ACTING  CHARADES  FOR  OLD   AND  YOUNG. 

BY 
Author   of    "The    Enchanted   Toasting   Fork,"    Ac. 


THE   QUEEN  "  OFFICE,  346,   STRAND,   W.C. 


▲   CATALOOUE  OF   BOOKS. 


PUBUSHKD  Ahkuallt.    In  demg  4to.,  prtcv  l«.,  fty  po»t  U.  Sd. 
THE 

ILLUSTRATED  QUEEN  ALMANAC 

AND  LADY'S  CALENDAR  for  1883. 


_  Ita  oootCDta  will  be  foood  a  Chromo-Lithoffraphic  Plate  of  Arrasene, 
Ohwflte.  and  0«nnan  Linen  Thread  Embroidery,  and  other  Fancy  Work;  two 
Ooloored  Plate*  of  Knittin«and  Crochet  and  Crochet  Deai^s,  numerous  illustrations 
in  the  Ladle*'  Worktable  Department,  and  Fifteen  Portraits  of  eminent  persons: 
•too  De*i(ns  for  Painting  on  China,  Tapeetrr  Paintinf ,  Plant  Decoration,  &c.,  and 
De*i«fn*  for  Childreo's  Oostome*,  FMhionable  Lingerie,  Ladies'  Dresses,  Ac.  Full 
tnforatation  is  giren  rdating  to  the  Bojal  Family,  Boyal  Hooseholds,  Government. 
Me^  TrIcTcIing  for  Ladles,  Indian  Embroidery,  Fan  Painting,  and  much  other  useful 
Informanon. 

**  Too  have  not  the  book  of  riddle*  about  70a,  have  you  ?  "—Merrf  WivM. 
Price  St,  by  post  5s.  3d. 

"WHETSTONES    FOR   WITS;" 

OR 

DOUBLE    ACROSTICS. 

Edited  bt  "CRACK." 
Skcokd  Edition.    Price  2«.  6d.,  by  pott  2t.  9d. 

OUR    COMMON    INSECTS: 

PIEST  STEPS  TO   ENTOMOLOGY. 

BY      3^I^S.      B.      "W^.      C03C. 


FointTB  EomoH.    In  deatf  4/o.,  on  toned  paper,  and  in  fonc^  cover ,  price  2«.f 
ftw  poit  2*.  Id. 

THE  BOOK  OF  DINNER  SERVIETTES; 

COMTAININO 

NKW  INTBODUCnON  ON  THE  DECORATION  OF  DINNER  TABLES, 
AND  GENERAL  DIRECTIONS  FOR  FOLDING  THE  SERVIETTES. 
There  are  Tvcentf-one  different  Hndi  given,  with  Ninety-two  Woodcuts  Illuttrative 
of  the  rariout  Folds  required,  and  the  Serviettes  complete. 

In  paper  cover,  price  6d. 
By  "  THE  G.  C."    (Author  of  "  Bound  the  Table  "). 


"  THE  QUEEN  "  OFFICE,   346,   STRAND,   W.C. 


B  k^ 

»,  0 


y 11         \   r^  f    /    / 

ID     lUDDo